mediaconvert

package
v1.99.1 Latest Latest
Warning

This package is not in the latest version of its module.

 Go to latest Published: Feb 10, 2020 License: Apache-2.0 Imports: 10 Imported by: 0

Documentation

Overview

Package mediaconvert provides the client and types for making API requests to AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

AWS Elemental MediaConvert

See https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29 for more information on this service.

See mediaconvert package documentation for more information. https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdk-for-go/api/service/mediaconvert/

Using the Client

To contact AWS Elemental MediaConvert with the SDK use the New function to create a new service client. With that client you can make API requests to the service. These clients are safe to use concurrently.

See the SDK's documentation for more information on how to use the SDK. https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdk-for-go/api/

See aws.Config documentation for more information on configuring SDK clients. https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdk-for-go/api/aws/#Config

See the AWS Elemental MediaConvert client MediaConvert for more information on creating client for this service. https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdk-for-go/api/service/mediaconvert/#New

Index

Constants

View Source 
const (
	// AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMixBroadcasterMixedAd is a AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix enum value
	AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMixBroadcasterMixedAd = "BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD"

	// AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMixNormal is a AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix enum value
	AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMixNormal = "NORMAL"
)

Choose BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD when the input contains pre-mixed main audio + audio description (AD) as a stereo pair. The value for AudioType will be set to 3, which signals to downstream systems that this stream contains "broadcaster mixed AD". Note that the input received by the encoder must contain pre-mixed audio; the encoder does not perform the mixing. When you choose BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD, the encoder ignores any values you provide in AudioType and FollowInputAudioType. Choose NORMAL when the input does not contain pre-mixed audio + audio description (AD). In this case, the encoder will use any values you provide for AudioType and FollowInputAudioType.

View Source 
const (
	// AacCodecProfileLc is a AacCodecProfile enum value
	AacCodecProfileLc = "LC"

	// AacCodecProfileHev1 is a AacCodecProfile enum value
	AacCodecProfileHev1 = "HEV1"

	// AacCodecProfileHev2 is a AacCodecProfile enum value
	AacCodecProfileHev2 = "HEV2"
)

AAC Profile.

View Source 
const (
	// AacCodingModeAdReceiverMix is a AacCodingMode enum value
	AacCodingModeAdReceiverMix = "AD_RECEIVER_MIX"

	// AacCodingModeCodingMode10 is a AacCodingMode enum value
	AacCodingModeCodingMode10 = "CODING_MODE_1_0"

	// AacCodingModeCodingMode11 is a AacCodingMode enum value
	AacCodingModeCodingMode11 = "CODING_MODE_1_1"

	// AacCodingModeCodingMode20 is a AacCodingMode enum value
	AacCodingModeCodingMode20 = "CODING_MODE_2_0"

	// AacCodingModeCodingMode51 is a AacCodingMode enum value
	AacCodingModeCodingMode51 = "CODING_MODE_5_1"
)

Mono (Audio Description), Mono, Stereo, or 5.1 channel layout. Valid values depend on rate control mode and profile. "1.0 - Audio Description (Receiver Mix)" setting receives a stereo description plus control track and emits a mono AAC encode of the description track, with control data emitted in the PES header as per ETSI TS 101 154 Annex E.

View Source 
const (
	// AacRateControlModeCbr is a AacRateControlMode enum value
	AacRateControlModeCbr = "CBR"

	// AacRateControlModeVbr is a AacRateControlMode enum value
	AacRateControlModeVbr = "VBR"
)

Rate Control Mode.

View Source 
const (
	// AacRawFormatLatmLoas is a AacRawFormat enum value
	AacRawFormatLatmLoas = "LATM_LOAS"

	// AacRawFormatNone is a AacRawFormat enum value
	AacRawFormatNone = "NONE"
)

Enables LATM/LOAS AAC output. Note that if you use LATM/LOAS AAC in an output, you must choose "No container" for the output container.

View Source 
const (
	// AacSpecificationMpeg2 is a AacSpecification enum value
	AacSpecificationMpeg2 = "MPEG2"

	// AacSpecificationMpeg4 is a AacSpecification enum value
	AacSpecificationMpeg4 = "MPEG4"
)

Use MPEG-2 AAC instead of MPEG-4 AAC audio for raw or MPEG-2 Transport Stream containers.

View Source 
const (
	// AacVbrQualityLow is a AacVbrQuality enum value
	AacVbrQualityLow = "LOW"

	// AacVbrQualityMediumLow is a AacVbrQuality enum value
	AacVbrQualityMediumLow = "MEDIUM_LOW"

	// AacVbrQualityMediumHigh is a AacVbrQuality enum value
	AacVbrQualityMediumHigh = "MEDIUM_HIGH"

	// AacVbrQualityHigh is a AacVbrQuality enum value
	AacVbrQualityHigh = "HIGH"
)

VBR Quality Level - Only used if rate_control_mode is VBR.

View Source 
const (
	// Ac3BitstreamModeCompleteMain is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeCompleteMain = "COMPLETE_MAIN"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeCommentary is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeCommentary = "COMMENTARY"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeDialogue is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeDialogue = "DIALOGUE"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeEmergency is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeEmergency = "EMERGENCY"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeHearingImpaired is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeHearingImpaired = "HEARING_IMPAIRED"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeMusicAndEffects is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeMusicAndEffects = "MUSIC_AND_EFFECTS"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeVisuallyImpaired is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeVisuallyImpaired = "VISUALLY_IMPAIRED"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeVoiceOver is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeVoiceOver = "VOICE_OVER"
)

Specify the bitstream mode for the AC-3 stream that the encoder emits. For more information about the AC3 bitstream mode, see ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex E).

View Source 
const (
	// Ac3CodingModeCodingMode10 is a Ac3CodingMode enum value
	Ac3CodingModeCodingMode10 = "CODING_MODE_1_0"

	// Ac3CodingModeCodingMode11 is a Ac3CodingMode enum value
	Ac3CodingModeCodingMode11 = "CODING_MODE_1_1"

	// Ac3CodingModeCodingMode20 is a Ac3CodingMode enum value
	Ac3CodingModeCodingMode20 = "CODING_MODE_2_0"

	// Ac3CodingModeCodingMode32Lfe is a Ac3CodingMode enum value
	Ac3CodingModeCodingMode32Lfe = "CODING_MODE_3_2_LFE"
)

Dolby Digital coding mode. Determines number of channels.

View Source 
const (
	// Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfileFilmStandard is a Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfile enum value
	Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfileFilmStandard = "FILM_STANDARD"

	// Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfileNone is a Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfile enum value
	Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfileNone = "NONE"
)

If set to FILM_STANDARD, adds dynamic range compression signaling to the output bitstream as defined in the Dolby Digital specification.

View Source 
const (
	// Ac3LfeFilterEnabled is a Ac3LfeFilter enum value
	Ac3LfeFilterEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Ac3LfeFilterDisabled is a Ac3LfeFilter enum value
	Ac3LfeFilterDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

Applies a 120Hz lowpass filter to the LFE channel prior to encoding. Only valid with 3_2_LFE coding mode.

View Source 
const (
	// Ac3MetadataControlFollowInput is a Ac3MetadataControl enum value
	Ac3MetadataControlFollowInput = "FOLLOW_INPUT"

	// Ac3MetadataControlUseConfigured is a Ac3MetadataControl enum value
	Ac3MetadataControlUseConfigured = "USE_CONFIGURED"
)

When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, encoder metadata will be sourced from the DD, DD+, or DolbyE decoder that supplied this audio data. If audio was not supplied from one of these streams, then the static metadata settings will be used.

View Source 
const (
	// AccelerationModeDisabled is a AccelerationMode enum value
	AccelerationModeDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// AccelerationModeEnabled is a AccelerationMode enum value
	AccelerationModeEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Enable Acceleration (AccelerationMode) on any job that you want processed with accelerated transcoding.

View Source 
const (
	// AfdSignalingNone is a AfdSignaling enum value
	AfdSignalingNone = "NONE"

	// AfdSignalingAuto is a AfdSignaling enum value
	AfdSignalingAuto = "AUTO"

	// AfdSignalingFixed is a AfdSignaling enum value
	AfdSignalingFixed = "FIXED"
)

This setting only applies to H.264, H.265, and MPEG2 outputs. Use Insert AFD signaling (AfdSignaling) to specify whether the service includes AFD values in the output video data and what those values are. * Choose None to remove all AFD values from this output. * Choose Fixed to ignore input AFD values and instead encode the value specified in the job. * Choose Auto to calculate output AFD values based on the input AFD scaler data.

View Source 
const (
	// AntiAliasDisabled is a AntiAlias enum value
	AntiAliasDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// AntiAliasEnabled is a AntiAlias enum value
	AntiAliasEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

The anti-alias filter is automatically applied to all outputs. The service no longer accepts the value DISABLED for AntiAlias. If you specify that in your job, the service will ignore the setting.

View Source 
const (
	// AudioCodecAac is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecAac = "AAC"

	// AudioCodecMp2 is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecMp2 = "MP2"

	// AudioCodecWav is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecWav = "WAV"

	// AudioCodecAiff is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecAiff = "AIFF"

	// AudioCodecAc3 is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecAc3 = "AC3"

	// AudioCodecEac3 is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecEac3 = "EAC3"

	// AudioCodecEac3Atmos is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecEac3Atmos = "EAC3_ATMOS"

	// AudioCodecPassthrough is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecPassthrough = "PASSTHROUGH"
)

Type of Audio codec.

View Source 
const (
	// AudioDefaultSelectionDefault is a AudioDefaultSelection enum value
	AudioDefaultSelectionDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// AudioDefaultSelectionNotDefault is a AudioDefaultSelection enum value
	AudioDefaultSelectionNotDefault = "NOT_DEFAULT"
)

Enable this setting on one audio selector to set it as the default for the job. The service uses this default for outputs where it can't find the specified input audio. If you don't set a default, those outputs have no audio.

View Source 
const (
	// AudioLanguageCodeControlFollowInput is a AudioLanguageCodeControl enum value
	AudioLanguageCodeControlFollowInput = "FOLLOW_INPUT"

	// AudioLanguageCodeControlUseConfigured is a AudioLanguageCodeControl enum value
	AudioLanguageCodeControlUseConfigured = "USE_CONFIGURED"
)

Choosing FOLLOW_INPUT will cause the ISO 639 language code of the output to follow the ISO 639 language code of the input. The language specified for languageCode' will be used when USE_CONFIGURED is selected or when FOLLOW_INPUT is selected but there is no ISO 639 language code specified by the input.

View Source 
const (
	// AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17701 is a AudioNormalizationAlgorithm enum value
	AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17701 = "ITU_BS_1770_1"

	// AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17702 is a AudioNormalizationAlgorithm enum value
	AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17702 = "ITU_BS_1770_2"

	// AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17703 is a AudioNormalizationAlgorithm enum value
	AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17703 = "ITU_BS_1770_3"

	// AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17704 is a AudioNormalizationAlgorithm enum value
	AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17704 = "ITU_BS_1770_4"
)

Choose one of the following audio normalization algorithms: ITU-R BS.1770-1: Ungated loudness. A measurement of ungated average loudness for an entire piece of content, suitable for measurement of short-form content under ATSC recommendation A/85. Supports up to 5.1 audio channels. ITU-R BS.1770-2: Gated loudness. A measurement of gated average loudness compliant with the requirements of EBU-R128. Supports up to 5.1 audio channels. ITU-R BS.1770-3: Modified peak. The same loudness measurement algorithm as 1770-2, with an updated true peak measurement. ITU-R BS.1770-4: Higher channel count. Allows for more audio channels than the other algorithms, including configurations such as 7.1.

View Source 
const (
	// AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControlCorrectAudio is a AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControl enum value
	AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControlCorrectAudio = "CORRECT_AUDIO"

	// AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControlMeasureOnly is a AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControl enum value
	AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControlMeasureOnly = "MEASURE_ONLY"
)

When enabled the output audio is corrected using the chosen algorithm. If disabled, the audio will be measured but not adjusted.

View Source 
const (
	// AudioNormalizationLoudnessLoggingLog is a AudioNormalizationLoudnessLogging enum value
	AudioNormalizationLoudnessLoggingLog = "LOG"

	// AudioNormalizationLoudnessLoggingDontLog is a AudioNormalizationLoudnessLogging enum value
	AudioNormalizationLoudnessLoggingDontLog = "DONT_LOG"
)

If set to LOG, log each output's audio track loudness to a CSV file.

View Source 
const (
	// AudioNormalizationPeakCalculationTruePeak is a AudioNormalizationPeakCalculation enum value
	AudioNormalizationPeakCalculationTruePeak = "TRUE_PEAK"

	// AudioNormalizationPeakCalculationNone is a AudioNormalizationPeakCalculation enum value
	AudioNormalizationPeakCalculationNone = "NONE"
)

If set to TRUE_PEAK, calculate and log the TruePeak for each output's audio track loudness.

View Source 
const (
	// AudioSelectorTypePid is a AudioSelectorType enum value
	AudioSelectorTypePid = "PID"

	// AudioSelectorTypeTrack is a AudioSelectorType enum value
	AudioSelectorTypeTrack = "TRACK"

	// AudioSelectorTypeLanguageCode is a AudioSelectorType enum value
	AudioSelectorTypeLanguageCode = "LANGUAGE_CODE"
)

Specifies the type of the audio selector.

View Source 
const (
	// AudioTypeControlFollowInput is a AudioTypeControl enum value
	AudioTypeControlFollowInput = "FOLLOW_INPUT"

	// AudioTypeControlUseConfigured is a AudioTypeControl enum value
	AudioTypeControlUseConfigured = "USE_CONFIGURED"
)

When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, if the input contains an ISO 639 audio_type, then that value is passed through to the output. If the input contains no ISO 639 audio_type, the value in Audio Type is included in the output. Otherwise the value in Audio Type is included in the output. Note that this field and audioType are both ignored if audioDescriptionBroadcasterMix is set to BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD.

View Source 
const (
	// BillingTagsSourceQueue is a BillingTagsSource enum value
	BillingTagsSourceQueue = "QUEUE"

	// BillingTagsSourcePreset is a BillingTagsSource enum value
	BillingTagsSourcePreset = "PRESET"

	// BillingTagsSourceJobTemplate is a BillingTagsSource enum value
	BillingTagsSourceJobTemplate = "JOB_TEMPLATE"
)

Optional. Choose a tag type that AWS Billing and Cost Management will use to sort your AWS Elemental MediaConvert costs on any billing report that you set up. Any transcoding outputs that don't have an associated tag will appear in your billing report unsorted. If you don't choose a valid value for this field, your job outputs will appear on the billing report unsorted.

View Source 
const (
	// BurninSubtitleAlignmentCentered is a BurninSubtitleAlignment enum value
	BurninSubtitleAlignmentCentered = "CENTERED"

	// BurninSubtitleAlignmentLeft is a BurninSubtitleAlignment enum value
	BurninSubtitleAlignmentLeft = "LEFT"
)

If no explicit x_position or y_position is provided, setting alignment to centered will place the captions at the bottom center of the output. Similarly, setting a left alignment will align captions to the bottom left of the output. If x and y positions are given in conjunction with the alignment parameter, the font will be justified (either left or centered) relative to those coordinates. This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.

View Source 
const (
	// BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorNone is a BurninSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorNone = "NONE"

	// BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorBlack is a BurninSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorWhite is a BurninSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorWhite = "WHITE"
)

Specifies the color of the rectangle behind the captions.All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.

View Source 
const (
	// BurninSubtitleFontColorWhite is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorWhite = "WHITE"

	// BurninSubtitleFontColorBlack is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// BurninSubtitleFontColorYellow is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorYellow = "YELLOW"

	// BurninSubtitleFontColorRed is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorRed = "RED"

	// BurninSubtitleFontColorGreen is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorGreen = "GREEN"

	// BurninSubtitleFontColorBlue is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorBlue = "BLUE"
)

Specifies the color of the burned-in captions. This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.

View Source 
const (
	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorBlack is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorWhite is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorWhite = "WHITE"

	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorYellow is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorYellow = "YELLOW"

	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorRed is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorRed = "RED"

	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorGreen is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorGreen = "GREEN"

	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorBlue is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorBlue = "BLUE"
)

Specifies font outline color. This option is not valid for source captions that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.

View Source 
const (
	// BurninSubtitleShadowColorNone is a BurninSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleShadowColorNone = "NONE"

	// BurninSubtitleShadowColorBlack is a BurninSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleShadowColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// BurninSubtitleShadowColorWhite is a BurninSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleShadowColorWhite = "WHITE"
)

Specifies the color of the shadow cast by the captions.All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.

View Source 
const (
	// BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacingFixedGrid is a BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacing enum value
	BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacingFixedGrid = "FIXED_GRID"

	// BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacingProportional is a BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacing enum value
	BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacingProportional = "PROPORTIONAL"
)

Only applies to jobs with input captions in Teletext or STL formats. Specify whether the spacing between letters in your captions is set by the captions grid or varies depending on letter width. Choose fixed grid to conform to the spacing specified in the captions file more accurately. Choose proportional to make the text easier to read if the captions are closed caption.

View Source 
const (
	// CaptionDestinationTypeBurnIn is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeBurnIn = "BURN_IN"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeDvbSub is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeDvbSub = "DVB_SUB"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeEmbedded is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeEmbedded = "EMBEDDED"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeEmbeddedPlusScte20 is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeEmbeddedPlusScte20 = "EMBEDDED_PLUS_SCTE20"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeScte20PlusEmbedded is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeScte20PlusEmbedded = "SCTE20_PLUS_EMBEDDED"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeScc is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeScc = "SCC"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeSrt is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeSrt = "SRT"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeSmi is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeSmi = "SMI"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeTeletext is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeTeletext = "TELETEXT"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeTtml is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeTtml = "TTML"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeWebvtt is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeWebvtt = "WEBVTT"
)

Specify the format for this set of captions on this output. The default format is embedded without SCTE-20. Other options are embedded with SCTE-20, burn-in, DVB-sub, SCC, SRT, teletext, TTML, and web-VTT. If you are using SCTE-20, choose SCTE-20 plus embedded (SCTE20_PLUS_EMBEDDED) to create an output that complies with the SCTE-43 spec. To create a non-compliant output where the embedded captions come first, choose Embedded plus SCTE-20 (EMBEDDED_PLUS_SCTE20).

View Source 
const (
	// CaptionSourceTypeAncillary is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeAncillary = "ANCILLARY"

	// CaptionSourceTypeDvbSub is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeDvbSub = "DVB_SUB"

	// CaptionSourceTypeEmbedded is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeEmbedded = "EMBEDDED"

	// CaptionSourceTypeScte20 is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeScte20 = "SCTE20"

	// CaptionSourceTypeScc is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeScc = "SCC"

	// CaptionSourceTypeTtml is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeTtml = "TTML"

	// CaptionSourceTypeStl is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeStl = "STL"

	// CaptionSourceTypeSrt is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeSrt = "SRT"

	// CaptionSourceTypeSmi is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeSmi = "SMI"

	// CaptionSourceTypeTeletext is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeTeletext = "TELETEXT"

	// CaptionSourceTypeNullSource is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeNullSource = "NULL_SOURCE"

	// CaptionSourceTypeImsc is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeImsc = "IMSC"
)

Use Source (SourceType) to identify the format of your input captions. The service cannot auto-detect caption format.

View Source 
const (
	// CmafClientCacheDisabled is a CmafClientCache enum value
	CmafClientCacheDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// CmafClientCacheEnabled is a CmafClientCache enum value
	CmafClientCacheEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

When set to ENABLED, sets #EXT-X-ALLOW-CACHE:no tag, which prevents client from saving media segments for later replay.

View Source 
const (
	// CmafCodecSpecificationRfc6381 is a CmafCodecSpecification enum value
	CmafCodecSpecificationRfc6381 = "RFC_6381"

	// CmafCodecSpecificationRfc4281 is a CmafCodecSpecification enum value
	CmafCodecSpecificationRfc4281 = "RFC_4281"
)

Specification to use (RFC-6381 or the default RFC-4281) during m3u8 playlist generation.

View Source 
const (
	// CmafInitializationVectorInManifestInclude is a CmafInitializationVectorInManifest enum value
	CmafInitializationVectorInManifestInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// CmafInitializationVectorInManifestExclude is a CmafInitializationVectorInManifest enum value
	CmafInitializationVectorInManifestExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

The Initialization Vector is a 128-bit number used in conjunction with the key for encrypting blocks. If set to INCLUDE, Initialization Vector is listed in the manifest. Otherwise Initialization Vector is not in the manifest.

View Source 
const (
	// CmafManifestCompressionGzip is a CmafManifestCompression enum value
	CmafManifestCompressionGzip = "GZIP"

	// CmafManifestCompressionNone is a CmafManifestCompression enum value
	CmafManifestCompressionNone = "NONE"
)

When set to GZIP, compresses HLS playlist.

View Source 
const (
	// CmafManifestDurationFormatFloatingPoint is a CmafManifestDurationFormat enum value
	CmafManifestDurationFormatFloatingPoint = "FLOATING_POINT"

	// CmafManifestDurationFormatInteger is a CmafManifestDurationFormat enum value
	CmafManifestDurationFormatInteger = "INTEGER"
)

Indicates whether the output manifest should use floating point values for segment duration.

View Source 
const (
	// CmafSegmentControlSingleFile is a CmafSegmentControl enum value
	CmafSegmentControlSingleFile = "SINGLE_FILE"

	// CmafSegmentControlSegmentedFiles is a CmafSegmentControl enum value
	CmafSegmentControlSegmentedFiles = "SEGMENTED_FILES"
)

When set to SINGLE_FILE, a single output file is generated, which is internally segmented using the Fragment Length and Segment Length. When set to SEGMENTED_FILES, separate segment files will be created.

View Source 
const (
	// CmafStreamInfResolutionInclude is a CmafStreamInfResolution enum value
	CmafStreamInfResolutionInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// CmafStreamInfResolutionExclude is a CmafStreamInfResolution enum value
	CmafStreamInfResolutionExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

Include or exclude RESOLUTION attribute for video in EXT-X-STREAM-INF tag of variant manifest.

View Source 
const (
	// CmafWriteDASHManifestDisabled is a CmafWriteDASHManifest enum value
	CmafWriteDASHManifestDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// CmafWriteDASHManifestEnabled is a CmafWriteDASHManifest enum value
	CmafWriteDASHManifestEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

When set to ENABLED, a DASH MPD manifest will be generated for this output.

View Source 
const (
	// CmafWriteHLSManifestDisabled is a CmafWriteHLSManifest enum value
	CmafWriteHLSManifestDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// CmafWriteHLSManifestEnabled is a CmafWriteHLSManifest enum value
	CmafWriteHLSManifestEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

When set to ENABLED, an Apple HLS manifest will be generated for this output.

View Source 
const (
	// ColorMetadataIgnore is a ColorMetadata enum value
	ColorMetadataIgnore = "IGNORE"

	// ColorMetadataInsert is a ColorMetadata enum value
	ColorMetadataInsert = "INSERT"
)

Enable Insert color metadata (ColorMetadata) to include color metadata in this output. This setting is enabled by default.

View Source 
const (
	// ColorSpaceFollow is a ColorSpace enum value
	ColorSpaceFollow = "FOLLOW"

	// ColorSpaceRec601 is a ColorSpace enum value
	ColorSpaceRec601 = "REC_601"

	// ColorSpaceRec709 is a ColorSpace enum value
	ColorSpaceRec709 = "REC_709"

	// ColorSpaceHdr10 is a ColorSpace enum value
	ColorSpaceHdr10 = "HDR10"

	// ColorSpaceHlg2020 is a ColorSpace enum value
	ColorSpaceHlg2020 = "HLG_2020"
)

If your input video has accurate color space metadata, or if you don't know about color space, leave this set to the default value FOLLOW. The service will automatically detect your input color space. If your input video has metadata indicating the wrong color space, or if your input video is missing color space metadata that should be there, specify the accurate color space here. If you choose HDR10, you can also correct inaccurate color space coefficients, using the HDR master display information controls. You must also set Color space usage (ColorSpaceUsage) to FORCE for the service to use these values.

View Source 
const (
	// ColorSpaceConversionNone is a ColorSpaceConversion enum value
	ColorSpaceConversionNone = "NONE"

	// ColorSpaceConversionForce601 is a ColorSpaceConversion enum value
	ColorSpaceConversionForce601 = "FORCE_601"

	// ColorSpaceConversionForce709 is a ColorSpaceConversion enum value
	ColorSpaceConversionForce709 = "FORCE_709"

	// ColorSpaceConversionForceHdr10 is a ColorSpaceConversion enum value
	ColorSpaceConversionForceHdr10 = "FORCE_HDR10"

	// ColorSpaceConversionForceHlg2020 is a ColorSpaceConversion enum value
	ColorSpaceConversionForceHlg2020 = "FORCE_HLG_2020"
)

Determines if colorspace conversion will be performed. If set to _None_, no conversion will be performed. If _Force 601_ or _Force 709_ are selected, conversion will be performed for inputs with differing colorspaces. An input's colorspace can be specified explicitly in the "Video Selector":#inputs-video_selector if necessary.

View Source 
const (
	// ColorSpaceUsageForce is a ColorSpaceUsage enum value
	ColorSpaceUsageForce = "FORCE"

	// ColorSpaceUsageFallback is a ColorSpaceUsage enum value
	ColorSpaceUsageFallback = "FALLBACK"
)

There are two sources for color metadata, the input file and the job configuration (in the Color space and HDR master display informaiton settings). The Color space usage setting controls which takes precedence. FORCE: The system will use color metadata supplied by user, if any. If the user does not supply color metadata, the system will use data from the source. FALLBACK: The system will use color metadata from the source. If source has no color metadata, the system will use user-supplied color metadata values if available.

View Source 
const (
	// ContainerTypeF4v is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeF4v = "F4V"

	// ContainerTypeIsmv is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeIsmv = "ISMV"

	// ContainerTypeM2ts is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeM2ts = "M2TS"

	// ContainerTypeM3u8 is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeM3u8 = "M3U8"

	// ContainerTypeCmfc is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeCmfc = "CMFC"

	// ContainerTypeMov is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeMov = "MOV"

	// ContainerTypeMp4 is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeMp4 = "MP4"

	// ContainerTypeMpd is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeMpd = "MPD"

	// ContainerTypeMxf is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeMxf = "MXF"

	// ContainerTypeRaw is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeRaw = "RAW"
)

Container for this output. Some containers require a container settings object. If not specified, the default object will be created.

View Source 
const (
	// DashIsoHbbtvComplianceHbbtv15 is a DashIsoHbbtvCompliance enum value
	DashIsoHbbtvComplianceHbbtv15 = "HBBTV_1_5"

	// DashIsoHbbtvComplianceNone is a DashIsoHbbtvCompliance enum value
	DashIsoHbbtvComplianceNone = "NONE"
)

Supports HbbTV specification as indicated

View Source 
const (
	// DashIsoPlaybackDeviceCompatibilityCencV1 is a DashIsoPlaybackDeviceCompatibility enum value
	DashIsoPlaybackDeviceCompatibilityCencV1 = "CENC_V1"

	// DashIsoPlaybackDeviceCompatibilityUnencryptedSei is a DashIsoPlaybackDeviceCompatibility enum value
	DashIsoPlaybackDeviceCompatibilityUnencryptedSei = "UNENCRYPTED_SEI"
)

This setting can improve the compatibility of your output with video players on obsolete devices. It applies only to DASH H.264 outputs with DRM encryption. Choose Unencrypted SEI (UNENCRYPTED_SEI) only to correct problems with playback on older devices. Otherwise, keep the default setting CENC v1 (CENC_V1). If you choose Unencrypted SEI, for that output, the service will exclude the access unit delimiter and will leave the SEI NAL units unencrypted.

View Source 
const (
	// DashIsoSegmentControlSingleFile is a DashIsoSegmentControl enum value
	DashIsoSegmentControlSingleFile = "SINGLE_FILE"

	// DashIsoSegmentControlSegmentedFiles is a DashIsoSegmentControl enum value
	DashIsoSegmentControlSegmentedFiles = "SEGMENTED_FILES"
)

When set to SINGLE_FILE, a single output file is generated, which is internally segmented using the Fragment Length and Segment Length. When set to SEGMENTED_FILES, separate segment files will be created.

View Source 
const (
	// DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentationEnabled is a DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation enum value
	DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentationEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentationDisabled is a DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation enum value
	DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentationDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

When you enable Precise segment duration in manifests (writeSegmentTimelineInRepresentation), your DASH manifest shows precise segment durations. The segment duration information appears inside the SegmentTimeline element, inside SegmentTemplate at the Representation level. When this feature isn't enabled, the segment durations in your DASH manifest are approximate. The segment duration information appears in the duration attribute of the SegmentTemplate element.

View Source 
const (
	// DecryptionModeAesCtr is a DecryptionMode enum value
	DecryptionModeAesCtr = "AES_CTR"

	// DecryptionModeAesCbc is a DecryptionMode enum value
	DecryptionModeAesCbc = "AES_CBC"

	// DecryptionModeAesGcm is a DecryptionMode enum value
	DecryptionModeAesGcm = "AES_GCM"
)

Specify the encryption mode that you used to encrypt your input files.

View Source 
const (
	// DeinterlaceAlgorithmInterpolate is a DeinterlaceAlgorithm enum value
	DeinterlaceAlgorithmInterpolate = "INTERPOLATE"

	// DeinterlaceAlgorithmInterpolateTicker is a DeinterlaceAlgorithm enum value
	DeinterlaceAlgorithmInterpolateTicker = "INTERPOLATE_TICKER"

	// DeinterlaceAlgorithmBlend is a DeinterlaceAlgorithm enum value
	DeinterlaceAlgorithmBlend = "BLEND"

	// DeinterlaceAlgorithmBlendTicker is a DeinterlaceAlgorithm enum value
	DeinterlaceAlgorithmBlendTicker = "BLEND_TICKER"
)

Only applies when you set Deinterlacer (DeinterlaceMode) to Deinterlace (DEINTERLACE) or Adaptive (ADAPTIVE). Motion adaptive interpolate (INTERPOLATE) produces sharper pictures, while blend (BLEND) produces smoother motion. Use (INTERPOLATE_TICKER) OR (BLEND_TICKER) if your source file includes a ticker, such as a scrolling headline at the bottom of the frame.

View Source 
const (
	// DeinterlacerControlForceAllFrames is a DeinterlacerControl enum value
	DeinterlacerControlForceAllFrames = "FORCE_ALL_FRAMES"

	// DeinterlacerControlNormal is a DeinterlacerControl enum value
	DeinterlacerControlNormal = "NORMAL"
)

- When set to NORMAL (default), the deinterlacer does not convert frames that are tagged in metadata as progressive. It will only convert those that are tagged as some other type. - When set to FORCE_ALL_FRAMES, the deinterlacer converts every frame to progressive - even those that are already tagged as progressive. Turn Force mode on only if there is a good chance that the metadata has tagged frames as progressive when they are not progressive. Do not turn on otherwise; processing frames that are already progressive into progressive will probably result in lower quality video.

View Source 
const (
	// DeinterlacerModeDeinterlace is a DeinterlacerMode enum value
	DeinterlacerModeDeinterlace = "DEINTERLACE"

	// DeinterlacerModeInverseTelecine is a DeinterlacerMode enum value
	DeinterlacerModeInverseTelecine = "INVERSE_TELECINE"

	// DeinterlacerModeAdaptive is a DeinterlacerMode enum value
	DeinterlacerModeAdaptive = "ADAPTIVE"
)

Use Deinterlacer (DeinterlaceMode) to choose how the service will do deinterlacing. Default is Deinterlace. - Deinterlace converts interlaced to progressive. - Inverse telecine converts Hard Telecine 29.97i to progressive 23.976p. - Adaptive auto-detects and converts to progressive.

View Source 
const (
	// DescribeEndpointsModeDefault is a DescribeEndpointsMode enum value
	DescribeEndpointsModeDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// DescribeEndpointsModeGetOnly is a DescribeEndpointsMode enum value
	DescribeEndpointsModeGetOnly = "GET_ONLY"
)

Optional field, defaults to DEFAULT. Specify DEFAULT for this operation to return your endpoints if any exist, or to create an endpoint for you and return it if one doesn't already exist. Specify GET_ONLY to return your endpoints if any exist, or an empty list if none exist.

View Source 
const (
	// DropFrameTimecodeDisabled is a DropFrameTimecode enum value
	DropFrameTimecodeDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// DropFrameTimecodeEnabled is a DropFrameTimecode enum value
	DropFrameTimecodeEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Applies only to 29.97 fps outputs. When this feature is enabled, the service will use drop-frame timecode on outputs. If it is not possible to use drop-frame timecode, the system will fall back to non-drop-frame. This setting is enabled by default when Timecode insertion (TimecodeInsertion) is enabled.

View Source 
const (
	// DvbSubtitleAlignmentCentered is a DvbSubtitleAlignment enum value
	DvbSubtitleAlignmentCentered = "CENTERED"

	// DvbSubtitleAlignmentLeft is a DvbSubtitleAlignment enum value
	DvbSubtitleAlignmentLeft = "LEFT"
)

If no explicit x_position or y_position is provided, setting alignment to centered will place the captions at the bottom center of the output. Similarly, setting a left alignment will align captions to the bottom left of the output. If x and y positions are given in conjunction with the alignment parameter, the font will be justified (either left or centered) relative to those coordinates. This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.

View Source 
const (
	// DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorNone is a DvbSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorNone = "NONE"

	// DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorBlack is a DvbSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorWhite is a DvbSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorWhite = "WHITE"
)

Specifies the color of the rectangle behind the captions.All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.

View Source 
const (
	// DvbSubtitleFontColorWhite is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorWhite = "WHITE"

	// DvbSubtitleFontColorBlack is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// DvbSubtitleFontColorYellow is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorYellow = "YELLOW"

	// DvbSubtitleFontColorRed is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorRed = "RED"

	// DvbSubtitleFontColorGreen is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorGreen = "GREEN"

	// DvbSubtitleFontColorBlue is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorBlue = "BLUE"
)

Specifies the color of the burned-in captions. This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.

View Source 
const (
	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorBlack is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorWhite is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorWhite = "WHITE"

	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorYellow is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorYellow = "YELLOW"

	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorRed is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorRed = "RED"

	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorGreen is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorGreen = "GREEN"

	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorBlue is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorBlue = "BLUE"
)

Specifies font outline color. This option is not valid for source captions that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.

View Source 
const (
	// DvbSubtitleShadowColorNone is a DvbSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleShadowColorNone = "NONE"

	// DvbSubtitleShadowColorBlack is a DvbSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleShadowColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// DvbSubtitleShadowColorWhite is a DvbSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleShadowColorWhite = "WHITE"
)

Specifies the color of the shadow cast by the captions.All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.

View Source 
const (
	// DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacingFixedGrid is a DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacing enum value
	DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacingFixedGrid = "FIXED_GRID"

	// DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacingProportional is a DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacing enum value
	DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacingProportional = "PROPORTIONAL"
)

Only applies to jobs with input captions in Teletext or STL formats. Specify whether the spacing between letters in your captions is set by the captions grid or varies depending on letter width. Choose fixed grid to conform to the spacing specified in the captions file more accurately. Choose proportional to make the text easier to read if the captions are closed caption.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3AtmosDialogueIntelligenceEnabled is a Eac3AtmosDialogueIntelligence enum value
	Eac3AtmosDialogueIntelligenceEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Eac3AtmosDialogueIntelligenceDisabled is a Eac3AtmosDialogueIntelligence enum value
	Eac3AtmosDialogueIntelligenceDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

Enable Dolby Dialogue Intelligence to adjust loudness based on dialogue analysis.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineNone is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineNone = "NONE"

	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmStandard is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmStandard = "FILM_STANDARD"

	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmLight is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmLight = "FILM_LIGHT"

	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicStandard is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicStandard = "MUSIC_STANDARD"

	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicLight is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicLight = "MUSIC_LIGHT"

	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineSpeech is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLineSpeech = "SPEECH"
)

Specify the absolute peak level for a signal with dynamic range compression.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfNone is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfNone = "NONE"

	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmStandard is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmStandard = "FILM_STANDARD"

	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmLight is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmLight = "FILM_LIGHT"

	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicStandard is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicStandard = "MUSIC_STANDARD"

	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicLight is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicLight = "MUSIC_LIGHT"

	// Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfSpeech is a Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRfSpeech = "SPEECH"
)

Specify how the service limits the audio dynamic range when compressing the audio.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3AtmosMeteringModeLeqA is a Eac3AtmosMeteringMode enum value
	Eac3AtmosMeteringModeLeqA = "LEQ_A"

	// Eac3AtmosMeteringModeItuBs17701 is a Eac3AtmosMeteringMode enum value
	Eac3AtmosMeteringModeItuBs17701 = "ITU_BS_1770_1"

	// Eac3AtmosMeteringModeItuBs17702 is a Eac3AtmosMeteringMode enum value
	Eac3AtmosMeteringModeItuBs17702 = "ITU_BS_1770_2"

	// Eac3AtmosMeteringModeItuBs17703 is a Eac3AtmosMeteringMode enum value
	Eac3AtmosMeteringModeItuBs17703 = "ITU_BS_1770_3"

	// Eac3AtmosMeteringModeItuBs17704 is a Eac3AtmosMeteringMode enum value
	Eac3AtmosMeteringModeItuBs17704 = "ITU_BS_1770_4"
)

Choose how the service meters the loudness of your audio.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3AtmosStereoDownmixNotIndicated is a Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3AtmosStereoDownmixNotIndicated = "NOT_INDICATED"

	// Eac3AtmosStereoDownmixStereo is a Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3AtmosStereoDownmixStereo = "STEREO"

	// Eac3AtmosStereoDownmixSurround is a Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3AtmosStereoDownmixSurround = "SURROUND"

	// Eac3AtmosStereoDownmixDpl2 is a Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3AtmosStereoDownmixDpl2 = "DPL2"
)

Choose how the service does stereo downmixing.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3AtmosSurroundExModeNotIndicated is a Eac3AtmosSurroundExMode enum value
	Eac3AtmosSurroundExModeNotIndicated = "NOT_INDICATED"

	// Eac3AtmosSurroundExModeEnabled is a Eac3AtmosSurroundExMode enum value
	Eac3AtmosSurroundExModeEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Eac3AtmosSurroundExModeDisabled is a Eac3AtmosSurroundExMode enum value
	Eac3AtmosSurroundExModeDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

Specify whether your input audio has an additional center rear surround channel matrix encoded into your left and right surround channels.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3AttenuationControlAttenuate3Db is a Eac3AttenuationControl enum value
	Eac3AttenuationControlAttenuate3Db = "ATTENUATE_3_DB"

	// Eac3AttenuationControlNone is a Eac3AttenuationControl enum value
	Eac3AttenuationControlNone = "NONE"
)

If set to ATTENUATE_3_DB, applies a 3 dB attenuation to the surround channels. Only used for 3/2 coding mode.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3BitstreamModeCompleteMain is a Eac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3BitstreamModeCompleteMain = "COMPLETE_MAIN"

	// Eac3BitstreamModeCommentary is a Eac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3BitstreamModeCommentary = "COMMENTARY"

	// Eac3BitstreamModeEmergency is a Eac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3BitstreamModeEmergency = "EMERGENCY"

	// Eac3BitstreamModeHearingImpaired is a Eac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3BitstreamModeHearingImpaired = "HEARING_IMPAIRED"

	// Eac3BitstreamModeVisuallyImpaired is a Eac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3BitstreamModeVisuallyImpaired = "VISUALLY_IMPAIRED"
)

Specify the bitstream mode for the E-AC-3 stream that the encoder emits. For more information about the EAC3 bitstream mode, see ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex E).

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3CodingModeCodingMode10 is a Eac3CodingMode enum value
	Eac3CodingModeCodingMode10 = "CODING_MODE_1_0"

	// Eac3CodingModeCodingMode20 is a Eac3CodingMode enum value
	Eac3CodingModeCodingMode20 = "CODING_MODE_2_0"

	// Eac3CodingModeCodingMode32 is a Eac3CodingMode enum value
	Eac3CodingModeCodingMode32 = "CODING_MODE_3_2"
)

Dolby Digital Plus coding mode. Determines number of channels.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3DcFilterEnabled is a Eac3DcFilter enum value
	Eac3DcFilterEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Eac3DcFilterDisabled is a Eac3DcFilter enum value
	Eac3DcFilterDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

Activates a DC highpass filter for all input channels.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineNone is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineNone = "NONE"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmStandard is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmStandard = "FILM_STANDARD"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmLight is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmLight = "FILM_LIGHT"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicStandard is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicStandard = "MUSIC_STANDARD"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicLight is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicLight = "MUSIC_LIGHT"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineSpeech is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineSpeech = "SPEECH"
)

Specify the absolute peak level for a signal with dynamic range compression.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfNone is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfNone = "NONE"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmStandard is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmStandard = "FILM_STANDARD"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmLight is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmLight = "FILM_LIGHT"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicStandard is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicStandard = "MUSIC_STANDARD"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicLight is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicLight = "MUSIC_LIGHT"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfSpeech is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfSpeech = "SPEECH"
)

Specify how the service limits the audio dynamic range when compressing the audio.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3LfeControlLfe is a Eac3LfeControl enum value
	Eac3LfeControlLfe = "LFE"

	// Eac3LfeControlNoLfe is a Eac3LfeControl enum value
	Eac3LfeControlNoLfe = "NO_LFE"
)

When encoding 3/2 audio, controls whether the LFE channel is enabled

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3LfeFilterEnabled is a Eac3LfeFilter enum value
	Eac3LfeFilterEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Eac3LfeFilterDisabled is a Eac3LfeFilter enum value
	Eac3LfeFilterDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

Applies a 120Hz lowpass filter to the LFE channel prior to encoding. Only valid with 3_2_LFE coding mode.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3MetadataControlFollowInput is a Eac3MetadataControl enum value
	Eac3MetadataControlFollowInput = "FOLLOW_INPUT"

	// Eac3MetadataControlUseConfigured is a Eac3MetadataControl enum value
	Eac3MetadataControlUseConfigured = "USE_CONFIGURED"
)

When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, encoder metadata will be sourced from the DD, DD+, or DolbyE decoder that supplied this audio data. If audio was not supplied from one of these streams, then the static metadata settings will be used.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3PassthroughControlWhenPossible is a Eac3PassthroughControl enum value
	Eac3PassthroughControlWhenPossible = "WHEN_POSSIBLE"

	// Eac3PassthroughControlNoPassthrough is a Eac3PassthroughControl enum value
	Eac3PassthroughControlNoPassthrough = "NO_PASSTHROUGH"
)

When set to WHEN_POSSIBLE, input DD+ audio will be passed through if it is present on the input. this detection is dynamic over the life of the transcode. Inputs that alternate between DD+ and non-DD+ content will have a consistent DD+ output as the system alternates between passthrough and encoding.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3PhaseControlShift90Degrees is a Eac3PhaseControl enum value
	Eac3PhaseControlShift90Degrees = "SHIFT_90_DEGREES"

	// Eac3PhaseControlNoShift is a Eac3PhaseControl enum value
	Eac3PhaseControlNoShift = "NO_SHIFT"
)

Controls the amount of phase-shift applied to the surround channels. Only used for 3/2 coding mode.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3StereoDownmixNotIndicated is a Eac3StereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3StereoDownmixNotIndicated = "NOT_INDICATED"

	// Eac3StereoDownmixLoRo is a Eac3StereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3StereoDownmixLoRo = "LO_RO"

	// Eac3StereoDownmixLtRt is a Eac3StereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3StereoDownmixLtRt = "LT_RT"

	// Eac3StereoDownmixDpl2 is a Eac3StereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3StereoDownmixDpl2 = "DPL2"
)

Choose how the service does stereo downmixing. This setting only applies if you keep the default value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs (CODING_MODE_3_2) for the setting Coding mode (Eac3CodingMode). If you choose a different value for Coding mode, the service ignores Stereo downmix (Eac3StereoDownmix).

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3SurroundExModeNotIndicated is a Eac3SurroundExMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundExModeNotIndicated = "NOT_INDICATED"

	// Eac3SurroundExModeEnabled is a Eac3SurroundExMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundExModeEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Eac3SurroundExModeDisabled is a Eac3SurroundExMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundExModeDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

When encoding 3/2 audio, sets whether an extra center back surround channel is matrix encoded into the left and right surround channels.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3SurroundModeNotIndicated is a Eac3SurroundMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundModeNotIndicated = "NOT_INDICATED"

	// Eac3SurroundModeEnabled is a Eac3SurroundMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundModeEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Eac3SurroundModeDisabled is a Eac3SurroundMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundModeDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

When encoding 2/0 audio, sets whether Dolby Surround is matrix encoded into the two channels.

View Source 
const (
	// EmbeddedConvert608To708Upconvert is a EmbeddedConvert608To708 enum value
	EmbeddedConvert608To708Upconvert = "UPCONVERT"

	// EmbeddedConvert608To708Disabled is a EmbeddedConvert608To708 enum value
	EmbeddedConvert608To708Disabled = "DISABLED"
)

When set to UPCONVERT, 608 data is both passed through via the "608 compatibility bytes" fields of the 708 wrapper as well as translated into 708. 708 data present in the source content will be discarded.

View Source 
const (
	// F4vMoovPlacementProgressiveDownload is a F4vMoovPlacement enum value
	F4vMoovPlacementProgressiveDownload = "PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD"

	// F4vMoovPlacementNormal is a F4vMoovPlacement enum value
	F4vMoovPlacementNormal = "NORMAL"
)

If set to PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD, the MOOV atom is relocated to the beginning of the archive as required for progressive downloading. Otherwise it is placed normally at the end.

View Source 
const (
	// FileSourceConvert608To708Upconvert is a FileSourceConvert608To708 enum value
	FileSourceConvert608To708Upconvert = "UPCONVERT"

	// FileSourceConvert608To708Disabled is a FileSourceConvert608To708 enum value
	FileSourceConvert608To708Disabled = "DISABLED"
)

If set to UPCONVERT, 608 caption data is both passed through via the "608 compatibility bytes" fields of the 708 wrapper as well as translated into 708. 708 data present in the source content will be discarded.

View Source 
const (
	// FontScriptAutomatic is a FontScript enum value
	FontScriptAutomatic = "AUTOMATIC"

	// FontScriptHans is a FontScript enum value
	FontScriptHans = "HANS"

	// FontScriptHant is a FontScript enum value
	FontScriptHant = "HANT"
)

Provide the font script, using an ISO 15924 script code, if the LanguageCode is not sufficient for determining the script type. Where LanguageCode or CustomLanguageCode is sufficient, use "AUTOMATIC" or leave unset.

View Source 
const (
	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationOff is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationOff = "OFF"

	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationLow is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationLow = "LOW"

	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationMedium is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationMedium = "MEDIUM"

	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationHigh is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationHigh = "HIGH"

	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationHigher is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationHigher = "HIGHER"

	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationMax is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationMax = "MAX"
)

Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual quality.

View Source 
const (
	// H264CodecLevelAuto is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelAuto = "AUTO"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel1 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel1 = "LEVEL_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel11 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel11 = "LEVEL_1_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel12 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel12 = "LEVEL_1_2"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel13 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel13 = "LEVEL_1_3"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel2 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel2 = "LEVEL_2"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel21 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel21 = "LEVEL_2_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel22 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel22 = "LEVEL_2_2"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel3 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel3 = "LEVEL_3"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel31 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel31 = "LEVEL_3_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel32 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel32 = "LEVEL_3_2"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel4 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel4 = "LEVEL_4"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel41 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel41 = "LEVEL_4_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel42 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel42 = "LEVEL_4_2"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel5 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel5 = "LEVEL_5"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel51 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel51 = "LEVEL_5_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel52 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel52 = "LEVEL_5_2"
)

Specify an H.264 level that is consistent with your output video settings. If you aren't sure what level to specify, choose Auto (AUTO).

View Source 
const (
	// H264CodecProfileBaseline is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileBaseline = "BASELINE"

	// H264CodecProfileHigh is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileHigh = "HIGH"

	// H264CodecProfileHigh10bit is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileHigh10bit = "HIGH_10BIT"

	// H264CodecProfileHigh422 is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileHigh422 = "HIGH_422"

	// H264CodecProfileHigh42210bit is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileHigh42210bit = "HIGH_422_10BIT"

	// H264CodecProfileMain is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileMain = "MAIN"
)

H.264 Profile. High 4:2:2 and 10-bit profiles are only available with the AVC-I License.

View Source 
const (
	// H264DynamicSubGopAdaptive is a H264DynamicSubGop enum value
	H264DynamicSubGopAdaptive = "ADAPTIVE"

	// H264DynamicSubGopStatic is a H264DynamicSubGop enum value
	H264DynamicSubGopStatic = "STATIC"
)

Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content. This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).

View Source 
const (
	// H264EntropyEncodingCabac is a H264EntropyEncoding enum value
	H264EntropyEncodingCabac = "CABAC"

	// H264EntropyEncodingCavlc is a H264EntropyEncoding enum value
	H264EntropyEncodingCavlc = "CAVLC"
)

Entropy encoding mode. Use CABAC (must be in Main or High profile) or CAVLC.

View Source 
const (
	// H264FieldEncodingPaff is a H264FieldEncoding enum value
	H264FieldEncodingPaff = "PAFF"

	// H264FieldEncodingForceField is a H264FieldEncoding enum value
	H264FieldEncodingForceField = "FORCE_FIELD"
)

Choosing FORCE_FIELD disables PAFF encoding for interlaced outputs.

View Source 
const (
	// H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Adjust quantization within each frame to reduce flicker or 'pop' on I-frames.

View Source 
const (
	// H264FramerateControlInitializeFromSource is a H264FramerateControl enum value
	H264FramerateControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// H264FramerateControlSpecified is a H264FramerateControl enum value
	H264FramerateControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding job specification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output. Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.

View Source 
const (
	// H264FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop is a H264FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	H264FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop = "DUPLICATE_DROP"

	// H264FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate is a H264FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	H264FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate = "INTERPOLATE"
)

When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.

View Source 
const (
	// H264GopBReferenceDisabled is a H264GopBReference enum value
	H264GopBReferenceDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264GopBReferenceEnabled is a H264GopBReference enum value
	H264GopBReferenceEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

If enable, use reference B frames for GOP structures that have B frames > 1.

View Source 
const (
	// H264GopSizeUnitsFrames is a H264GopSizeUnits enum value
	H264GopSizeUnitsFrames = "FRAMES"

	// H264GopSizeUnitsSeconds is a H264GopSizeUnits enum value
	H264GopSizeUnitsSeconds = "SECONDS"
)

Indicates if the GOP Size in H264 is specified in frames or seconds. If seconds the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.

View Source 
const (
	// H264InterlaceModeProgressive is a H264InterlaceMode enum value
	H264InterlaceModeProgressive = "PROGRESSIVE"

	// H264InterlaceModeTopField is a H264InterlaceMode enum value
	H264InterlaceModeTopField = "TOP_FIELD"

	// H264InterlaceModeBottomField is a H264InterlaceMode enum value
	H264InterlaceModeBottomField = "BOTTOM_FIELD"

	// H264InterlaceModeFollowTopField is a H264InterlaceMode enum value
	H264InterlaceModeFollowTopField = "FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD"

	// H264InterlaceModeFollowBottomField is a H264InterlaceMode enum value
	H264InterlaceModeFollowBottomField = "FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD"
)

Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output. * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore, behavior depends on the input scan type, as follows. - If the source is interlaced, the output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending on which of the Follow options you chose.

View Source 
const (
	// H264ParControlInitializeFromSource is a H264ParControl enum value
	H264ParControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// H264ParControlSpecified is a H264ParControl enum value
	H264ParControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.

View Source 
const (
	// H264QualityTuningLevelSinglePass is a H264QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H264QualityTuningLevelSinglePass = "SINGLE_PASS"

	// H264QualityTuningLevelSinglePassHq is a H264QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H264QualityTuningLevelSinglePassHq = "SINGLE_PASS_HQ"

	// H264QualityTuningLevelMultiPassHq is a H264QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H264QualityTuningLevelMultiPassHq = "MULTI_PASS_HQ"
)

Use Quality tuning level (H264QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to use fast single-pass, high-quality singlepass, or high-quality multipass video encoding.

View Source 
const (
	// H264RateControlModeVbr is a H264RateControlMode enum value
	H264RateControlModeVbr = "VBR"

	// H264RateControlModeCbr is a H264RateControlMode enum value
	H264RateControlModeCbr = "CBR"

	// H264RateControlModeQvbr is a H264RateControlMode enum value
	H264RateControlModeQvbr = "QVBR"
)

Use this setting to specify whether this output has a variable bitrate (VBR), constant bitrate (CBR) or quality-defined variable bitrate (QVBR).

View Source 
const (
	// H264RepeatPpsDisabled is a H264RepeatPps enum value
	H264RepeatPpsDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264RepeatPpsEnabled is a H264RepeatPps enum value
	H264RepeatPpsEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Places a PPS header on each encoded picture, even if repeated.

View Source 
const (
	// H264SceneChangeDetectDisabled is a H264SceneChangeDetect enum value
	H264SceneChangeDetectDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264SceneChangeDetectEnabled is a H264SceneChangeDetect enum value
	H264SceneChangeDetectEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).

View Source 
const (
	// H264SlowPalDisabled is a H264SlowPal enum value
	H264SlowPalDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264SlowPalEnabled is a H264SlowPal enum value
	H264SlowPalEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.

View Source 
const (
	// H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content complexity.

View Source 
const (
	// H264SyntaxDefault is a H264Syntax enum value
	H264SyntaxDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// H264SyntaxRp2027 is a H264Syntax enum value
	H264SyntaxRp2027 = "RP2027"
)

Produces a bitstream compliant with SMPTE RP-2027.

View Source 
const (
	// H264TelecineNone is a H264Telecine enum value
	H264TelecineNone = "NONE"

	// H264TelecineSoft is a H264Telecine enum value
	H264TelecineSoft = "SOFT"

	// H264TelecineHard is a H264Telecine enum value
	H264TelecineHard = "HARD"
)

This field applies only if the Streams > Advanced > Framerate (framerate) field is set to 29.970. This field works with the Streams > Advanced > Preprocessors > Deinterlacer field (deinterlace_mode) and the Streams > Advanced > Interlaced Mode field (interlace_mode) to identify the scan type for the output: Progressive, Interlaced, Hard Telecine or Soft Telecine. - Hard: produces 29.97i output from 23.976 input. - Soft: produces 23.976; the player converts this output to 29.97i.

View Source 
const (
	// H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content complexity.

View Source 
const (
	// H264UnregisteredSeiTimecodeDisabled is a H264UnregisteredSeiTimecode enum value
	H264UnregisteredSeiTimecodeDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264UnregisteredSeiTimecodeEnabled is a H264UnregisteredSeiTimecode enum value
	H264UnregisteredSeiTimecodeEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Inserts timecode for each frame as 4 bytes of an unregistered SEI message.

View Source 
const (
	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationOff is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationOff = "OFF"

	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationLow is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationLow = "LOW"

	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationMedium is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationMedium = "MEDIUM"

	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationHigh is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationHigh = "HIGH"

	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationHigher is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationHigher = "HIGHER"

	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationMax is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationMax = "MAX"
)

Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual quality.

View Source 
const (
	// H265AlternateTransferFunctionSeiDisabled is a H265AlternateTransferFunctionSei enum value
	H265AlternateTransferFunctionSeiDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265AlternateTransferFunctionSeiEnabled is a H265AlternateTransferFunctionSei enum value
	H265AlternateTransferFunctionSeiEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Enables Alternate Transfer Function SEI message for outputs using Hybrid Log Gamma (HLG) Electro-Optical Transfer Function (EOTF).

View Source 
const (
	// H265CodecLevelAuto is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelAuto = "AUTO"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel1 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel1 = "LEVEL_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel2 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel2 = "LEVEL_2"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel21 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel21 = "LEVEL_2_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel3 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel3 = "LEVEL_3"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel31 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel31 = "LEVEL_3_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel4 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel4 = "LEVEL_4"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel41 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel41 = "LEVEL_4_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel5 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel5 = "LEVEL_5"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel51 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel51 = "LEVEL_5_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel52 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel52 = "LEVEL_5_2"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel6 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel6 = "LEVEL_6"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel61 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel61 = "LEVEL_6_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel62 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel62 = "LEVEL_6_2"
)

H.265 Level.

View Source 
const (
	// H265CodecProfileMainMain is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMainMain = "MAIN_MAIN"

	// H265CodecProfileMainHigh is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMainHigh = "MAIN_HIGH"

	// H265CodecProfileMain10Main is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain10Main = "MAIN10_MAIN"

	// H265CodecProfileMain10High is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain10High = "MAIN10_HIGH"

	// H265CodecProfileMain4228bitMain is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain4228bitMain = "MAIN_422_8BIT_MAIN"

	// H265CodecProfileMain4228bitHigh is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain4228bitHigh = "MAIN_422_8BIT_HIGH"

	// H265CodecProfileMain42210bitMain is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain42210bitMain = "MAIN_422_10BIT_MAIN"

	// H265CodecProfileMain42210bitHigh is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain42210bitHigh = "MAIN_422_10BIT_HIGH"
)

Represents the Profile and Tier, per the HEVC (H.265) specification. Selections are grouped as [Profile] / [Tier], so "Main/High" represents Main Profile with High Tier. 4:2:2 profiles are only available with the HEVC 4:2:2 License.

View Source 
const (
	// H265DynamicSubGopAdaptive is a H265DynamicSubGop enum value
	H265DynamicSubGopAdaptive = "ADAPTIVE"

	// H265DynamicSubGopStatic is a H265DynamicSubGop enum value
	H265DynamicSubGopStatic = "STATIC"
)

Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content. This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).

View Source 
const (
	// H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Adjust quantization within each frame to reduce flicker or 'pop' on I-frames.

View Source 
const (
	// H265FramerateControlInitializeFromSource is a H265FramerateControl enum value
	H265FramerateControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// H265FramerateControlSpecified is a H265FramerateControl enum value
	H265FramerateControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output. Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.

View Source 
const (
	// H265FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop is a H265FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	H265FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop = "DUPLICATE_DROP"

	// H265FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate is a H265FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	H265FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate = "INTERPOLATE"
)

When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.

View Source 
const (
	// H265GopBReferenceDisabled is a H265GopBReference enum value
	H265GopBReferenceDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265GopBReferenceEnabled is a H265GopBReference enum value
	H265GopBReferenceEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

If enable, use reference B frames for GOP structures that have B frames > 1.

View Source 
const (
	// H265GopSizeUnitsFrames is a H265GopSizeUnits enum value
	H265GopSizeUnitsFrames = "FRAMES"

	// H265GopSizeUnitsSeconds is a H265GopSizeUnits enum value
	H265GopSizeUnitsSeconds = "SECONDS"
)

Indicates if the GOP Size in H265 is specified in frames or seconds. If seconds the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.

View Source 
const (
	// H265InterlaceModeProgressive is a H265InterlaceMode enum value
	H265InterlaceModeProgressive = "PROGRESSIVE"

	// H265InterlaceModeTopField is a H265InterlaceMode enum value
	H265InterlaceModeTopField = "TOP_FIELD"

	// H265InterlaceModeBottomField is a H265InterlaceMode enum value
	H265InterlaceModeBottomField = "BOTTOM_FIELD"

	// H265InterlaceModeFollowTopField is a H265InterlaceMode enum value
	H265InterlaceModeFollowTopField = "FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD"

	// H265InterlaceModeFollowBottomField is a H265InterlaceMode enum value
	H265InterlaceModeFollowBottomField = "FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD"
)

Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output. * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore, behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending on which of the Follow options you chose.

View Source 
const (
	// H265ParControlInitializeFromSource is a H265ParControl enum value
	H265ParControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// H265ParControlSpecified is a H265ParControl enum value
	H265ParControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.

View Source 
const (
	// H265QualityTuningLevelSinglePass is a H265QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H265QualityTuningLevelSinglePass = "SINGLE_PASS"

	// H265QualityTuningLevelSinglePassHq is a H265QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H265QualityTuningLevelSinglePassHq = "SINGLE_PASS_HQ"

	// H265QualityTuningLevelMultiPassHq is a H265QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H265QualityTuningLevelMultiPassHq = "MULTI_PASS_HQ"
)

Use Quality tuning level (H265QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to use fast single-pass, high-quality singlepass, or high-quality multipass video encoding.

View Source 
const (
	// H265RateControlModeVbr is a H265RateControlMode enum value
	H265RateControlModeVbr = "VBR"

	// H265RateControlModeCbr is a H265RateControlMode enum value
	H265RateControlModeCbr = "CBR"

	// H265RateControlModeQvbr is a H265RateControlMode enum value
	H265RateControlModeQvbr = "QVBR"
)

Use this setting to specify whether this output has a variable bitrate (VBR), constant bitrate (CBR) or quality-defined variable bitrate (QVBR).

View Source 
const (
	// H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeDefault is a H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode enum value
	H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeAdaptive is a H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode enum value
	H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeAdaptive = "ADAPTIVE"

	// H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeOff is a H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode enum value
	H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeOff = "OFF"
)

Specify Sample Adaptive Offset (SAO) filter strength. Adaptive mode dynamically selects best strength based on content

View Source 
const (
	// H265SceneChangeDetectDisabled is a H265SceneChangeDetect enum value
	H265SceneChangeDetectDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265SceneChangeDetectEnabled is a H265SceneChangeDetect enum value
	H265SceneChangeDetectEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).

View Source 
const (
	// H265SlowPalDisabled is a H265SlowPal enum value
	H265SlowPalDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265SlowPalEnabled is a H265SlowPal enum value
	H265SlowPalEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.

View Source 
const (
	// H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content complexity.

View Source 
const (
	// H265TelecineNone is a H265Telecine enum value
	H265TelecineNone = "NONE"

	// H265TelecineSoft is a H265Telecine enum value
	H265TelecineSoft = "SOFT"

	// H265TelecineHard is a H265Telecine enum value
	H265TelecineHard = "HARD"
)

This field applies only if the Streams > Advanced > Framerate (framerate) field is set to 29.970. This field works with the Streams > Advanced > Preprocessors > Deinterlacer field (deinterlace_mode) and the Streams > Advanced > Interlaced Mode field (interlace_mode) to identify the scan type for the output: Progressive, Interlaced, Hard Telecine or Soft Telecine. - Hard: produces 29.97i output from 23.976 input. - Soft: produces 23.976; the player converts this output to 29.97i.

View Source 
const (
	// H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content complexity.

View Source 
const (
	// H265TemporalIdsDisabled is a H265TemporalIds enum value
	H265TemporalIdsDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265TemporalIdsEnabled is a H265TemporalIds enum value
	H265TemporalIdsEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Enables temporal layer identifiers in the encoded bitstream. Up to 3 layers are supported depending on GOP structure: I- and P-frames form one layer, reference B-frames can form a second layer and non-reference b-frames can form a third layer. Decoders can optionally decode only the lower temporal layers to generate a lower frame rate output. For example, given a bitstream with temporal IDs and with b-frames = 1 (i.e. IbPbPb display order), a decoder could decode all the frames for full frame rate output or only the I and P frames (lowest temporal layer) for a half frame rate output.

View Source 
const (
	// H265TilesDisabled is a H265Tiles enum value
	H265TilesDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265TilesEnabled is a H265Tiles enum value
	H265TilesEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Enable use of tiles, allowing horizontal as well as vertical subdivision of the encoded pictures.

View Source 
const (
	// H265UnregisteredSeiTimecodeDisabled is a H265UnregisteredSeiTimecode enum value
	H265UnregisteredSeiTimecodeDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265UnregisteredSeiTimecodeEnabled is a H265UnregisteredSeiTimecode enum value
	H265UnregisteredSeiTimecodeEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Inserts timecode for each frame as 4 bytes of an unregistered SEI message.

View Source 
const (
	// H265WriteMp4PackagingTypeHvc1 is a H265WriteMp4PackagingType enum value
	H265WriteMp4PackagingTypeHvc1 = "HVC1"

	// H265WriteMp4PackagingTypeHev1 is a H265WriteMp4PackagingType enum value
	H265WriteMp4PackagingTypeHev1 = "HEV1"
)

Use this setting only for outputs encoded with H.265 that are in CMAF or DASH output groups. If you include writeMp4PackagingType in your JSON job specification for other outputs, your video might not work properly with downstream systems and video players. If the location of parameter set NAL units don't matter in your workflow, ignore this setting. The service defaults to marking your output as HEV1. Choose HVC1 to mark your output as HVC1. This makes your output compliant with this specification: ISO IECJTC1 SC29 N13798 Text ISO/IEC FDIS 14496-15 3rd Edition. For these outputs, the service stores parameter set NAL units in the sample headers but not in the samples directly. Keep the default HEV1 to mark your output as HEV1. For these outputs, the service writes parameter set NAL units directly into the samples.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsAdMarkersElemental is a HlsAdMarkers enum value
	HlsAdMarkersElemental = "ELEMENTAL"

	// HlsAdMarkersElementalScte35 is a HlsAdMarkers enum value
	HlsAdMarkersElementalScte35 = "ELEMENTAL_SCTE35"
)
View Source 
const (
	// HlsAudioOnlyContainerAutomatic is a HlsAudioOnlyContainer enum value
	HlsAudioOnlyContainerAutomatic = "AUTOMATIC"

	// HlsAudioOnlyContainerM2ts is a HlsAudioOnlyContainer enum value
	HlsAudioOnlyContainerM2ts = "M2TS"
)

Use this setting only in audio-only outputs. Choose MPEG-2 Transport Stream (M2TS) to create a file in an MPEG2-TS container. Keep the default value Automatic (AUTOMATIC) to create a raw audio-only file with no container. Regardless of the value that you specify here, if this output has video, the service will place outputs into an MPEG2-TS container.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioAutoSelectDefault is a HlsAudioTrackType enum value
	HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioAutoSelectDefault = "ALTERNATE_AUDIO_AUTO_SELECT_DEFAULT"

	// HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioAutoSelect is a HlsAudioTrackType enum value
	HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioAutoSelect = "ALTERNATE_AUDIO_AUTO_SELECT"

	// HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioNotAutoSelect is a HlsAudioTrackType enum value
	HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioNotAutoSelect = "ALTERNATE_AUDIO_NOT_AUTO_SELECT"

	// HlsAudioTrackTypeAudioOnlyVariantStream is a HlsAudioTrackType enum value
	HlsAudioTrackTypeAudioOnlyVariantStream = "AUDIO_ONLY_VARIANT_STREAM"
)

Four types of audio-only tracks are supported: Audio-Only Variant Stream The client can play back this audio-only stream instead of video in low-bandwidth scenarios. Represented as an EXT-X-STREAM-INF in the HLS manifest. Alternate Audio, Auto Select, Default Alternate rendition that the client should try to play back by default. Represented as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest with DEFAULT=YES, AUTOSELECT=YES Alternate Audio, Auto Select, Not Default Alternate rendition that the client may try to play back by default. Represented as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest with DEFAULT=NO, AUTOSELECT=YES Alternate Audio, not Auto Select Alternate rendition that the client will not try to play back by default. Represented as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest with DEFAULT=NO, AUTOSELECT=NO

View Source 
const (
	// HlsCaptionLanguageSettingInsert is a HlsCaptionLanguageSetting enum value
	HlsCaptionLanguageSettingInsert = "INSERT"

	// HlsCaptionLanguageSettingOmit is a HlsCaptionLanguageSetting enum value
	HlsCaptionLanguageSettingOmit = "OMIT"

	// HlsCaptionLanguageSettingNone is a HlsCaptionLanguageSetting enum value
	HlsCaptionLanguageSettingNone = "NONE"
)

Applies only to 608 Embedded output captions. Insert: Include CLOSED-CAPTIONS lines in the manifest. Specify at least one language in the CC1 Language Code field. One CLOSED-CAPTION line is added for each Language Code you specify. Make sure to specify the languages in the order in which they appear in the original source (if the source is embedded format) or the order of the caption selectors (if the source is other than embedded). Otherwise, languages in the manifest will not match up properly with the output captions. None: Include CLOSED-CAPTIONS=NONE line in the manifest. Omit: Omit any CLOSED-CAPTIONS line from the manifest.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsClientCacheDisabled is a HlsClientCache enum value
	HlsClientCacheDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// HlsClientCacheEnabled is a HlsClientCache enum value
	HlsClientCacheEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

When set to ENABLED, sets #EXT-X-ALLOW-CACHE:no tag, which prevents client from saving media segments for later replay.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsCodecSpecificationRfc6381 is a HlsCodecSpecification enum value
	HlsCodecSpecificationRfc6381 = "RFC_6381"

	// HlsCodecSpecificationRfc4281 is a HlsCodecSpecification enum value
	HlsCodecSpecificationRfc4281 = "RFC_4281"
)

Specification to use (RFC-6381 or the default RFC-4281) during m3u8 playlist generation.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsDirectoryStructureSingleDirectory is a HlsDirectoryStructure enum value
	HlsDirectoryStructureSingleDirectory = "SINGLE_DIRECTORY"

	// HlsDirectoryStructureSubdirectoryPerStream is a HlsDirectoryStructure enum value
	HlsDirectoryStructureSubdirectoryPerStream = "SUBDIRECTORY_PER_STREAM"
)

Indicates whether segments should be placed in subdirectories.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsEncryptionTypeAes128 is a HlsEncryptionType enum value
	HlsEncryptionTypeAes128 = "AES128"

	// HlsEncryptionTypeSampleAes is a HlsEncryptionType enum value
	HlsEncryptionTypeSampleAes = "SAMPLE_AES"
)

Encrypts the segments with the given encryption scheme. Leave blank to disable. Selecting 'Disabled' in the web interface also disables encryption.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsIFrameOnlyManifestInclude is a HlsIFrameOnlyManifest enum value
	HlsIFrameOnlyManifestInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// HlsIFrameOnlyManifestExclude is a HlsIFrameOnlyManifest enum value
	HlsIFrameOnlyManifestExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

When set to INCLUDE, writes I-Frame Only Manifest in addition to the HLS manifest

View Source 
const (
	// HlsInitializationVectorInManifestInclude is a HlsInitializationVectorInManifest enum value
	HlsInitializationVectorInManifestInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// HlsInitializationVectorInManifestExclude is a HlsInitializationVectorInManifest enum value
	HlsInitializationVectorInManifestExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

The Initialization Vector is a 128-bit number used in conjunction with the key for encrypting blocks. If set to INCLUDE, Initialization Vector is listed in the manifest. Otherwise Initialization Vector is not in the manifest.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsKeyProviderTypeSpeke is a HlsKeyProviderType enum value
	HlsKeyProviderTypeSpeke = "SPEKE"

	// HlsKeyProviderTypeStaticKey is a HlsKeyProviderType enum value
	HlsKeyProviderTypeStaticKey = "STATIC_KEY"
)

Indicates which type of key provider is used for encryption.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsManifestCompressionGzip is a HlsManifestCompression enum value
	HlsManifestCompressionGzip = "GZIP"

	// HlsManifestCompressionNone is a HlsManifestCompression enum value
	HlsManifestCompressionNone = "NONE"
)

When set to GZIP, compresses HLS playlist.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsManifestDurationFormatFloatingPoint is a HlsManifestDurationFormat enum value
	HlsManifestDurationFormatFloatingPoint = "FLOATING_POINT"

	// HlsManifestDurationFormatInteger is a HlsManifestDurationFormat enum value
	HlsManifestDurationFormatInteger = "INTEGER"
)

Indicates whether the output manifest should use floating point values for segment duration.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsOfflineEncryptedEnabled is a HlsOfflineEncrypted enum value
	HlsOfflineEncryptedEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// HlsOfflineEncryptedDisabled is a HlsOfflineEncrypted enum value
	HlsOfflineEncryptedDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

Enable this setting to insert the EXT-X-SESSION-KEY element into the master playlist. This allows for offline Apple HLS FairPlay content protection.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsOutputSelectionManifestsAndSegments is a HlsOutputSelection enum value
	HlsOutputSelectionManifestsAndSegments = "MANIFESTS_AND_SEGMENTS"

	// HlsOutputSelectionSegmentsOnly is a HlsOutputSelection enum value
	HlsOutputSelectionSegmentsOnly = "SEGMENTS_ONLY"
)

Indicates whether the .m3u8 manifest file should be generated for this HLS output group.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsProgramDateTimeInclude is a HlsProgramDateTime enum value
	HlsProgramDateTimeInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// HlsProgramDateTimeExclude is a HlsProgramDateTime enum value
	HlsProgramDateTimeExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

Includes or excludes EXT-X-PROGRAM-DATE-TIME tag in .m3u8 manifest files. The value is calculated as follows: either the program date and time are initialized using the input timecode source, or the time is initialized using the input timecode source and the date is initialized using the timestamp_offset.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsSegmentControlSingleFile is a HlsSegmentControl enum value
	HlsSegmentControlSingleFile = "SINGLE_FILE"

	// HlsSegmentControlSegmentedFiles is a HlsSegmentControl enum value
	HlsSegmentControlSegmentedFiles = "SEGMENTED_FILES"
)

When set to SINGLE_FILE, emits program as a single media resource (.ts) file, uses #EXT-X-BYTERANGE tags to index segment for playback.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsStreamInfResolutionInclude is a HlsStreamInfResolution enum value
	HlsStreamInfResolutionInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// HlsStreamInfResolutionExclude is a HlsStreamInfResolution enum value
	HlsStreamInfResolutionExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

Include or exclude RESOLUTION attribute for video in EXT-X-STREAM-INF tag of variant manifest.

View Source 
const (
	// HlsTimedMetadataId3FrameNone is a HlsTimedMetadataId3Frame enum value
	HlsTimedMetadataId3FrameNone = "NONE"

	// HlsTimedMetadataId3FramePriv is a HlsTimedMetadataId3Frame enum value
	HlsTimedMetadataId3FramePriv = "PRIV"

	// HlsTimedMetadataId3FrameTdrl is a HlsTimedMetadataId3Frame enum value
	HlsTimedMetadataId3FrameTdrl = "TDRL"
)

Indicates ID3 frame that has the timecode.

View Source 
const (
	// InputDeblockFilterEnabled is a InputDeblockFilter enum value
	InputDeblockFilterEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// InputDeblockFilterDisabled is a InputDeblockFilter enum value
	InputDeblockFilterDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

Enable Deblock (InputDeblockFilter) to produce smoother motion in the output. Default is disabled. Only manaully controllable for MPEG2 and uncompressed video inputs.

View Source 
const (
	// InputDenoiseFilterEnabled is a InputDenoiseFilter enum value
	InputDenoiseFilterEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// InputDenoiseFilterDisabled is a InputDenoiseFilter enum value
	InputDenoiseFilterDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

Enable Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) to filter noise from the input. Default is disabled. Only applicable to MPEG2, H.264, H.265, and uncompressed video inputs.

View Source 
const (
	// InputFilterEnableAuto is a InputFilterEnable enum value
	InputFilterEnableAuto = "AUTO"

	// InputFilterEnableDisable is a InputFilterEnable enum value
	InputFilterEnableDisable = "DISABLE"

	// InputFilterEnableForce is a InputFilterEnable enum value
	InputFilterEnableForce = "FORCE"
)

Use Filter enable (InputFilterEnable) to specify how the transcoding service applies the denoise and deblock filters. You must also enable the filters separately, with Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) and Deblock (InputDeblockFilter). * Auto - The transcoding service determines whether to apply filtering, depending on input type and quality. * Disable - The input is not filtered. This is true even if you use the API to enable them in (InputDeblockFilter) and (InputDeblockFilter). * Force - The in put is filtered regardless of input type.

View Source 
const (
	// InputPsiControlIgnorePsi is a InputPsiControl enum value
	InputPsiControlIgnorePsi = "IGNORE_PSI"

	// InputPsiControlUsePsi is a InputPsiControl enum value
	InputPsiControlUsePsi = "USE_PSI"
)

Set PSI control (InputPsiControl) for transport stream inputs to specify which data the demux process to scans. * Ignore PSI - Scan all PIDs for audio and video. * Use PSI - Scan only PSI data.

View Source 
const (
	// InputRotateDegree0 is a InputRotate enum value
	InputRotateDegree0 = "DEGREE_0"

	// InputRotateDegrees90 is a InputRotate enum value
	InputRotateDegrees90 = "DEGREES_90"

	// InputRotateDegrees180 is a InputRotate enum value
	InputRotateDegrees180 = "DEGREES_180"

	// InputRotateDegrees270 is a InputRotate enum value
	InputRotateDegrees270 = "DEGREES_270"

	// InputRotateAuto is a InputRotate enum value
	InputRotateAuto = "AUTO"
)

Use Rotate (InputRotate) to specify how the service rotates your video. You can choose automatic rotation or specify a rotation. You can specify a clockwise rotation of 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees. If your input video container is .mov or .mp4 and your input has rotation metadata, you can choose Automatic to have the service rotate your video according to the rotation specified in the metadata. The rotation must be within one degree of 90, 180, or 270 degrees. If the rotation metadata specifies any other rotation, the service will default to no rotation. By default, the service does no rotation, even if your input video has rotation metadata. The service doesn't pass through rotation metadata.

View Source 
const (
	// InputTimecodeSourceEmbedded is a InputTimecodeSource enum value
	InputTimecodeSourceEmbedded = "EMBEDDED"

	// InputTimecodeSourceZerobased is a InputTimecodeSource enum value
	InputTimecodeSourceZerobased = "ZEROBASED"

	// InputTimecodeSourceSpecifiedstart is a InputTimecodeSource enum value
	InputTimecodeSourceSpecifiedstart = "SPECIFIEDSTART"
)

Timecode source under input settings (InputTimecodeSource) only affects the behavior of features that apply to a single input at a time, such as input clipping and synchronizing some captions formats. Use this setting to specify whether the service counts frames by timecodes embedded in the video (EMBEDDED) or by starting the first frame at zero (ZEROBASED). In both cases, the timecode format is HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where FF is the frame number. Only set this to EMBEDDED if your source video has embedded timecodes.

View Source 
const (
	// JobPhaseProbing is a JobPhase enum value
	JobPhaseProbing = "PROBING"

	// JobPhaseTranscoding is a JobPhase enum value
	JobPhaseTranscoding = "TRANSCODING"

	// JobPhaseUploading is a JobPhase enum value
	JobPhaseUploading = "UPLOADING"
)

A job's phase can be PROBING, TRANSCODING OR UPLOADING

View Source 
const (
	// JobStatusSubmitted is a JobStatus enum value
	JobStatusSubmitted = "SUBMITTED"

	// JobStatusProgressing is a JobStatus enum value
	JobStatusProgressing = "PROGRESSING"

	// JobStatusComplete is a JobStatus enum value
	JobStatusComplete = "COMPLETE"

	// JobStatusCanceled is a JobStatus enum value
	JobStatusCanceled = "CANCELED"

	// JobStatusError is a JobStatus enum value
	JobStatusError = "ERROR"
)

A job's status can be SUBMITTED, PROGRESSING, COMPLETE, CANCELED, or ERROR.

View Source 
const (
	// JobTemplateListByName is a JobTemplateListBy enum value
	JobTemplateListByName = "NAME"

	// JobTemplateListByCreationDate is a JobTemplateListBy enum value
	JobTemplateListByCreationDate = "CREATION_DATE"

	// JobTemplateListBySystem is a JobTemplateListBy enum value
	JobTemplateListBySystem = "SYSTEM"
)

Optional. When you request a list of job templates, you can choose to list them alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't specify, the service will list them by name.

View Source 
const (
	// LanguageCodeEng is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEng = "ENG"

	// LanguageCodeSpa is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSpa = "SPA"

	// LanguageCodeFra is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFra = "FRA"

	// LanguageCodeDeu is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeDeu = "DEU"

	// LanguageCodeGer is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGer = "GER"

	// LanguageCodeZho is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeZho = "ZHO"

	// LanguageCodeAra is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAra = "ARA"

	// LanguageCodeHin is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHin = "HIN"

	// LanguageCodeJpn is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeJpn = "JPN"

	// LanguageCodeRus is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeRus = "RUS"

	// LanguageCodePor is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodePor = "POR"

	// LanguageCodeIta is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIta = "ITA"

	// LanguageCodeUrd is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeUrd = "URD"

	// LanguageCodeVie is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeVie = "VIE"

	// LanguageCodeKor is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKor = "KOR"

	// LanguageCodePan is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodePan = "PAN"

	// LanguageCodeAbk is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAbk = "ABK"

	// LanguageCodeAar is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAar = "AAR"

	// LanguageCodeAfr is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAfr = "AFR"

	// LanguageCodeAka is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAka = "AKA"

	// LanguageCodeSqi is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSqi = "SQI"

	// LanguageCodeAmh is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAmh = "AMH"

	// LanguageCodeArg is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeArg = "ARG"

	// LanguageCodeHye is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHye = "HYE"

	// LanguageCodeAsm is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAsm = "ASM"

	// LanguageCodeAva is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAva = "AVA"

	// LanguageCodeAve is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAve = "AVE"

	// LanguageCodeAym is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAym = "AYM"

	// LanguageCodeAze is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAze = "AZE"

	// LanguageCodeBam is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBam = "BAM"

	// LanguageCodeBak is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBak = "BAK"

	// LanguageCodeEus is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEus = "EUS"

	// LanguageCodeBel is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBel = "BEL"

	// LanguageCodeBen is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBen = "BEN"

	// LanguageCodeBih is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBih = "BIH"

	// LanguageCodeBis is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBis = "BIS"

	// LanguageCodeBos is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBos = "BOS"

	// LanguageCodeBre is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBre = "BRE"

	// LanguageCodeBul is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBul = "BUL"

	// LanguageCodeMya is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMya = "MYA"

	// LanguageCodeCat is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCat = "CAT"

	// LanguageCodeKhm is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKhm = "KHM"

	// LanguageCodeCha is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCha = "CHA"

	// LanguageCodeChe is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeChe = "CHE"

	// LanguageCodeNya is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNya = "NYA"

	// LanguageCodeChu is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeChu = "CHU"

	// LanguageCodeChv is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeChv = "CHV"

	// LanguageCodeCor is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCor = "COR"

	// LanguageCodeCos is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCos = "COS"

	// LanguageCodeCre is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCre = "CRE"

	// LanguageCodeHrv is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHrv = "HRV"

	// LanguageCodeCes is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCes = "CES"

	// LanguageCodeDan is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeDan = "DAN"

	// LanguageCodeDiv is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeDiv = "DIV"

	// LanguageCodeNld is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNld = "NLD"

	// LanguageCodeDzo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeDzo = "DZO"

	// LanguageCodeEnm is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEnm = "ENM"

	// LanguageCodeEpo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEpo = "EPO"

	// LanguageCodeEst is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEst = "EST"

	// LanguageCodeEwe is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEwe = "EWE"

	// LanguageCodeFao is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFao = "FAO"

	// LanguageCodeFij is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFij = "FIJ"

	// LanguageCodeFin is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFin = "FIN"

	// LanguageCodeFrm is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFrm = "FRM"

	// LanguageCodeFul is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFul = "FUL"

	// LanguageCodeGla is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGla = "GLA"

	// LanguageCodeGlg is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGlg = "GLG"

	// LanguageCodeLug is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLug = "LUG"

	// LanguageCodeKat is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKat = "KAT"

	// LanguageCodeEll is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEll = "ELL"

	// LanguageCodeGrn is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGrn = "GRN"

	// LanguageCodeGuj is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGuj = "GUJ"

	// LanguageCodeHat is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHat = "HAT"

	// LanguageCodeHau is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHau = "HAU"

	// LanguageCodeHeb is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHeb = "HEB"

	// LanguageCodeHer is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHer = "HER"

	// LanguageCodeHmo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHmo = "HMO"

	// LanguageCodeHun is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHun = "HUN"

	// LanguageCodeIsl is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIsl = "ISL"

	// LanguageCodeIdo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIdo = "IDO"

	// LanguageCodeIbo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIbo = "IBO"

	// LanguageCodeInd is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeInd = "IND"

	// LanguageCodeIna is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIna = "INA"

	// LanguageCodeIle is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIle = "ILE"

	// LanguageCodeIku is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIku = "IKU"

	// LanguageCodeIpk is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIpk = "IPK"

	// LanguageCodeGle is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGle = "GLE"

	// LanguageCodeJav is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeJav = "JAV"

	// LanguageCodeKal is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKal = "KAL"

	// LanguageCodeKan is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKan = "KAN"

	// LanguageCodeKau is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKau = "KAU"

	// LanguageCodeKas is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKas = "KAS"

	// LanguageCodeKaz is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKaz = "KAZ"

	// LanguageCodeKik is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKik = "KIK"

	// LanguageCodeKin is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKin = "KIN"

	// LanguageCodeKir is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKir = "KIR"

	// LanguageCodeKom is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKom = "KOM"

	// LanguageCodeKon is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKon = "KON"

	// LanguageCodeKua is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKua = "KUA"

	// LanguageCodeKur is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKur = "KUR"

	// LanguageCodeLao is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLao = "LAO"

	// LanguageCodeLat is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLat = "LAT"

	// LanguageCodeLav is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLav = "LAV"

	// LanguageCodeLim is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLim = "LIM"

	// LanguageCodeLin is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLin = "LIN"

	// LanguageCodeLit is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLit = "LIT"

	// LanguageCodeLub is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLub = "LUB"

	// LanguageCodeLtz is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLtz = "LTZ"

	// LanguageCodeMkd is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMkd = "MKD"

	// LanguageCodeMlg is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMlg = "MLG"

	// LanguageCodeMsa is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMsa = "MSA"

	// LanguageCodeMal is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMal = "MAL"

	// LanguageCodeMlt is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMlt = "MLT"

	// LanguageCodeGlv is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGlv = "GLV"

	// LanguageCodeMri is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMri = "MRI"

	// LanguageCodeMar is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMar = "MAR"

	// LanguageCodeMah is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMah = "MAH"

	// LanguageCodeMon is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMon = "MON"

	// LanguageCodeNau is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNau = "NAU"

	// LanguageCodeNav is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNav = "NAV"

	// LanguageCodeNde is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNde = "NDE"

	// LanguageCodeNbl is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNbl = "NBL"

	// LanguageCodeNdo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNdo = "NDO"

	// LanguageCodeNep is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNep = "NEP"

	// LanguageCodeSme is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSme = "SME"

	// LanguageCodeNor is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNor = "NOR"

	// LanguageCodeNob is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNob = "NOB"

	// LanguageCodeNno is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNno = "NNO"

	// LanguageCodeOci is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOci = "OCI"

	// LanguageCodeOji is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOji = "OJI"

	// LanguageCodeOri is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOri = "ORI"

	// LanguageCodeOrm is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOrm = "ORM"

	// LanguageCodeOss is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOss = "OSS"

	// LanguageCodePli is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodePli = "PLI"

	// LanguageCodeFas is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFas = "FAS"

	// LanguageCodePol is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodePol = "POL"

	// LanguageCodePus is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodePus = "PUS"

	// LanguageCodeQue is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeQue = "QUE"

	// LanguageCodeQaa is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeQaa = "QAA"

	// LanguageCodeRon is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeRon = "RON"

	// LanguageCodeRoh is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeRoh = "ROH"

	// LanguageCodeRun is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeRun = "RUN"

	// LanguageCodeSmo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSmo = "SMO"

	// LanguageCodeSag is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSag = "SAG"

	// LanguageCodeSan is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSan = "SAN"

	// LanguageCodeSrd is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSrd = "SRD"

	// LanguageCodeSrb is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSrb = "SRB"

	// LanguageCodeSna is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSna = "SNA"

	// LanguageCodeIii is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIii = "III"

	// LanguageCodeSnd is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSnd = "SND"

	// LanguageCodeSin is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSin = "SIN"

	// LanguageCodeSlk is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSlk = "SLK"

	// LanguageCodeSlv is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSlv = "SLV"

	// LanguageCodeSom is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSom = "SOM"

	// LanguageCodeSot is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSot = "SOT"

	// LanguageCodeSun is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSun = "SUN"

	// LanguageCodeSwa is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSwa = "SWA"

	// LanguageCodeSsw is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSsw = "SSW"

	// LanguageCodeSwe is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSwe = "SWE"

	// LanguageCodeTgl is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTgl = "TGL"

	// LanguageCodeTah is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTah = "TAH"

	// LanguageCodeTgk is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTgk = "TGK"

	// LanguageCodeTam is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTam = "TAM"

	// LanguageCodeTat is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTat = "TAT"

	// LanguageCodeTel is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTel = "TEL"

	// LanguageCodeTha is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTha = "THA"

	// LanguageCodeBod is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBod = "BOD"

	// LanguageCodeTir is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTir = "TIR"

	// LanguageCodeTon is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTon = "TON"

	// LanguageCodeTso is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTso = "TSO"

	// LanguageCodeTsn is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTsn = "TSN"

	// LanguageCodeTur is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTur = "TUR"

	// LanguageCodeTuk is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTuk = "TUK"

	// LanguageCodeTwi is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTwi = "TWI"

	// LanguageCodeUig is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeUig = "UIG"

	// LanguageCodeUkr is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeUkr = "UKR"

	// LanguageCodeUzb is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeUzb = "UZB"

	// LanguageCodeVen is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeVen = "VEN"

	// LanguageCodeVol is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeVol = "VOL"

	// LanguageCodeWln is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeWln = "WLN"

	// LanguageCodeCym is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCym = "CYM"

	// LanguageCodeFry is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFry = "FRY"

	// LanguageCodeWol is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeWol = "WOL"

	// LanguageCodeXho is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeXho = "XHO"

	// LanguageCodeYid is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeYid = "YID"

	// LanguageCodeYor is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeYor = "YOR"

	// LanguageCodeZha is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeZha = "ZHA"

	// LanguageCodeZul is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeZul = "ZUL"

	// LanguageCodeOrj is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOrj = "ORJ"

	// LanguageCodeQpc is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeQpc = "QPC"

	// LanguageCodeTng is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTng = "TNG"
)

Specify the language, using the ISO 639-2 three-letter code listed at https://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/php/code_list.php.

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsAudioBufferModelDvb is a M2tsAudioBufferModel enum value
	M2tsAudioBufferModelDvb = "DVB"

	// M2tsAudioBufferModelAtsc is a M2tsAudioBufferModel enum value
	M2tsAudioBufferModelAtsc = "ATSC"
)

Selects between the DVB and ATSC buffer models for Dolby Digital audio.

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsBufferModelMultiplex is a M2tsBufferModel enum value
	M2tsBufferModelMultiplex = "MULTIPLEX"

	// M2tsBufferModelNone is a M2tsBufferModel enum value
	M2tsBufferModelNone = "NONE"
)

Controls what buffer model to use for accurate interleaving. If set to MULTIPLEX, use multiplex buffer model. If set to NONE, this can lead to lower latency, but low-memory devices may not be able to play back the stream without interruptions.

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsEbpAudioIntervalVideoAndFixedIntervals is a M2tsEbpAudioInterval enum value
	M2tsEbpAudioIntervalVideoAndFixedIntervals = "VIDEO_AND_FIXED_INTERVALS"

	// M2tsEbpAudioIntervalVideoInterval is a M2tsEbpAudioInterval enum value
	M2tsEbpAudioIntervalVideoInterval = "VIDEO_INTERVAL"
)

When set to VIDEO_AND_FIXED_INTERVALS, audio EBP markers will be added to partitions 3 and 4. The interval between these additional markers will be fixed, and will be slightly shorter than the video EBP marker interval. When set to VIDEO_INTERVAL, these additional markers will not be inserted. Only applicable when EBP segmentation markers are is selected (segmentationMarkers is EBP or EBP_LEGACY).

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsEbpPlacementVideoAndAudioPids is a M2tsEbpPlacement enum value
	M2tsEbpPlacementVideoAndAudioPids = "VIDEO_AND_AUDIO_PIDS"

	// M2tsEbpPlacementVideoPid is a M2tsEbpPlacement enum value
	M2tsEbpPlacementVideoPid = "VIDEO_PID"
)

Selects which PIDs to place EBP markers on. They can either be placed only on the video PID, or on both the video PID and all audio PIDs. Only applicable when EBP segmentation markers are is selected (segmentationMarkers is EBP or EBP_LEGACY).

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsEsRateInPesInclude is a M2tsEsRateInPes enum value
	M2tsEsRateInPesInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// M2tsEsRateInPesExclude is a M2tsEsRateInPes enum value
	M2tsEsRateInPesExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

Controls whether to include the ES Rate field in the PES header.

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrderForce is a M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrder enum value
	M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrderForce = "FORCE"

	// M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrderDefault is a M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrder enum value
	M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrderDefault = "DEFAULT"
)

Keep the default value (DEFAULT) unless you know that your audio EBP markers are incorrectly appearing before your video EBP markers. To correct this problem, set this value to Force (FORCE).

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsNielsenId3Insert is a M2tsNielsenId3 enum value
	M2tsNielsenId3Insert = "INSERT"

	// M2tsNielsenId3None is a M2tsNielsenId3 enum value
	M2tsNielsenId3None = "NONE"
)

If INSERT, Nielsen inaudible tones for media tracking will be detected in the input audio and an equivalent ID3 tag will be inserted in the output.

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsPcrControlPcrEveryPesPacket is a M2tsPcrControl enum value
	M2tsPcrControlPcrEveryPesPacket = "PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET"

	// M2tsPcrControlConfiguredPcrPeriod is a M2tsPcrControl enum value
	M2tsPcrControlConfiguredPcrPeriod = "CONFIGURED_PCR_PERIOD"
)

When set to PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET, a Program Clock Reference value is inserted for every Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) header. This is effective only when the PCR PID is the same as the video or audio elementary stream.

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsRateModeVbr is a M2tsRateMode enum value
	M2tsRateModeVbr = "VBR"

	// M2tsRateModeCbr is a M2tsRateMode enum value
	M2tsRateModeCbr = "CBR"
)

When set to CBR, inserts null packets into transport stream to fill specified bitrate. When set to VBR, the bitrate setting acts as the maximum bitrate, but the output will not be padded up to that bitrate.

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsScte35SourcePassthrough is a M2tsScte35Source enum value
	M2tsScte35SourcePassthrough = "PASSTHROUGH"

	// M2tsScte35SourceNone is a M2tsScte35Source enum value
	M2tsScte35SourceNone = "NONE"
)

For SCTE-35 markers from your input-- Choose Passthrough (PASSTHROUGH) if you want SCTE-35 markers that appear in your input to also appear in this output. Choose None (NONE) if you don't want SCTE-35 markers in this output. For SCTE-35 markers from an ESAM XML document-- Choose None (NONE). Also provide the ESAM XML as a string in the setting Signal processing notification XML (sccXml). Also enable ESAM SCTE-35 (include the property scte35Esam).

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersNone is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersNone = "NONE"

	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersRaiSegstart is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersRaiSegstart = "RAI_SEGSTART"

	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersRaiAdapt is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersRaiAdapt = "RAI_ADAPT"

	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersPsiSegstart is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersPsiSegstart = "PSI_SEGSTART"

	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersEbp is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersEbp = "EBP"

	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersEbpLegacy is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersEbpLegacy = "EBP_LEGACY"
)

Inserts segmentation markers at each segmentation_time period. rai_segstart sets the Random Access Indicator bit in the adaptation field. rai_adapt sets the RAI bit and adds the current timecode in the private data bytes. psi_segstart inserts PAT and PMT tables at the start of segments. ebp adds Encoder Boundary Point information to the adaptation field as per OpenCable specification OC-SP-EBP-I01-130118. ebp_legacy adds Encoder Boundary Point information to the adaptation field using a legacy proprietary format.

View Source 
const (
	// M2tsSegmentationStyleMaintainCadence is a M2tsSegmentationStyle enum value
	M2tsSegmentationStyleMaintainCadence = "MAINTAIN_CADENCE"

	// M2tsSegmentationStyleResetCadence is a M2tsSegmentationStyle enum value
	M2tsSegmentationStyleResetCadence = "RESET_CADENCE"
)

The segmentation style parameter controls how segmentation markers are inserted into the transport stream. With avails, it is possible that segments may be truncated, which can influence where future segmentation markers are inserted. When a segmentation style of "reset_cadence" is selected and a segment is truncated due to an avail, we will reset the segmentation cadence. This means the subsequent segment will have a duration of of $segmentation_time seconds. When a segmentation style of "maintain_cadence" is selected and a segment is truncated due to an avail, we will not reset the segmentation cadence. This means the subsequent segment will likely be truncated as well. However, all segments after that will have a duration of $segmentation_time seconds. Note that EBP lookahead is a slight exception to this rule.

View Source 
const (
	// M3u8NielsenId3Insert is a M3u8NielsenId3 enum value
	M3u8NielsenId3Insert = "INSERT"

	// M3u8NielsenId3None is a M3u8NielsenId3 enum value
	M3u8NielsenId3None = "NONE"
)

If INSERT, Nielsen inaudible tones for media tracking will be detected in the input audio and an equivalent ID3 tag will be inserted in the output.

View Source 
const (
	// M3u8PcrControlPcrEveryPesPacket is a M3u8PcrControl enum value
	M3u8PcrControlPcrEveryPesPacket = "PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET"

	// M3u8PcrControlConfiguredPcrPeriod is a M3u8PcrControl enum value
	M3u8PcrControlConfiguredPcrPeriod = "CONFIGURED_PCR_PERIOD"
)

When set to PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET a Program Clock Reference value is inserted for every Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) header. This parameter is effective only when the PCR PID is the same as the video or audio elementary stream.

View Source 
const (
	// M3u8Scte35SourcePassthrough is a M3u8Scte35Source enum value
	M3u8Scte35SourcePassthrough = "PASSTHROUGH"

	// M3u8Scte35SourceNone is a M3u8Scte35Source enum value
	M3u8Scte35SourceNone = "NONE"
)

For SCTE-35 markers from your input-- Choose Passthrough (PASSTHROUGH) if you want SCTE-35 markers that appear in your input to also appear in this output. Choose None (NONE) if you don't want SCTE-35 markers in this output. For SCTE-35 markers from an ESAM XML document-- Choose None (NONE) if you don't want manifest conditioning. Choose Passthrough (PASSTHROUGH) and choose Ad markers (adMarkers) if you do want manifest conditioning. In both cases, also provide the ESAM XML as a string in the setting Signal processing notification XML (sccXml).

View Source 
const (
	// MotionImageInsertionModeMov is a MotionImageInsertionMode enum value
	MotionImageInsertionModeMov = "MOV"

	// MotionImageInsertionModePng is a MotionImageInsertionMode enum value
	MotionImageInsertionModePng = "PNG"
)

Choose the type of motion graphic asset that you are providing for your overlay. You can choose either a .mov file or a series of .png files.

View Source 
const (
	// MotionImagePlaybackOnce is a MotionImagePlayback enum value
	MotionImagePlaybackOnce = "ONCE"

	// MotionImagePlaybackRepeat is a MotionImagePlayback enum value
	MotionImagePlaybackRepeat = "REPEAT"
)

Specify whether your motion graphic overlay repeats on a loop or plays only once.

View Source 
const (
	// MovClapAtomInclude is a MovClapAtom enum value
	MovClapAtomInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// MovClapAtomExclude is a MovClapAtom enum value
	MovClapAtomExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

When enabled, include 'clap' atom if appropriate for the video output settings.

View Source 
const (
	// MovCslgAtomInclude is a MovCslgAtom enum value
	MovCslgAtomInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// MovCslgAtomExclude is a MovCslgAtom enum value
	MovCslgAtomExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

When enabled, file composition times will start at zero, composition times in the 'ctts' (composition time to sample) box for B-frames will be negative, and a 'cslg' (composition shift least greatest) box will be included per 14496-1 amendment 1. This improves compatibility with Apple players and tools.

View Source 
const (
	// MovMpeg2FourCCControlXdcam is a MovMpeg2FourCCControl enum value
	MovMpeg2FourCCControlXdcam = "XDCAM"

	// MovMpeg2FourCCControlMpeg is a MovMpeg2FourCCControl enum value
	MovMpeg2FourCCControlMpeg = "MPEG"
)

When set to XDCAM, writes MPEG2 video streams into the QuickTime file using XDCAM fourcc codes. This increases compatibility with Apple editors and players, but may decrease compatibility with other players. Only applicable when the video codec is MPEG2.

View Source 
const (
	// MovPaddingControlOmneon is a MovPaddingControl enum value
	MovPaddingControlOmneon = "OMNEON"

	// MovPaddingControlNone is a MovPaddingControl enum value
	MovPaddingControlNone = "NONE"
)

If set to OMNEON, inserts Omneon-compatible padding

View Source 
const (
	// MovReferenceSelfContained is a MovReference enum value
	MovReferenceSelfContained = "SELF_CONTAINED"

	// MovReferenceExternal is a MovReference enum value
	MovReferenceExternal = "EXTERNAL"
)

Always keep the default value (SELF_CONTAINED) for this setting.

View Source 
const (
	// Mp4CslgAtomInclude is a Mp4CslgAtom enum value
	Mp4CslgAtomInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// Mp4CslgAtomExclude is a Mp4CslgAtom enum value
	Mp4CslgAtomExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

When enabled, file composition times will start at zero, composition times in the 'ctts' (composition time to sample) box for B-frames will be negative, and a 'cslg' (composition shift least greatest) box will be included per 14496-1 amendment 1. This improves compatibility with Apple players and tools.

View Source 
const (
	// Mp4FreeSpaceBoxInclude is a Mp4FreeSpaceBox enum value
	Mp4FreeSpaceBoxInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// Mp4FreeSpaceBoxExclude is a Mp4FreeSpaceBox enum value
	Mp4FreeSpaceBoxExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

Inserts a free-space box immediately after the moov box.

View Source 
const (
	// Mp4MoovPlacementProgressiveDownload is a Mp4MoovPlacement enum value
	Mp4MoovPlacementProgressiveDownload = "PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD"

	// Mp4MoovPlacementNormal is a Mp4MoovPlacement enum value
	Mp4MoovPlacementNormal = "NORMAL"
)

If set to PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD, the MOOV atom is relocated to the beginning of the archive as required for progressive downloading. Otherwise it is placed normally at the end.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationOff is a Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationOff = "OFF"

	// Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationLow is a Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationLow = "LOW"

	// Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationMedium is a Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationMedium = "MEDIUM"

	// Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationHigh is a Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationHigh = "HIGH"
)

Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual quality.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2CodecLevelAuto is a Mpeg2CodecLevel enum value
	Mpeg2CodecLevelAuto = "AUTO"

	// Mpeg2CodecLevelLow is a Mpeg2CodecLevel enum value
	Mpeg2CodecLevelLow = "LOW"

	// Mpeg2CodecLevelMain is a Mpeg2CodecLevel enum value
	Mpeg2CodecLevelMain = "MAIN"

	// Mpeg2CodecLevelHigh1440 is a Mpeg2CodecLevel enum value
	Mpeg2CodecLevelHigh1440 = "HIGH1440"

	// Mpeg2CodecLevelHigh is a Mpeg2CodecLevel enum value
	Mpeg2CodecLevelHigh = "HIGH"
)

Use Level (Mpeg2CodecLevel) to set the MPEG-2 level for the video output.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2CodecProfileMain is a Mpeg2CodecProfile enum value
	Mpeg2CodecProfileMain = "MAIN"

	// Mpeg2CodecProfileProfile422 is a Mpeg2CodecProfile enum value
	Mpeg2CodecProfileProfile422 = "PROFILE_422"
)

Use Profile (Mpeg2CodecProfile) to set the MPEG-2 profile for the video output.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2DynamicSubGopAdaptive is a Mpeg2DynamicSubGop enum value
	Mpeg2DynamicSubGopAdaptive = "ADAPTIVE"

	// Mpeg2DynamicSubGopStatic is a Mpeg2DynamicSubGop enum value
	Mpeg2DynamicSubGopStatic = "STATIC"
)

Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content. This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2FramerateControlInitializeFromSource is a Mpeg2FramerateControl enum value
	Mpeg2FramerateControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// Mpeg2FramerateControlSpecified is a Mpeg2FramerateControl enum value
	Mpeg2FramerateControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output. Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop is a Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop = "DUPLICATE_DROP"

	// Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate is a Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate = "INTERPOLATE"
)

When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2GopSizeUnitsFrames is a Mpeg2GopSizeUnits enum value
	Mpeg2GopSizeUnitsFrames = "FRAMES"

	// Mpeg2GopSizeUnitsSeconds is a Mpeg2GopSizeUnits enum value
	Mpeg2GopSizeUnitsSeconds = "SECONDS"
)

Indicates if the GOP Size in MPEG2 is specified in frames or seconds. If seconds the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2InterlaceModeProgressive is a Mpeg2InterlaceMode enum value
	Mpeg2InterlaceModeProgressive = "PROGRESSIVE"

	// Mpeg2InterlaceModeTopField is a Mpeg2InterlaceMode enum value
	Mpeg2InterlaceModeTopField = "TOP_FIELD"

	// Mpeg2InterlaceModeBottomField is a Mpeg2InterlaceMode enum value
	Mpeg2InterlaceModeBottomField = "BOTTOM_FIELD"

	// Mpeg2InterlaceModeFollowTopField is a Mpeg2InterlaceMode enum value
	Mpeg2InterlaceModeFollowTopField = "FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD"

	// Mpeg2InterlaceModeFollowBottomField is a Mpeg2InterlaceMode enum value
	Mpeg2InterlaceModeFollowBottomField = "FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD"
)

Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output. * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore, behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending on which of the Follow options you chose.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionAuto is a Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision enum value
	Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionAuto = "AUTO"

	// Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision8 is a Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision enum value
	Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision8 = "INTRA_DC_PRECISION_8"

	// Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision9 is a Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision enum value
	Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision9 = "INTRA_DC_PRECISION_9"

	// Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision10 is a Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision enum value
	Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision10 = "INTRA_DC_PRECISION_10"

	// Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision11 is a Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision enum value
	Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision11 = "INTRA_DC_PRECISION_11"
)

Use Intra DC precision (Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision) to set quantization precision for intra-block DC coefficients. If you choose the value auto, the service will automatically select the precision based on the per-frame compression ratio.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2ParControlInitializeFromSource is a Mpeg2ParControl enum value
	Mpeg2ParControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// Mpeg2ParControlSpecified is a Mpeg2ParControl enum value
	Mpeg2ParControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2QualityTuningLevelSinglePass is a Mpeg2QualityTuningLevel enum value
	Mpeg2QualityTuningLevelSinglePass = "SINGLE_PASS"

	// Mpeg2QualityTuningLevelMultiPass is a Mpeg2QualityTuningLevel enum value
	Mpeg2QualityTuningLevelMultiPass = "MULTI_PASS"
)

Use Quality tuning level (Mpeg2QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to use single-pass or multipass video encoding.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2RateControlModeVbr is a Mpeg2RateControlMode enum value
	Mpeg2RateControlModeVbr = "VBR"

	// Mpeg2RateControlModeCbr is a Mpeg2RateControlMode enum value
	Mpeg2RateControlModeCbr = "CBR"
)

Use Rate control mode (Mpeg2RateControlMode) to specifiy whether the bitrate is variable (vbr) or constant (cbr).

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2SceneChangeDetectDisabled is a Mpeg2SceneChangeDetect enum value
	Mpeg2SceneChangeDetectDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// Mpeg2SceneChangeDetectEnabled is a Mpeg2SceneChangeDetect enum value
	Mpeg2SceneChangeDetectEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2SlowPalDisabled is a Mpeg2SlowPal enum value
	Mpeg2SlowPalDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// Mpeg2SlowPalEnabled is a Mpeg2SlowPal enum value
	Mpeg2SlowPalEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content complexity.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2SyntaxDefault is a Mpeg2Syntax enum value
	Mpeg2SyntaxDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// Mpeg2SyntaxD10 is a Mpeg2Syntax enum value
	Mpeg2SyntaxD10 = "D_10"
)

Produces a Type D-10 compatible bitstream (SMPTE 356M-2001).

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2TelecineNone is a Mpeg2Telecine enum value
	Mpeg2TelecineNone = "NONE"

	// Mpeg2TelecineSoft is a Mpeg2Telecine enum value
	Mpeg2TelecineSoft = "SOFT"

	// Mpeg2TelecineHard is a Mpeg2Telecine enum value
	Mpeg2TelecineHard = "HARD"
)

Only use Telecine (Mpeg2Telecine) when you set Framerate (Framerate) to 29.970. Set Telecine (Mpeg2Telecine) to Hard (hard) to produce a 29.97i output from a 23.976 input. Set it to Soft (soft) to produce 23.976 output and leave converstion to the player.

View Source 
const (
	// Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content complexity.

View Source 
const (
	// MsSmoothAudioDeduplicationCombineDuplicateStreams is a MsSmoothAudioDeduplication enum value
	MsSmoothAudioDeduplicationCombineDuplicateStreams = "COMBINE_DUPLICATE_STREAMS"

	// MsSmoothAudioDeduplicationNone is a MsSmoothAudioDeduplication enum value
	MsSmoothAudioDeduplicationNone = "NONE"
)

COMBINE_DUPLICATE_STREAMS combines identical audio encoding settings across a Microsoft Smooth output group into a single audio stream.

View Source 
const (
	// MsSmoothManifestEncodingUtf8 is a MsSmoothManifestEncoding enum value
	MsSmoothManifestEncodingUtf8 = "UTF8"

	// MsSmoothManifestEncodingUtf16 is a MsSmoothManifestEncoding enum value
	MsSmoothManifestEncodingUtf16 = "UTF16"
)

Use Manifest encoding (MsSmoothManifestEncoding) to specify the encoding format for the server and client manifest. Valid options are utf8 and utf16.

View Source 
const (
	// NoiseReducerFilterBilateral is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterBilateral = "BILATERAL"

	// NoiseReducerFilterMean is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterMean = "MEAN"

	// NoiseReducerFilterGaussian is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterGaussian = "GAUSSIAN"

	// NoiseReducerFilterLanczos is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterLanczos = "LANCZOS"

	// NoiseReducerFilterSharpen is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterSharpen = "SHARPEN"

	// NoiseReducerFilterConserve is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterConserve = "CONSERVE"

	// NoiseReducerFilterSpatial is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterSpatial = "SPATIAL"
)

Use Noise reducer filter (NoiseReducerFilter) to select one of the following spatial image filtering functions. To use this setting, you must also enable Noise reducer (NoiseReducer). * Bilateral is an edge preserving noise reduction filter. * Mean (softest), Gaussian, Lanczos, and Sharpen (sharpest) are convolution filters. * Conserve is a min/max noise reduction filter. * Spatial is a frequency-domain filter based on JND principles.

View Source 
const (
	// OrderAscending is a Order enum value
	OrderAscending = "ASCENDING"

	// OrderDescending is a Order enum value
	OrderDescending = "DESCENDING"
)

When you request lists of resources, you can optionally specify whether they are sorted in ASCENDING or DESCENDING order. Default varies by resource.

View Source 
const (
	// OutputGroupTypeHlsGroupSettings is a OutputGroupType enum value
	OutputGroupTypeHlsGroupSettings = "HLS_GROUP_SETTINGS"

	// OutputGroupTypeDashIsoGroupSettings is a OutputGroupType enum value
	OutputGroupTypeDashIsoGroupSettings = "DASH_ISO_GROUP_SETTINGS"

	// OutputGroupTypeFileGroupSettings is a OutputGroupType enum value
	OutputGroupTypeFileGroupSettings = "FILE_GROUP_SETTINGS"

	// OutputGroupTypeMsSmoothGroupSettings is a OutputGroupType enum value
	OutputGroupTypeMsSmoothGroupSettings = "MS_SMOOTH_GROUP_SETTINGS"

	// OutputGroupTypeCmafGroupSettings is a OutputGroupType enum value
	OutputGroupTypeCmafGroupSettings = "CMAF_GROUP_SETTINGS"
)

Type of output group (File group, Apple HLS, DASH ISO, Microsoft Smooth Streaming, CMAF)

View Source 
const (
	// OutputSdtSdtFollow is a OutputSdt enum value
	OutputSdtSdtFollow = "SDT_FOLLOW"

	// OutputSdtSdtFollowIfPresent is a OutputSdt enum value
	OutputSdtSdtFollowIfPresent = "SDT_FOLLOW_IF_PRESENT"

	// OutputSdtSdtManual is a OutputSdt enum value
	OutputSdtSdtManual = "SDT_MANUAL"

	// OutputSdtSdtNone is a OutputSdt enum value
	OutputSdtSdtNone = "SDT_NONE"
)

Selects method of inserting SDT information into output stream. "Follow input SDT" copies SDT information from input stream to output stream. "Follow input SDT if present" copies SDT information from input stream to output stream if SDT information is present in the input, otherwise it will fall back on the user-defined values. Enter "SDT Manually" means user will enter the SDT information. "No SDT" means output stream will not contain SDT information.

View Source 
const (
	// PresetListByName is a PresetListBy enum value
	PresetListByName = "NAME"

	// PresetListByCreationDate is a PresetListBy enum value
	PresetListByCreationDate = "CREATION_DATE"

	// PresetListBySystem is a PresetListBy enum value
	PresetListBySystem = "SYSTEM"
)

Optional. When you request a list of presets, you can choose to list them alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't specify, the service will list them by name.

View Source 
const (
	// PricingPlanOnDemand is a PricingPlan enum value
	PricingPlanOnDemand = "ON_DEMAND"

	// PricingPlanReserved is a PricingPlan enum value
	PricingPlanReserved = "RESERVED"
)

Specifies whether the pricing plan for the queue is on-demand or reserved. For on-demand, you pay per minute, billed in increments of .01 minute. For reserved, you pay for the transcoding capacity of the entire queue, regardless of how much or how little you use it. Reserved pricing requires a 12-month commitment.

View Source 
const (
	// ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422 is a ProresCodecProfile enum value
	ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422 = "APPLE_PRORES_422"

	// ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Hq is a ProresCodecProfile enum value
	ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Hq = "APPLE_PRORES_422_HQ"

	// ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Lt is a ProresCodecProfile enum value
	ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Lt = "APPLE_PRORES_422_LT"

	// ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Proxy is a ProresCodecProfile enum value
	ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Proxy = "APPLE_PRORES_422_PROXY"
)

Use Profile (ProResCodecProfile) to specifiy the type of Apple ProRes codec to use for this output.

View Source 
const (
	// ProresFramerateControlInitializeFromSource is a ProresFramerateControl enum value
	ProresFramerateControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// ProresFramerateControlSpecified is a ProresFramerateControl enum value
	ProresFramerateControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output. Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.

View Source 
const (
	// ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop is a ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop = "DUPLICATE_DROP"

	// ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate is a ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate = "INTERPOLATE"
)

When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.

View Source 
const (
	// ProresInterlaceModeProgressive is a ProresInterlaceMode enum value
	ProresInterlaceModeProgressive = "PROGRESSIVE"

	// ProresInterlaceModeTopField is a ProresInterlaceMode enum value
	ProresInterlaceModeTopField = "TOP_FIELD"

	// ProresInterlaceModeBottomField is a ProresInterlaceMode enum value
	ProresInterlaceModeBottomField = "BOTTOM_FIELD"

	// ProresInterlaceModeFollowTopField is a ProresInterlaceMode enum value
	ProresInterlaceModeFollowTopField = "FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD"

	// ProresInterlaceModeFollowBottomField is a ProresInterlaceMode enum value
	ProresInterlaceModeFollowBottomField = "FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD"
)

Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output. * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore, behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending on which of the Follow options you chose.

View Source 
const (
	// ProresParControlInitializeFromSource is a ProresParControl enum value
	ProresParControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// ProresParControlSpecified is a ProresParControl enum value
	ProresParControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

Use (ProresParControl) to specify how the service determines the pixel aspect ratio. Set to Follow source (INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE) to use the pixel aspect ratio from the input. To specify a different pixel aspect ratio: Using the console, choose it from the dropdown menu. Using the API, set ProresParControl to (SPECIFIED) and provide for (ParNumerator) and (ParDenominator).

View Source 
const (
	// ProresSlowPalDisabled is a ProresSlowPal enum value
	ProresSlowPalDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// ProresSlowPalEnabled is a ProresSlowPal enum value
	ProresSlowPalEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.

View Source 
const (
	// ProresTelecineNone is a ProresTelecine enum value
	ProresTelecineNone = "NONE"

	// ProresTelecineHard is a ProresTelecine enum value
	ProresTelecineHard = "HARD"
)

Only use Telecine (ProresTelecine) when you set Framerate (Framerate) to 29.970. Set Telecine (ProresTelecine) to Hard (hard) to produce a 29.97i output from a 23.976 input. Set it to Soft (soft) to produce 23.976 output and leave converstion to the player.

View Source 
const (
	// QueueListByName is a QueueListBy enum value
	QueueListByName = "NAME"

	// QueueListByCreationDate is a QueueListBy enum value
	QueueListByCreationDate = "CREATION_DATE"
)

Optional. When you request a list of queues, you can choose to list them alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't specify, the service will list them by creation date.

View Source 
const (
	// QueueStatusActive is a QueueStatus enum value
	QueueStatusActive = "ACTIVE"

	// QueueStatusPaused is a QueueStatus enum value
	QueueStatusPaused = "PAUSED"
)

Queues can be ACTIVE or PAUSED. If you pause a queue, jobs in that queue won't begin. Jobs that are running when you pause a queue continue to run until they finish or result in an error.

View Source 
const (
	// RenewalTypeAutoRenew is a RenewalType enum value
	RenewalTypeAutoRenew = "AUTO_RENEW"

	// RenewalTypeExpire is a RenewalType enum value
	RenewalTypeExpire = "EXPIRE"
)

Specifies whether the term of your reserved queue pricing plan is automatically extended (AUTO_RENEW) or expires (EXPIRE) at the end of the term.

View Source 
const (
	// ReservationPlanStatusActive is a ReservationPlanStatus enum value
	ReservationPlanStatusActive = "ACTIVE"

	// ReservationPlanStatusExpired is a ReservationPlanStatus enum value
	ReservationPlanStatusExpired = "EXPIRED"
)

Specifies whether the pricing plan for your reserved queue is ACTIVE or EXPIRED.

View Source 
const (
	// RespondToAfdNone is a RespondToAfd enum value
	RespondToAfdNone = "NONE"

	// RespondToAfdRespond is a RespondToAfd enum value
	RespondToAfdRespond = "RESPOND"

	// RespondToAfdPassthrough is a RespondToAfd enum value
	RespondToAfdPassthrough = "PASSTHROUGH"
)

Use Respond to AFD (RespondToAfd) to specify how the service changes the video itself in response to AFD values in the input. * Choose Respond to clip the input video frame according to the AFD value, input display aspect ratio, and output display aspect ratio. * Choose Passthrough to include the input AFD values. Do not choose this when AfdSignaling is set to (NONE). A preferred implementation of this workflow is to set RespondToAfd to (NONE) and set AfdSignaling to (AUTO). * Choose None to remove all input AFD values from this output.

View Source 
const (
	// S3ServerSideEncryptionTypeServerSideEncryptionS3 is a S3ServerSideEncryptionType enum value
	S3ServerSideEncryptionTypeServerSideEncryptionS3 = "SERVER_SIDE_ENCRYPTION_S3"

	// S3ServerSideEncryptionTypeServerSideEncryptionKms is a S3ServerSideEncryptionType enum value
	S3ServerSideEncryptionTypeServerSideEncryptionKms = "SERVER_SIDE_ENCRYPTION_KMS"
)

Specify how you want your data keys managed. AWS uses data keys to encrypt your content. AWS also encrypts the data keys themselves, using a customer master key (CMK), and then stores the encrypted data keys alongside your encrypted content. Use this setting to specify which AWS service manages the CMK. For simplest set up, choose Amazon S3 (SERVER_SIDE_ENCRYPTION_S3). If you want your master key to be managed by AWS Key Management Service (KMS), choose AWS KMS (SERVER_SIDE_ENCRYPTION_KMS). By default, when you choose AWS KMS, KMS uses the AWS managed customer master key (CMK) associated with Amazon S3 to encrypt your data keys. You can optionally choose to specify a different, customer managed CMK. Do so by specifying the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the key for the setting KMS ARN (kmsKeyArn).

View Source 
const (
	// ScalingBehaviorDefault is a ScalingBehavior enum value
	ScalingBehaviorDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// ScalingBehaviorStretchToOutput is a ScalingBehavior enum value
	ScalingBehaviorStretchToOutput = "STRETCH_TO_OUTPUT"
)

Specify how the service handles outputs that have a different aspect ratio from the input aspect ratio. Choose Stretch to output (STRETCH_TO_OUTPUT) to have the service stretch your video image to fit. Keep the setting Default (DEFAULT) to have the service letterbox your video instead. This setting overrides any value that you specify for the setting Selection placement (position) in this output.

View Source 
const (
	// SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2397 is a SccDestinationFramerate enum value
	SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2397 = "FRAMERATE_23_97"

	// SccDestinationFramerateFramerate24 is a SccDestinationFramerate enum value
	SccDestinationFramerateFramerate24 = "FRAMERATE_24"

	// SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2997Dropframe is a SccDestinationFramerate enum value
	SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2997Dropframe = "FRAMERATE_29_97_DROPFRAME"

	// SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2997NonDropframe is a SccDestinationFramerate enum value
	SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2997NonDropframe = "FRAMERATE_29_97_NON_DROPFRAME"
)

Set Framerate (SccDestinationFramerate) to make sure that the captions and the video are synchronized in the output. Specify a frame rate that matches the frame rate of the associated video. If the video frame rate is 29.97, choose 29.97 dropframe (FRAMERATE_29_97_DROPFRAME) only if the video has video_insertion=true and drop_frame_timecode=true; otherwise, choose 29.97 non-dropframe (FRAMERATE_29_97_NON_DROPFRAME).

View Source 
const (
	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds10 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds10 = "SECONDS_10"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds12 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds12 = "SECONDS_12"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds15 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds15 = "SECONDS_15"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds20 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds20 = "SECONDS_20"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds30 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds30 = "SECONDS_30"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds60 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds60 = "SECONDS_60"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds120 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds120 = "SECONDS_120"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds180 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds180 = "SECONDS_180"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds240 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds240 = "SECONDS_240"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds300 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds300 = "SECONDS_300"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds360 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds360 = "SECONDS_360"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds420 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds420 = "SECONDS_420"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds480 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds480 = "SECONDS_480"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds540 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds540 = "SECONDS_540"

	// StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds600 is a StatusUpdateInterval enum value
	StatusUpdateIntervalSeconds600 = "SECONDS_600"
)

Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.

View Source 
const (
	// TimecodeBurninPositionTopCenter is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionTopCenter = "TOP_CENTER"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionTopLeft is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionTopLeft = "TOP_LEFT"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionTopRight is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionTopRight = "TOP_RIGHT"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleLeft is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleLeft = "MIDDLE_LEFT"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleCenter is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleCenter = "MIDDLE_CENTER"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleRight is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleRight = "MIDDLE_RIGHT"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionBottomLeft is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionBottomLeft = "BOTTOM_LEFT"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionBottomCenter is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionBottomCenter = "BOTTOM_CENTER"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionBottomRight is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionBottomRight = "BOTTOM_RIGHT"
)

Use Position (Position) under under Timecode burn-in (TimecodeBurnIn) to specify the location the burned-in timecode on output video.

View Source 
const (
	// TimecodeSourceEmbedded is a TimecodeSource enum value
	TimecodeSourceEmbedded = "EMBEDDED"

	// TimecodeSourceZerobased is a TimecodeSource enum value
	TimecodeSourceZerobased = "ZEROBASED"

	// TimecodeSourceSpecifiedstart is a TimecodeSource enum value
	TimecodeSourceSpecifiedstart = "SPECIFIEDSTART"
)

Use Source (TimecodeSource) to set how timecodes are handled within this job. To make sure that your video, audio, captions, and markers are synchronized and that time-based features, such as image inserter, work correctly, choose the Timecode source option that matches your assets. All timecodes are in a 24-hour format with frame number (HH:MM:SS:FF). * Embedded (EMBEDDED) - Use the timecode that is in the input video. If no embedded timecode is in the source, the service will use Start at 0 (ZEROBASED) instead. * Start at 0 (ZEROBASED) - Set the timecode of the initial frame to 00:00:00:00. * Specified Start (SPECIFIEDSTART) - Set the timecode of the initial frame to a value other than zero. You use Start timecode (Start) to provide this value.

View Source 
const (
	// TimedMetadataPassthrough is a TimedMetadata enum value
	TimedMetadataPassthrough = "PASSTHROUGH"

	// TimedMetadataNone is a TimedMetadata enum value
	TimedMetadataNone = "NONE"
)

Applies only to HLS outputs. Use this setting to specify whether the service inserts the ID3 timed metadata from the input in this output.

View Source 
const (
	// TtmlStylePassthroughEnabled is a TtmlStylePassthrough enum value
	TtmlStylePassthroughEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// TtmlStylePassthroughDisabled is a TtmlStylePassthrough enum value
	TtmlStylePassthroughDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

Pass through style and position information from a TTML-like input source (TTML, SMPTE-TT, CFF-TT) to the CFF-TT output or TTML output.

View Source 
const (
	// TypeSystem is a Type enum value
	TypeSystem = "SYSTEM"

	// TypeCustom is a Type enum value
	TypeCustom = "CUSTOM"
)
View Source 
const (
	// VideoCodecFrameCapture is a VideoCodec enum value
	VideoCodecFrameCapture = "FRAME_CAPTURE"

	// VideoCodecH264 is a VideoCodec enum value
	VideoCodecH264 = "H_264"

	// VideoCodecH265 is a VideoCodec enum value
	VideoCodecH265 = "H_265"

	// VideoCodecMpeg2 is a VideoCodec enum value
	VideoCodecMpeg2 = "MPEG2"

	// VideoCodecProres is a VideoCodec enum value
	VideoCodecProres = "PRORES"
)

Type of video codec

View Source 
const (
	// VideoTimecodeInsertionDisabled is a VideoTimecodeInsertion enum value
	VideoTimecodeInsertionDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// VideoTimecodeInsertionPicTimingSei is a VideoTimecodeInsertion enum value
	VideoTimecodeInsertionPicTimingSei = "PIC_TIMING_SEI"
)

Applies only to H.264, H.265, MPEG2, and ProRes outputs. Only enable Timecode insertion when the input frame rate is identical to the output frame rate. To include timecodes in this output, set Timecode insertion (VideoTimecodeInsertion) to PIC_TIMING_SEI. To leave them out, set it to DISABLED. Default is DISABLED. When the service inserts timecodes in an output, by default, it uses any embedded timecodes from the input. If none are present, the service will set the timecode for the first output frame to zero. To change this default behavior, adjust the settings under Timecode configuration (TimecodeConfig). In the console, these settings are located under Job > Job settings > Timecode configuration. Note - Timecode source under input settings (InputTimecodeSource) does not affect the timecodes that are inserted in the output. Source under Job settings > Timecode configuration (TimecodeSource) does.

View Source 
const (
	// WavFormatRiff is a WavFormat enum value
	WavFormatRiff = "RIFF"

	// WavFormatRf64 is a WavFormat enum value
	WavFormatRf64 = "RF64"
)

The service defaults to using RIFF for WAV outputs. If your output audio is likely to exceed 4 GB in file size, or if you otherwise need the extended support of the RF64 format, set your output WAV file format to RF64.

View Source 
const (

	// ErrCodeBadRequestException for service response error code
	// "BadRequestException".
	ErrCodeBadRequestException = "BadRequestException"

	// ErrCodeConflictException for service response error code
	// "ConflictException".
	ErrCodeConflictException = "ConflictException"

	// ErrCodeForbiddenException for service response error code
	// "ForbiddenException".
	ErrCodeForbiddenException = "ForbiddenException"

	// ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException for service response error code
	// "InternalServerErrorException".
	ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException = "InternalServerErrorException"

	// ErrCodeNotFoundException for service response error code
	// "NotFoundException".
	ErrCodeNotFoundException = "NotFoundException"

	// ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException for service response error code
	// "TooManyRequestsException".
	ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException = "TooManyRequestsException"
)
View Source 
const (
	ServiceName = "mediaconvert" // Name of service.
	EndpointsID = ServiceName    // ID to lookup a service endpoint with.
	ServiceID   = "MediaConvert" // ServiceID is a unique identifer of a specific service.
)

Service information constants

View Source 
const (
	// CmafEncryptionTypeSampleAes is a CmafEncryptionType enum value
	CmafEncryptionTypeSampleAes = "SAMPLE_AES"
)

Encrypts the segments with the given encryption scheme. Leave blank to disable. Selecting 'Disabled' in the web interface also disables encryption.

View Source 
const (
	// CmafKeyProviderTypeStaticKey is a CmafKeyProviderType enum value
	CmafKeyProviderTypeStaticKey = "STATIC_KEY"
)

Indicates which type of key provider is used for encryption.

View Source 
const (
	// CommitmentOneYear is a Commitment enum value
	CommitmentOneYear = "ONE_YEAR"
)

The length of the term of your reserved queue pricing plan commitment.

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3AtmosBitstreamModeCompleteMain is a Eac3AtmosBitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3AtmosBitstreamModeCompleteMain = "COMPLETE_MAIN"
)

Specify the bitstream mode for the E-AC-3 stream that the encoder emits. For more information about the EAC3 bitstream mode, see ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex E).

View Source 
const (
	// Eac3AtmosCodingModeCodingMode916 is a Eac3AtmosCodingMode enum value
	Eac3AtmosCodingModeCodingMode916 = "CODING_MODE_9_1_6"
)

The coding mode for Dolby Digital Plus JOC (Atmos) is always 9.1.6 (CODING_MODE_9_1_6).

Variables

This section is empty.

Functions

This section is empty.

Types

type AacSettings 

type AacSettings struct {

	// Choose BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD when the input contains pre-mixed main audio
	// + audio description (AD) as a stereo pair. The value for AudioType will be
	// set to 3, which signals to downstream systems that this stream contains "broadcaster
	// mixed AD". Note that the input received by the encoder must contain pre-mixed
	// audio; the encoder does not perform the mixing. When you choose BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD,
	// the encoder ignores any values you provide in AudioType and FollowInputAudioType.
	// Choose NORMAL when the input does not contain pre-mixed audio + audio description
	// (AD). In this case, the encoder will use any values you provide for AudioType
	// and FollowInputAudioType.
	AudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix *string `locationName:"audioDescriptionBroadcasterMix" type:"string" enum:"AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix"`

	// Specify the average bitrate in bits per second. The set of valid values for
	// this setting is: 6000, 8000, 10000, 12000, 14000, 16000, 20000, 24000, 28000,
	// 32000, 40000, 48000, 56000, 64000, 80000, 96000, 112000, 128000, 160000,
	// 192000, 224000, 256000, 288000, 320000, 384000, 448000, 512000, 576000, 640000,
	// 768000, 896000, 1024000. The value you set is also constrained by the values
	// that you choose for Profile (codecProfile), Bitrate control mode (codingMode),
	// and Sample rate (sampleRate). Default values depend on Bitrate control mode
	// and Profile.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"6000" type:"integer"`

	// AAC Profile.
	CodecProfile *string `locationName:"codecProfile" type:"string" enum:"AacCodecProfile"`

	// Mono (Audio Description), Mono, Stereo, or 5.1 channel layout. Valid values
	// depend on rate control mode and profile. "1.0 - Audio Description (Receiver
	// Mix)" setting receives a stereo description plus control track and emits
	// a mono AAC encode of the description track, with control data emitted in
	// the PES header as per ETSI TS 101 154 Annex E.
	CodingMode *string `locationName:"codingMode" type:"string" enum:"AacCodingMode"`

	// Rate Control Mode.
	RateControlMode *string `locationName:"rateControlMode" type:"string" enum:"AacRateControlMode"`

	// Enables LATM/LOAS AAC output. Note that if you use LATM/LOAS AAC in an output,
	// you must choose "No container" for the output container.
	RawFormat *string `locationName:"rawFormat" type:"string" enum:"AacRawFormat"`

	// Sample rate in Hz. Valid values depend on rate control mode and profile.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"8000" type:"integer"`

	// Use MPEG-2 AAC instead of MPEG-4 AAC audio for raw or MPEG-2 Transport Stream
	// containers.
	Specification *string `locationName:"specification" type:"string" enum:"AacSpecification"`

	// VBR Quality Level - Only used if rate_control_mode is VBR.
	VbrQuality *string `locationName:"vbrQuality" type:"string" enum:"AacVbrQuality"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to the value AAC. The service accepts one of two mutually exclusive groups of AAC settings--VBR and CBR. To select one of these modes, set the value of Bitrate control mode (rateControlMode) to "VBR" or "CBR". In VBR mode, you control the audio quality with the setting VBR quality (vbrQuality). In CBR mode, you use the setting Bitrate (bitrate). Defaults and valid values depend on the rate control mode.

func (AacSettings) GoString 

func (s AacSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AacSettings) SetAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix 

func (s *AacSettings) SetAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix(v string) *AacSettings

SetAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix sets the AudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix field's value.

func (*AacSettings) SetBitrate 

func (s *AacSettings) SetBitrate(v int64) *AacSettings

SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.

func (*AacSettings) SetCodecProfile 

func (s *AacSettings) SetCodecProfile(v string) *AacSettings

SetCodecProfile sets the CodecProfile field's value.

func (*AacSettings) SetCodingMode 

func (s *AacSettings) SetCodingMode(v string) *AacSettings

SetCodingMode sets the CodingMode field's value.

func (*AacSettings) SetRateControlMode 

func (s *AacSettings) SetRateControlMode(v string) *AacSettings

SetRateControlMode sets the RateControlMode field's value.

func (*AacSettings) SetRawFormat 

func (s *AacSettings) SetRawFormat(v string) *AacSettings

SetRawFormat sets the RawFormat field's value.

func (*AacSettings) SetSampleRate 

func (s *AacSettings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *AacSettings

SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.

func (*AacSettings) SetSpecification 

func (s *AacSettings) SetSpecification(v string) *AacSettings

SetSpecification sets the Specification field's value.

func (*AacSettings) SetVbrQuality 

func (s *AacSettings) SetVbrQuality(v string) *AacSettings

SetVbrQuality sets the VbrQuality field's value.

func (AacSettings) String 

func (s AacSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*AacSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *AacSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Ac3Settings 

type Ac3Settings struct {

	// Specify the average bitrate in bits per second. Valid bitrates depend on
	// the coding mode.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"64000" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the bitstream mode for the AC-3 stream that the encoder emits. For
	// more information about the AC3 bitstream mode, see ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex
	// E).
	BitstreamMode *string `locationName:"bitstreamMode" type:"string" enum:"Ac3BitstreamMode"`

	// Dolby Digital coding mode. Determines number of channels.
	CodingMode *string `locationName:"codingMode" type:"string" enum:"Ac3CodingMode"`

	// Sets the dialnorm for the output. If blank and input audio is Dolby Digital,
	// dialnorm will be passed through.
	Dialnorm *int64 `locationName:"dialnorm" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// If set to FILM_STANDARD, adds dynamic range compression signaling to the
	// output bitstream as defined in the Dolby Digital specification.
	DynamicRangeCompressionProfile *string `locationName:"dynamicRangeCompressionProfile" type:"string" enum:"Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfile"`

	// Applies a 120Hz lowpass filter to the LFE channel prior to encoding. Only
	// valid with 3_2_LFE coding mode.
	LfeFilter *string `locationName:"lfeFilter" type:"string" enum:"Ac3LfeFilter"`

	// When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, encoder metadata will be sourced from the DD, DD+,
	// or DolbyE decoder that supplied this audio data. If audio was not supplied
	// from one of these streams, then the static metadata settings will be used.
	MetadataControl *string `locationName:"metadataControl" type:"string" enum:"Ac3MetadataControl"`

	// This value is always 48000. It represents the sample rate in Hz.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"48000" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to the value AC3.

func (Ac3Settings) GoString 

func (s Ac3Settings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Ac3Settings) SetBitrate 

func (s *Ac3Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *Ac3Settings

SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.

func (*Ac3Settings) SetBitstreamMode 

func (s *Ac3Settings) SetBitstreamMode(v string) *Ac3Settings

SetBitstreamMode sets the BitstreamMode field's value.

func (*Ac3Settings) SetCodingMode 

func (s *Ac3Settings) SetCodingMode(v string) *Ac3Settings

SetCodingMode sets the CodingMode field's value.

func (*Ac3Settings) SetDialnorm 

func (s *Ac3Settings) SetDialnorm(v int64) *Ac3Settings

SetDialnorm sets the Dialnorm field's value.

func (*Ac3Settings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionProfile 

func (s *Ac3Settings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionProfile(v string) *Ac3Settings

SetDynamicRangeCompressionProfile sets the DynamicRangeCompressionProfile field's value.

func (*Ac3Settings) SetLfeFilter 

func (s *Ac3Settings) SetLfeFilter(v string) *Ac3Settings

SetLfeFilter sets the LfeFilter field's value.

func (*Ac3Settings) SetMetadataControl 

func (s *Ac3Settings) SetMetadataControl(v string) *Ac3Settings

SetMetadataControl sets the MetadataControl field's value.

func (*Ac3Settings) SetSampleRate 

func (s *Ac3Settings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *Ac3Settings

SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.

func (Ac3Settings) String 

func (s Ac3Settings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*Ac3Settings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *Ac3Settings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type AccelerationSettings added in v1.99.0 

type AccelerationSettings struct {

	// Acceleration configuration for the job.
	//
	// Mode is a required field
	Mode *string `locationName:"mode" type:"string" required:"true" enum:"AccelerationMode"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Accelerated transcoding can significantly speed up jobs with long, visually complex content. Outputs that use this feature incur pro-tier pricing. For information about feature limitations, see the AWS Elemental MediaConvert User Guide.

func (AccelerationSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s AccelerationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AccelerationSettings) SetMode added in v1.99.0 

func (s *AccelerationSettings) SetMode(v string) *AccelerationSettings

SetMode sets the Mode field's value.

func (AccelerationSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s AccelerationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*AccelerationSettings) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *AccelerationSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type AiffSettings 

type AiffSettings struct {

	// Specify Bit depth (BitDepth), in bits per sample, to choose the encoding
	// quality for this audio track.
	BitDepth *int64 `locationName:"bitDepth" min:"16" type:"integer"`

	// Set Channels to specify the number of channels in this output audio track.
	// Choosing Mono in the console will give you 1 output channel; choosing Stereo
	// will give you 2. In the API, valid values are 1 and 2.
	Channels *int64 `locationName:"channels" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Sample rate in hz.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"8000" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to the value AIFF.

func (AiffSettings) GoString 

func (s AiffSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AiffSettings) SetBitDepth 

func (s *AiffSettings) SetBitDepth(v int64) *AiffSettings

SetBitDepth sets the BitDepth field's value.

func (*AiffSettings) SetChannels 

func (s *AiffSettings) SetChannels(v int64) *AiffSettings

SetChannels sets the Channels field's value.

func (*AiffSettings) SetSampleRate 

func (s *AiffSettings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *AiffSettings

SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.

func (AiffSettings) String 

func (s AiffSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*AiffSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *AiffSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type AncillarySourceSettings 

type AncillarySourceSettings struct {

	// Specifies the 608 channel number in the ancillary data track from which to
	// extract captions. Unused for passthrough.
	SourceAncillaryChannelNumber *int64 `locationName:"sourceAncillaryChannelNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for ancillary captions source.

func (AncillarySourceSettings) GoString 

func (s AncillarySourceSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AncillarySourceSettings) SetSourceAncillaryChannelNumber 

func (s *AncillarySourceSettings) SetSourceAncillaryChannelNumber(v int64) *AncillarySourceSettings

SetSourceAncillaryChannelNumber sets the SourceAncillaryChannelNumber field's value.

func (AncillarySourceSettings) String 

func (s AncillarySourceSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*AncillarySourceSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *AncillarySourceSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type AssociateCertificateInput added in v1.99.0 

type AssociateCertificateInput struct {

	// The ARN of the ACM certificate that you want to associate with your MediaConvert
	// resource.
	//
	// Arn is a required field
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Associates the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an AWS Certificate Manager (ACM) certificate with an AWS Elemental MediaConvert resource.

func (AssociateCertificateInput) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s AssociateCertificateInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AssociateCertificateInput) SetArn added in v1.99.0 

func (s *AssociateCertificateInput) SetArn(v string) *AssociateCertificateInput

SetArn sets the Arn field's value.

func (AssociateCertificateInput) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s AssociateCertificateInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*AssociateCertificateInput) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *AssociateCertificateInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type AssociateCertificateOutput added in v1.99.0 

type AssociateCertificateOutput struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful association of Certificate Manager Amazon Resource Name (ARN) with Mediaconvert returns an OK message.

func (AssociateCertificateOutput) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s AssociateCertificateOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (AssociateCertificateOutput) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s AssociateCertificateOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type AudioCodecSettings 

type AudioCodecSettings struct {

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value AAC. The service accepts one of two mutually exclusive groups of
	// AAC settings--VBR and CBR. To select one of these modes, set the value of
	// Bitrate control mode (rateControlMode) to "VBR" or "CBR". In VBR mode, you
	// control the audio quality with the setting VBR quality (vbrQuality). In CBR
	// mode, you use the setting Bitrate (bitrate). Defaults and valid values depend
	// on the rate control mode.
	AacSettings *AacSettings `locationName:"aacSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value AC3.
	Ac3Settings *Ac3Settings `locationName:"ac3Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value AIFF.
	AiffSettings *AiffSettings `locationName:"aiffSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Type of Audio codec.
	Codec *string `locationName:"codec" type:"string" enum:"AudioCodec"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value EAC3_ATMOS.
	Eac3AtmosSettings *Eac3AtmosSettings `locationName:"eac3AtmosSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value EAC3.
	Eac3Settings *Eac3Settings `locationName:"eac3Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value MP2.
	Mp2Settings *Mp2Settings `locationName:"mp2Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value WAV.
	WavSettings *WavSettings `locationName:"wavSettings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Audio codec settings (CodecSettings) under (AudioDescriptions) contains the group of settings related to audio encoding. The settings in this group vary depending on the value that you choose for Audio codec (Codec). For each codec enum that you choose, define the corresponding settings object. The following lists the codec enum, settings object pairs. * AAC, AacSettings * MP2, Mp2Settings * WAV, WavSettings * AIFF, AiffSettings * AC3, Ac3Settings * EAC3, Eac3Settings * EAC3_ATMOS, Eac3AtmosSettings

func (AudioCodecSettings) GoString 

func (s AudioCodecSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AudioCodecSettings) SetAacSettings 

func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetAacSettings(v *AacSettings) *AudioCodecSettings

SetAacSettings sets the AacSettings field's value.

func (*AudioCodecSettings) SetAc3Settings 

func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetAc3Settings(v *Ac3Settings) *AudioCodecSettings

SetAc3Settings sets the Ac3Settings field's value.

func (*AudioCodecSettings) SetAiffSettings 

func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetAiffSettings(v *AiffSettings) *AudioCodecSettings

SetAiffSettings sets the AiffSettings field's value.

func (*AudioCodecSettings) SetCodec 

func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetCodec(v string) *AudioCodecSettings

SetCodec sets the Codec field's value.

func (*AudioCodecSettings) SetEac3AtmosSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetEac3AtmosSettings(v *Eac3AtmosSettings) *AudioCodecSettings

SetEac3AtmosSettings sets the Eac3AtmosSettings field's value.

func (*AudioCodecSettings) SetEac3Settings 

func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetEac3Settings(v *Eac3Settings) *AudioCodecSettings

SetEac3Settings sets the Eac3Settings field's value.

func (*AudioCodecSettings) SetMp2Settings 

func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetMp2Settings(v *Mp2Settings) *AudioCodecSettings

SetMp2Settings sets the Mp2Settings field's value.

func (*AudioCodecSettings) SetWavSettings 

func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetWavSettings(v *WavSettings) *AudioCodecSettings

SetWavSettings sets the WavSettings field's value.

func (AudioCodecSettings) String 

func (s AudioCodecSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*AudioCodecSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *AudioCodecSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type AudioDescription 

type AudioDescription struct {

	// Advanced audio normalization settings. Ignore these settings unless you need
	// to comply with a loudness standard.
	AudioNormalizationSettings *AudioNormalizationSettings `locationName:"audioNormalizationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specifies which audio data to use from each input. In the simplest case,
	// specify an "Audio Selector":#inputs-audio_selector by name based on its order
	// within each input. For example if you specify "Audio Selector 3", then the
	// third audio selector will be used from each input. If an input does not have
	// an "Audio Selector 3", then the audio selector marked as "default" in that
	// input will be used. If there is no audio selector marked as "default", silence
	// will be inserted for the duration of that input. Alternatively, an "Audio
	// Selector Group":#inputs-audio_selector_group name may be specified, with
	// similar default/silence behavior. If no audio_source_name is specified, then
	// "Audio Selector 1" will be chosen automatically.
	AudioSourceName *string `locationName:"audioSourceName" type:"string"`

	// Applies only if Follow Input Audio Type is unchecked (false). A number between
	// 0 and 255. The following are defined in ISO-IEC 13818-1: 0 = Undefined, 1
	// = Clean Effects, 2 = Hearing Impaired, 3 = Visually Impaired Commentary,
	// 4-255 = Reserved.
	AudioType *int64 `locationName:"audioType" type:"integer"`

	// When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, if the input contains an ISO 639 audio_type, then
	// that value is passed through to the output. If the input contains no ISO
	// 639 audio_type, the value in Audio Type is included in the output. Otherwise
	// the value in Audio Type is included in the output. Note that this field and
	// audioType are both ignored if audioDescriptionBroadcasterMix is set to BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD.
	AudioTypeControl *string `locationName:"audioTypeControl" type:"string" enum:"AudioTypeControl"`

	// Audio codec settings (CodecSettings) under (AudioDescriptions) contains the
	// group of settings related to audio encoding. The settings in this group vary
	// depending on the value that you choose for Audio codec (Codec). For each
	// codec enum that you choose, define the corresponding settings object. The
	// following lists the codec enum, settings object pairs. * AAC, AacSettings
	// * MP2, Mp2Settings * WAV, WavSettings * AIFF, AiffSettings * AC3, Ac3Settings
	// * EAC3, Eac3Settings * EAC3_ATMOS, Eac3AtmosSettings
	CodecSettings *AudioCodecSettings `locationName:"codecSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the language for this audio output track, using the ISO 639-2 or
	// ISO 639-3 three-letter language code. The language specified will be used
	// when 'Follow Input Language Code' is not selected or when 'Follow Input Language
	// Code' is selected but there is no ISO 639 language code specified by the
	// input.
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// Indicates the language of the audio output track. The ISO 639 language specified
	// in the 'Language Code' drop down will be used when 'Follow Input Language
	// Code' is not selected or when 'Follow Input Language Code' is selected but
	// there is no ISO 639 language code specified by the input.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Choosing FOLLOW_INPUT will cause the ISO 639 language code of the output
	// to follow the ISO 639 language code of the input. The language specified
	// for languageCode' will be used when USE_CONFIGURED is selected or when FOLLOW_INPUT
	// is selected but there is no ISO 639 language code specified by the input.
	LanguageCodeControl *string `locationName:"languageCodeControl" type:"string" enum:"AudioLanguageCodeControl"`

	// Advanced audio remixing settings.
	RemixSettings *RemixSettings `locationName:"remixSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Used for MS Smooth and Apple HLS outputs. Indicates the name displayed by
	// the player (eg. English, or Director Commentary). Alphanumeric characters,
	// spaces, and underscore are legal.
	StreamName *string `locationName:"streamName" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Description of audio output

func (AudioDescription) GoString 

func (s AudioDescription) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AudioDescription) SetAudioNormalizationSettings 

func (s *AudioDescription) SetAudioNormalizationSettings(v *AudioNormalizationSettings) *AudioDescription

SetAudioNormalizationSettings sets the AudioNormalizationSettings field's value.

func (*AudioDescription) SetAudioSourceName 

func (s *AudioDescription) SetAudioSourceName(v string) *AudioDescription

SetAudioSourceName sets the AudioSourceName field's value.

func (*AudioDescription) SetAudioType 

func (s *AudioDescription) SetAudioType(v int64) *AudioDescription

SetAudioType sets the AudioType field's value.

func (*AudioDescription) SetAudioTypeControl 

func (s *AudioDescription) SetAudioTypeControl(v string) *AudioDescription

SetAudioTypeControl sets the AudioTypeControl field's value.

func (*AudioDescription) SetCodecSettings 

func (s *AudioDescription) SetCodecSettings(v *AudioCodecSettings) *AudioDescription

SetCodecSettings sets the CodecSettings field's value.

func (*AudioDescription) SetCustomLanguageCode added in v1.14.8 

func (s *AudioDescription) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *AudioDescription

SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.

func (*AudioDescription) SetLanguageCode 

func (s *AudioDescription) SetLanguageCode(v string) *AudioDescription

SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.

func (*AudioDescription) SetLanguageCodeControl 

func (s *AudioDescription) SetLanguageCodeControl(v string) *AudioDescription

SetLanguageCodeControl sets the LanguageCodeControl field's value.

func (*AudioDescription) SetRemixSettings 

func (s *AudioDescription) SetRemixSettings(v *RemixSettings) *AudioDescription

SetRemixSettings sets the RemixSettings field's value.

func (*AudioDescription) SetStreamName 

func (s *AudioDescription) SetStreamName(v string) *AudioDescription

SetStreamName sets the StreamName field's value.

func (AudioDescription) String 

func (s AudioDescription) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*AudioDescription) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *AudioDescription) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type AudioNormalizationSettings 

type AudioNormalizationSettings struct {

	// Choose one of the following audio normalization algorithms: ITU-R BS.1770-1:
	// Ungated loudness. A measurement of ungated average loudness for an entire
	// piece of content, suitable for measurement of short-form content under ATSC
	// recommendation A/85. Supports up to 5.1 audio channels. ITU-R BS.1770-2:
	// Gated loudness. A measurement of gated average loudness compliant with the
	// requirements of EBU-R128. Supports up to 5.1 audio channels. ITU-R BS.1770-3:
	// Modified peak. The same loudness measurement algorithm as 1770-2, with an
	// updated true peak measurement. ITU-R BS.1770-4: Higher channel count. Allows
	// for more audio channels than the other algorithms, including configurations
	// such as 7.1.
	Algorithm *string `locationName:"algorithm" type:"string" enum:"AudioNormalizationAlgorithm"`

	// When enabled the output audio is corrected using the chosen algorithm. If
	// disabled, the audio will be measured but not adjusted.
	AlgorithmControl *string `locationName:"algorithmControl" type:"string" enum:"AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControl"`

	// Content measuring above this level will be corrected to the target level.
	// Content measuring below this level will not be corrected. Gating only applies
	// when not using real_time_correction.
	CorrectionGateLevel *int64 `locationName:"correctionGateLevel" type:"integer"`

	// If set to LOG, log each output's audio track loudness to a CSV file.
	LoudnessLogging *string `locationName:"loudnessLogging" type:"string" enum:"AudioNormalizationLoudnessLogging"`

	// If set to TRUE_PEAK, calculate and log the TruePeak for each output's audio
	// track loudness.
	PeakCalculation *string `locationName:"peakCalculation" type:"string" enum:"AudioNormalizationPeakCalculation"`

	// When you use Audio normalization (AudioNormalizationSettings), optionally
	// use this setting to specify a target loudness. If you don't specify a value
	// here, the encoder chooses a value for you, based on the algorithm that you
	// choose for Algorithm (algorithm). If you choose algorithm 1770-1, the encoder
	// will choose -24 LKFS; otherwise, the encoder will choose -23 LKFS.
	TargetLkfs *float64 `locationName:"targetLkfs" type:"double"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Advanced audio normalization settings. Ignore these settings unless you need to comply with a loudness standard.

func (AudioNormalizationSettings) GoString 

func (s AudioNormalizationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AudioNormalizationSettings) SetAlgorithm 

func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetAlgorithm(v string) *AudioNormalizationSettings

SetAlgorithm sets the Algorithm field's value.

func (*AudioNormalizationSettings) SetAlgorithmControl 

func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetAlgorithmControl(v string) *AudioNormalizationSettings

SetAlgorithmControl sets the AlgorithmControl field's value.

func (*AudioNormalizationSettings) SetCorrectionGateLevel 

func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetCorrectionGateLevel(v int64) *AudioNormalizationSettings

SetCorrectionGateLevel sets the CorrectionGateLevel field's value.

func (*AudioNormalizationSettings) SetLoudnessLogging 

func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetLoudnessLogging(v string) *AudioNormalizationSettings

SetLoudnessLogging sets the LoudnessLogging field's value.

func (*AudioNormalizationSettings) SetPeakCalculation 

func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetPeakCalculation(v string) *AudioNormalizationSettings

SetPeakCalculation sets the PeakCalculation field's value.

func (*AudioNormalizationSettings) SetTargetLkfs 

func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetTargetLkfs(v float64) *AudioNormalizationSettings

SetTargetLkfs sets the TargetLkfs field's value.

func (AudioNormalizationSettings) String 

func (s AudioNormalizationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*AudioNormalizationSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type AudioSelector 

type AudioSelector struct {

	// Selects a specific language code from within an audio source, using the ISO
	// 639-2 or ISO 639-3 three-letter language code
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// Enable this setting on one audio selector to set it as the default for the
	// job. The service uses this default for outputs where it can't find the specified
	// input audio. If you don't set a default, those outputs have no audio.
	DefaultSelection *string `locationName:"defaultSelection" type:"string" enum:"AudioDefaultSelection"`

	// Specifies audio data from an external file source.
	ExternalAudioFileInput *string `locationName:"externalAudioFileInput" type:"string"`

	// Selects a specific language code from within an audio source.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Specifies a time delta in milliseconds to offset the audio from the input
	// video.
	Offset *int64 `locationName:"offset" type:"integer"`

	// Selects a specific PID from within an audio source (e.g. 257 selects PID
	// 0x101).
	Pids []*int64 `locationName:"pids" type:"list"`

	// Use this setting for input streams that contain Dolby E, to have the service
	// extract specific program data from the track. To select multiple programs,
	// create multiple selectors with the same Track and different Program numbers.
	// In the console, this setting is visible when you set Selector type to Track.
	// Choose the program number from the dropdown list. If you are sending a JSON
	// file, provide the program ID, which is part of the audio metadata. If your
	// input file has incorrect metadata, you can choose All channels instead of
	// a program number to have the service ignore the program IDs and include all
	// the programs in the track.
	ProgramSelection *int64 `locationName:"programSelection" type:"integer"`

	// Use these settings to reorder the audio channels of one input to match those
	// of another input. This allows you to combine the two files into a single
	// output, one after the other.
	RemixSettings *RemixSettings `locationName:"remixSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specifies the type of the audio selector.
	SelectorType *string `locationName:"selectorType" type:"string" enum:"AudioSelectorType"`

	// Identify a track from the input audio to include in this selector by entering
	// the track index number. To include several tracks in a single audio selector,
	// specify multiple tracks as follows. Using the console, enter a comma-separated
	// list. For examle, type "1,2,3" to include tracks 1 through 3. Specifying
	// directly in your JSON job file, provide the track numbers in an array. For
	// example, "tracks": [1,2,3].
	Tracks []*int64 `locationName:"tracks" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Selector for Audio

func (AudioSelector) GoString 

func (s AudioSelector) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AudioSelector) SetCustomLanguageCode added in v1.14.8 

func (s *AudioSelector) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *AudioSelector

SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.

func (*AudioSelector) SetDefaultSelection 

func (s *AudioSelector) SetDefaultSelection(v string) *AudioSelector

SetDefaultSelection sets the DefaultSelection field's value.

func (*AudioSelector) SetExternalAudioFileInput 

func (s *AudioSelector) SetExternalAudioFileInput(v string) *AudioSelector

SetExternalAudioFileInput sets the ExternalAudioFileInput field's value.

func (*AudioSelector) SetLanguageCode 

func (s *AudioSelector) SetLanguageCode(v string) *AudioSelector

SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.

func (*AudioSelector) SetOffset 

func (s *AudioSelector) SetOffset(v int64) *AudioSelector

SetOffset sets the Offset field's value.

func (*AudioSelector) SetPids 

func (s *AudioSelector) SetPids(v []*int64) *AudioSelector

SetPids sets the Pids field's value.

func (*AudioSelector) SetProgramSelection 

func (s *AudioSelector) SetProgramSelection(v int64) *AudioSelector

SetProgramSelection sets the ProgramSelection field's value.

func (*AudioSelector) SetRemixSettings 

func (s *AudioSelector) SetRemixSettings(v *RemixSettings) *AudioSelector

SetRemixSettings sets the RemixSettings field's value.

func (*AudioSelector) SetSelectorType 

func (s *AudioSelector) SetSelectorType(v string) *AudioSelector

SetSelectorType sets the SelectorType field's value.

func (*AudioSelector) SetTracks 

func (s *AudioSelector) SetTracks(v []*int64) *AudioSelector

SetTracks sets the Tracks field's value.

func (AudioSelector) String 

func (s AudioSelector) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*AudioSelector) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *AudioSelector) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type AudioSelectorGroup 

type AudioSelectorGroup struct {

	// Name of an Audio Selector within the same input to include in the group.
	// Audio selector names are standardized, based on their order within the input
	// (e.g., "Audio Selector 1"). The audio selector name parameter can be repeated
	// to add any number of audio selectors to the group.
	AudioSelectorNames []*string `locationName:"audioSelectorNames" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Group of Audio Selectors

func (AudioSelectorGroup) GoString 

func (s AudioSelectorGroup) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AudioSelectorGroup) SetAudioSelectorNames 

func (s *AudioSelectorGroup) SetAudioSelectorNames(v []*string) *AudioSelectorGroup

SetAudioSelectorNames sets the AudioSelectorNames field's value.

func (AudioSelectorGroup) String 

func (s AudioSelectorGroup) String() string

String returns the string representation

type AvailBlanking 

type AvailBlanking struct {

	// Blanking image to be used. Leave empty for solid black. Only bmp and png
	// images are supported.
	AvailBlankingImage *string `locationName:"availBlankingImage" min:"14" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for Avail Blanking

func (AvailBlanking) GoString 

func (s AvailBlanking) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*AvailBlanking) SetAvailBlankingImage 

func (s *AvailBlanking) SetAvailBlankingImage(v string) *AvailBlanking

SetAvailBlankingImage sets the AvailBlankingImage field's value.

func (AvailBlanking) String 

func (s AvailBlanking) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*AvailBlanking) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *AvailBlanking) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type BurninDestinationSettings 

type BurninDestinationSettings struct {

	// If no explicit x_position or y_position is provided, setting alignment to
	// centered will place the captions at the bottom center of the output. Similarly,
	// setting a left alignment will align captions to the bottom left of the output.
	// If x and y positions are given in conjunction with the alignment parameter,
	// the font will be justified (either left or centered) relative to those coordinates.
	// This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or
	// teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	Alignment *string `locationName:"alignment" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleAlignment"`

	// Specifies the color of the rectangle behind the captions.All burn-in and
	// DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	BackgroundColor *string `locationName:"backgroundColor" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleBackgroundColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the background rectangle. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent.
	// Leaving this parameter blank is equivalent to setting it to 0 (transparent).
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	BackgroundOpacity *int64 `locationName:"backgroundOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the color of the burned-in captions. This option is not valid for
	// source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings
	// are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font
	// settings must match.
	FontColor *string `locationName:"fontColor" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleFontColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the burned-in captions. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent.All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	FontOpacity *int64 `locationName:"fontOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Font resolution in DPI (dots per inch); default is 96 dpi.All burn-in and
	// DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	FontResolution *int64 `locationName:"fontResolution" min:"96" type:"integer"`

	// Provide the font script, using an ISO 15924 script code, if the LanguageCode
	// is not sufficient for determining the script type. Where LanguageCode or
	// CustomLanguageCode is sufficient, use "AUTOMATIC" or leave unset. This is
	// used to help determine the appropriate font for rendering burn-in captions.
	FontScript *string `locationName:"fontScript" type:"string" enum:"FontScript"`

	// A positive integer indicates the exact font size in points. Set to 0 for
	// automatic font size selection. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must
	// match.
	FontSize *int64 `locationName:"fontSize" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies font outline color. This option is not valid for source captions
	// that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already
	// pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings
	// must match.
	OutlineColor *string `locationName:"outlineColor" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleOutlineColor"`

	// Specifies font outline size in pixels. This option is not valid for source
	// captions that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings
	// are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font
	// settings must match.
	OutlineSize *int64 `locationName:"outlineSize" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the color of the shadow cast by the captions.All burn-in and DVB-Sub
	// font settings must match.
	ShadowColor *string `locationName:"shadowColor" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleShadowColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the shadow. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent. Leaving
	// this parameter blank is equivalent to setting it to 0 (transparent). All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowOpacity *int64 `locationName:"shadowOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the horizontal offset of the shadow relative to the captions in
	// pixels. A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels to the left.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowXOffset *int64 `locationName:"shadowXOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the vertical offset of the shadow relative to the captions in pixels.
	// A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels above the text. All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowYOffset *int64 `locationName:"shadowYOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Only applies to jobs with input captions in Teletext or STL formats. Specify
	// whether the spacing between letters in your captions is set by the captions
	// grid or varies depending on letter width. Choose fixed grid to conform to
	// the spacing specified in the captions file more accurately. Choose proportional
	// to make the text easier to read if the captions are closed caption.
	TeletextSpacing *string `locationName:"teletextSpacing" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacing"`

	// Specifies the horizontal position of the caption relative to the left side
	// of the output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting
	// 10 pixels from the left of the output. If no explicit x_position is provided,
	// the horizontal caption position will be determined by the alignment parameter.
	// This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or
	// teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	XPosition *int64 `locationName:"xPosition" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the vertical position of the caption relative to the top of the
	// output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting 10
	// pixels from the top of the output. If no explicit y_position is provided,
	// the caption will be positioned towards the bottom of the output. This option
	// is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext.
	// These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	YPosition *int64 `locationName:"yPosition" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Burn-In Destination Settings.

func (BurninDestinationSettings) GoString 

func (s BurninDestinationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetAlignment 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetAlignment(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetAlignment sets the Alignment field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundColor 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundColor(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetBackgroundColor sets the BackgroundColor field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundOpacity 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundOpacity(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetBackgroundOpacity sets the BackgroundOpacity field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontColor 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontColor(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetFontColor sets the FontColor field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontOpacity 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontOpacity(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetFontOpacity sets the FontOpacity field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontResolution 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontResolution(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetFontResolution sets the FontResolution field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontScript added in v1.99.0 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontScript(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetFontScript sets the FontScript field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontSize 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontSize(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetFontSize sets the FontSize field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetOutlineColor 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetOutlineColor(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetOutlineColor sets the OutlineColor field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetOutlineSize 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetOutlineSize(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetOutlineSize sets the OutlineSize field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowColor 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowColor(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetShadowColor sets the ShadowColor field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowOpacity 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowOpacity(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetShadowOpacity sets the ShadowOpacity field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowXOffset 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowXOffset(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetShadowXOffset sets the ShadowXOffset field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowYOffset 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowYOffset(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetShadowYOffset sets the ShadowYOffset field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetTeletextSpacing 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetTeletextSpacing(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetTeletextSpacing sets the TeletextSpacing field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetXPosition 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetXPosition(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetXPosition sets the XPosition field's value.

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) SetYPosition 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetYPosition(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings

SetYPosition sets the YPosition field's value.

func (BurninDestinationSettings) String 

func (s BurninDestinationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*BurninDestinationSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CancelJobInput 

type CancelJobInput struct {

	// The Job ID of the job to be cancelled.
	//
	// Id is a required field
	Id *string `location:"uri" locationName:"id" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Cancel a job by sending a request with the job ID

func (CancelJobInput) GoString 

func (s CancelJobInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CancelJobInput) SetId 

func (s *CancelJobInput) SetId(v string) *CancelJobInput

SetId sets the Id field's value.

func (CancelJobInput) String 

func (s CancelJobInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CancelJobInput) Validate 

func (s *CancelJobInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CancelJobOutput 

type CancelJobOutput struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

A cancel job request will receive a response with an empty body.

func (CancelJobOutput) GoString 

func (s CancelJobOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (CancelJobOutput) String 

func (s CancelJobOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type CaptionDescription 

type CaptionDescription struct {

	// Specifies which "Caption Selector":#inputs-caption_selector to use from each
	// input when generating captions. The name should be of the format "Caption
	// Selector ", which denotes that the Nth Caption Selector will be used from
	// each input.
	CaptionSelectorName *string `locationName:"captionSelectorName" min:"1" type:"string"`

	// Indicates the language of the caption output track, using the ISO 639-2 or
	// ISO 639-3 three-letter language code. For most captions output formats, the
	// encoder puts this language information in the output captions metadata. If
	// your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder uses this
	// language information to choose the font language for rendering the captions
	// text.
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// Specific settings required by destination type. Note that burnin_destination_settings
	// are not available if the source of the caption data is Embedded or Teletext.
	DestinationSettings *CaptionDestinationSettings `locationName:"destinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the language of this captions output track. For most captions output
	// formats, the encoder puts this language information in the output captions
	// metadata. If your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder
	// uses this language information to choose the font language for rendering
	// the captions text.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Human readable information to indicate captions available for players (eg.
	// English, or Spanish). Alphanumeric characters, spaces, and underscore are
	// legal.
	LanguageDescription *string `locationName:"languageDescription" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Description of Caption output

func (CaptionDescription) GoString 

func (s CaptionDescription) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CaptionDescription) SetCaptionSelectorName 

func (s *CaptionDescription) SetCaptionSelectorName(v string) *CaptionDescription

SetCaptionSelectorName sets the CaptionSelectorName field's value.

func (*CaptionDescription) SetCustomLanguageCode added in v1.14.8 

func (s *CaptionDescription) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionDescription

SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.

func (*CaptionDescription) SetDestinationSettings 

func (s *CaptionDescription) SetDestinationSettings(v *CaptionDestinationSettings) *CaptionDescription

SetDestinationSettings sets the DestinationSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionDescription) SetLanguageCode 

func (s *CaptionDescription) SetLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionDescription

SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.

func (*CaptionDescription) SetLanguageDescription 

func (s *CaptionDescription) SetLanguageDescription(v string) *CaptionDescription

SetLanguageDescription sets the LanguageDescription field's value.

func (CaptionDescription) String 

func (s CaptionDescription) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CaptionDescription) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CaptionDescription) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CaptionDescriptionPreset 

type CaptionDescriptionPreset struct {

	// Indicates the language of the caption output track, using the ISO 639-2 or
	// ISO 639-3 three-letter language code. For most captions output formats, the
	// encoder puts this language information in the output captions metadata. If
	// your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder uses this
	// language information to choose the font language for rendering the captions
	// text.
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// Specific settings required by destination type. Note that burnin_destination_settings
	// are not available if the source of the caption data is Embedded or Teletext.
	DestinationSettings *CaptionDestinationSettings `locationName:"destinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the language of this captions output track. For most captions output
	// formats, the encoder puts this language information in the output captions
	// metadata. If your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder
	// uses this language information to choose the font language for rendering
	// the captions text.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Human readable information to indicate captions available for players (eg.
	// English, or Spanish). Alphanumeric characters, spaces, and underscore are
	// legal.
	LanguageDescription *string `locationName:"languageDescription" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Caption Description for preset

func (CaptionDescriptionPreset) GoString 

func (s CaptionDescriptionPreset) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetCustomLanguageCode added in v1.14.8 

func (s *CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionDescriptionPreset

SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.

func (*CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetDestinationSettings 

func (s *CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetDestinationSettings(v *CaptionDestinationSettings) *CaptionDescriptionPreset

SetDestinationSettings sets the DestinationSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetLanguageCode 

func (s *CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionDescriptionPreset

SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.

func (*CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetLanguageDescription 

func (s *CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetLanguageDescription(v string) *CaptionDescriptionPreset

SetLanguageDescription sets the LanguageDescription field's value.

func (CaptionDescriptionPreset) String 

func (s CaptionDescriptionPreset) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CaptionDescriptionPreset) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CaptionDescriptionPreset) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CaptionDestinationSettings 

type CaptionDestinationSettings struct {

	// Burn-In Destination Settings.
	BurninDestinationSettings *BurninDestinationSettings `locationName:"burninDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the format for this set of captions on this output. The default format
	// is embedded without SCTE-20. Other options are embedded with SCTE-20, burn-in,
	// DVB-sub, SCC, SRT, teletext, TTML, and web-VTT. If you are using SCTE-20,
	// choose SCTE-20 plus embedded (SCTE20_PLUS_EMBEDDED) to create an output that
	// complies with the SCTE-43 spec. To create a non-compliant output where the
	// embedded captions come first, choose Embedded plus SCTE-20 (EMBEDDED_PLUS_SCTE20).
	DestinationType *string `locationName:"destinationType" type:"string" enum:"CaptionDestinationType"`

	// DVB-Sub Destination Settings
	DvbSubDestinationSettings *DvbSubDestinationSettings `locationName:"dvbSubDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings specific to embedded/ancillary caption outputs, including 608/708
	// Channel destination number.
	EmbeddedDestinationSettings *EmbeddedDestinationSettings `locationName:"embeddedDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for SCC caption output.
	SccDestinationSettings *SccDestinationSettings `locationName:"sccDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for Teletext caption output
	TeletextDestinationSettings *TeletextDestinationSettings `locationName:"teletextDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings specific to TTML caption outputs, including Pass style information
	// (TtmlStylePassthrough).
	TtmlDestinationSettings *TtmlDestinationSettings `locationName:"ttmlDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Specific settings required by destination type. Note that burnin_destination_settings are not available if the source of the caption data is Embedded or Teletext.

func (CaptionDestinationSettings) GoString 

func (s CaptionDestinationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CaptionDestinationSettings) SetBurninDestinationSettings 

func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetBurninDestinationSettings(v *BurninDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings

SetBurninDestinationSettings sets the BurninDestinationSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionDestinationSettings) SetDestinationType 

func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetDestinationType(v string) *CaptionDestinationSettings

SetDestinationType sets the DestinationType field's value.

func (*CaptionDestinationSettings) SetDvbSubDestinationSettings 

func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetDvbSubDestinationSettings(v *DvbSubDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings

SetDvbSubDestinationSettings sets the DvbSubDestinationSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionDestinationSettings) SetEmbeddedDestinationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetEmbeddedDestinationSettings(v *EmbeddedDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings

SetEmbeddedDestinationSettings sets the EmbeddedDestinationSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionDestinationSettings) SetSccDestinationSettings 

func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetSccDestinationSettings(v *SccDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings

SetSccDestinationSettings sets the SccDestinationSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionDestinationSettings) SetTeletextDestinationSettings 

func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetTeletextDestinationSettings(v *TeletextDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings

SetTeletextDestinationSettings sets the TeletextDestinationSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionDestinationSettings) SetTtmlDestinationSettings 

func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetTtmlDestinationSettings(v *TtmlDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings

SetTtmlDestinationSettings sets the TtmlDestinationSettings field's value.

func (CaptionDestinationSettings) String 

func (s CaptionDestinationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CaptionDestinationSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CaptionSelector 

type CaptionSelector struct {

	// The specific language to extract from source, using the ISO 639-2 or ISO
	// 639-3 three-letter language code. If input is SCTE-27, complete this field
	// and/or PID to select the caption language to extract. If input is DVB-Sub
	// and output is Burn-in or SMPTE-TT, complete this field and/or PID to select
	// the caption language to extract. If input is DVB-Sub that is being passed
	// through, omit this field (and PID field); there is no way to extract a specific
	// language with pass-through captions.
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// The specific language to extract from source. If input is SCTE-27, complete
	// this field and/or PID to select the caption language to extract. If input
	// is DVB-Sub and output is Burn-in or SMPTE-TT, complete this field and/or
	// PID to select the caption language to extract. If input is DVB-Sub that is
	// being passed through, omit this field (and PID field); there is no way to
	// extract a specific language with pass-through captions.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Source settings (SourceSettings) contains the group of settings for captions
	// in the input.
	SourceSettings *CaptionSourceSettings `locationName:"sourceSettings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Set up captions in your outputs by first selecting them from your input here.

func (CaptionSelector) GoString 

func (s CaptionSelector) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CaptionSelector) SetCustomLanguageCode added in v1.14.8 

func (s *CaptionSelector) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionSelector

SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.

func (*CaptionSelector) SetLanguageCode 

func (s *CaptionSelector) SetLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionSelector

SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.

func (*CaptionSelector) SetSourceSettings 

func (s *CaptionSelector) SetSourceSettings(v *CaptionSourceSettings) *CaptionSelector

SetSourceSettings sets the SourceSettings field's value.

func (CaptionSelector) String 

func (s CaptionSelector) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CaptionSelector) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CaptionSelector) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CaptionSourceSettings 

type CaptionSourceSettings struct {

	// Settings for ancillary captions source.
	AncillarySourceSettings *AncillarySourceSettings `locationName:"ancillarySourceSettings" type:"structure"`

	// DVB Sub Source Settings
	DvbSubSourceSettings *DvbSubSourceSettings `locationName:"dvbSubSourceSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for embedded captions Source
	EmbeddedSourceSettings *EmbeddedSourceSettings `locationName:"embeddedSourceSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for File-based Captions in Source
	FileSourceSettings *FileSourceSettings `locationName:"fileSourceSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Use Source (SourceType) to identify the format of your input captions. The
	// service cannot auto-detect caption format.
	SourceType *string `locationName:"sourceType" type:"string" enum:"CaptionSourceType"`

	// Settings specific to Teletext caption sources, including Page number.
	TeletextSourceSettings *TeletextSourceSettings `locationName:"teletextSourceSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings specific to caption sources that are specfied by track number. Sources
	// include IMSC in IMF.
	TrackSourceSettings *TrackSourceSettings `locationName:"trackSourceSettings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Source settings (SourceSettings) contains the group of settings for captions in the input.

func (CaptionSourceSettings) GoString 

func (s CaptionSourceSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CaptionSourceSettings) SetAncillarySourceSettings 

func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetAncillarySourceSettings(v *AncillarySourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings

SetAncillarySourceSettings sets the AncillarySourceSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionSourceSettings) SetDvbSubSourceSettings 

func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetDvbSubSourceSettings(v *DvbSubSourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings

SetDvbSubSourceSettings sets the DvbSubSourceSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionSourceSettings) SetEmbeddedSourceSettings 

func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetEmbeddedSourceSettings(v *EmbeddedSourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings

SetEmbeddedSourceSettings sets the EmbeddedSourceSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionSourceSettings) SetFileSourceSettings 

func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetFileSourceSettings(v *FileSourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings

SetFileSourceSettings sets the FileSourceSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionSourceSettings) SetSourceType 

func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetSourceType(v string) *CaptionSourceSettings

SetSourceType sets the SourceType field's value.

func (*CaptionSourceSettings) SetTeletextSourceSettings 

func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetTeletextSourceSettings(v *TeletextSourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings

SetTeletextSourceSettings sets the TeletextSourceSettings field's value.

func (*CaptionSourceSettings) SetTrackSourceSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetTrackSourceSettings(v *TrackSourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings

SetTrackSourceSettings sets the TrackSourceSettings field's value.

func (CaptionSourceSettings) String 

func (s CaptionSourceSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CaptionSourceSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ChannelMapping 

type ChannelMapping struct {

	// List of output channels
	OutputChannels []*OutputChannelMapping `locationName:"outputChannels" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Channel mapping (ChannelMapping) contains the group of fields that hold the remixing value for each channel. Units are in dB. Acceptable values are within the range from -60 (mute) through 6. A setting of 0 passes the input channel unchanged to the output channel (no attenuation or amplification).

func (ChannelMapping) GoString 

func (s ChannelMapping) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ChannelMapping) SetOutputChannels 

func (s *ChannelMapping) SetOutputChannels(v []*OutputChannelMapping) *ChannelMapping

SetOutputChannels sets the OutputChannels field's value.

func (ChannelMapping) String 

func (s ChannelMapping) String() string

String returns the string representation

type CmafEncryptionSettings added in v1.14.0 

type CmafEncryptionSettings struct {

	// This is a 128-bit, 16-byte hex value represented by a 32-character text string.
	// If this parameter is not set then the Initialization Vector will follow the
	// segment number by default.
	ConstantInitializationVector *string `locationName:"constantInitializationVector" min:"32" type:"string"`

	// Encrypts the segments with the given encryption scheme. Leave blank to disable.
	// Selecting 'Disabled' in the web interface also disables encryption.
	EncryptionMethod *string `locationName:"encryptionMethod" type:"string" enum:"CmafEncryptionType"`

	// The Initialization Vector is a 128-bit number used in conjunction with the
	// key for encrypting blocks. If set to INCLUDE, Initialization Vector is listed
	// in the manifest. Otherwise Initialization Vector is not in the manifest.
	InitializationVectorInManifest *string `locationName:"initializationVectorInManifest" type:"string" enum:"CmafInitializationVectorInManifest"`

	// Use these settings to set up encryption with a static key provider.
	StaticKeyProvider *StaticKeyProvider `locationName:"staticKeyProvider" type:"structure"`

	// Indicates which type of key provider is used for encryption.
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"CmafKeyProviderType"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for CMAF encryption

func (CmafEncryptionSettings) GoString added in v1.14.0 

func (s CmafEncryptionSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CmafEncryptionSettings) SetConstantInitializationVector added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) SetConstantInitializationVector(v string) *CmafEncryptionSettings

SetConstantInitializationVector sets the ConstantInitializationVector field's value.

func (*CmafEncryptionSettings) SetEncryptionMethod added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) SetEncryptionMethod(v string) *CmafEncryptionSettings

SetEncryptionMethod sets the EncryptionMethod field's value.

func (*CmafEncryptionSettings) SetInitializationVectorInManifest added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) SetInitializationVectorInManifest(v string) *CmafEncryptionSettings

SetInitializationVectorInManifest sets the InitializationVectorInManifest field's value.

func (*CmafEncryptionSettings) SetStaticKeyProvider added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) SetStaticKeyProvider(v *StaticKeyProvider) *CmafEncryptionSettings

SetStaticKeyProvider sets the StaticKeyProvider field's value.

func (*CmafEncryptionSettings) SetType added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) SetType(v string) *CmafEncryptionSettings

SetType sets the Type field's value.

func (CmafEncryptionSettings) String added in v1.14.0 

func (s CmafEncryptionSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CmafEncryptionSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CmafGroupSettings added in v1.14.0 

type CmafGroupSettings struct {

	// A partial URI prefix that will be put in the manifest file at the top level
	// BaseURL element. Can be used if streams are delivered from a different URL
	// than the manifest file.
	BaseUrl *string `locationName:"baseUrl" type:"string"`

	// When set to ENABLED, sets #EXT-X-ALLOW-CACHE:no tag, which prevents client
	// from saving media segments for later replay.
	ClientCache *string `locationName:"clientCache" type:"string" enum:"CmafClientCache"`

	// Specification to use (RFC-6381 or the default RFC-4281) during m3u8 playlist
	// generation.
	CodecSpecification *string `locationName:"codecSpecification" type:"string" enum:"CmafCodecSpecification"`

	// Use Destination (Destination) to specify the S3 output location and the output
	// filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify
	// the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input
	// file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the
	// first input file.
	Destination *string `locationName:"destination" type:"string"`

	// Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of
	// destination
	DestinationSettings *DestinationSettings `locationName:"destinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// DRM settings.
	Encryption *CmafEncryptionSettings `locationName:"encryption" type:"structure"`

	// Length of fragments to generate (in seconds). Fragment length must be compatible
	// with GOP size and Framerate. Note that fragments will end on the next keyframe
	// after this number of seconds, so actual fragment length may be longer. When
	// Emit Single File is checked, the fragmentation is internal to a single output
	// file and it does not cause the creation of many output files as in other
	// output types.
	FragmentLength *int64 `locationName:"fragmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// When set to GZIP, compresses HLS playlist.
	ManifestCompression *string `locationName:"manifestCompression" type:"string" enum:"CmafManifestCompression"`

	// Indicates whether the output manifest should use floating point values for
	// segment duration.
	ManifestDurationFormat *string `locationName:"manifestDurationFormat" type:"string" enum:"CmafManifestDurationFormat"`

	// Minimum time of initially buffered media that is needed to ensure smooth
	// playout.
	MinBufferTime *int64 `locationName:"minBufferTime" type:"integer"`

	// Keep this setting at the default value of 0, unless you are troubleshooting
	// a problem with how devices play back the end of your video asset. If you
	// know that player devices are hanging on the final segment of your video because
	// the length of your final segment is too short, use this setting to specify
	// a minimum final segment length, in seconds. Choose a value that is greater
	// than or equal to 1 and less than your segment length. When you specify a
	// value for this setting, the encoder will combine any final segment that is
	// shorter than the length that you specify with the previous segment. For example,
	// your segment length is 3 seconds and your final segment is .5 seconds without
	// a minimum final segment length; when you set the minimum final segment length
	// to 1, your final segment is 3.5 seconds.
	MinFinalSegmentLength *float64 `locationName:"minFinalSegmentLength" type:"double"`

	// When set to SINGLE_FILE, a single output file is generated, which is internally
	// segmented using the Fragment Length and Segment Length. When set to SEGMENTED_FILES,
	// separate segment files will be created.
	SegmentControl *string `locationName:"segmentControl" type:"string" enum:"CmafSegmentControl"`

	// Use this setting to specify the length, in seconds, of each individual CMAF
	// segment. This value applies to the whole package; that is, to every output
	// in the output group. Note that segments end on the first keyframe after this
	// number of seconds, so the actual segment length might be slightly longer.
	// If you set Segment control (CmafSegmentControl) to single file, the service
	// puts the content of each output in a single file that has metadata that marks
	// these segments. If you set it to segmented files, the service creates multiple
	// files for each output, each with the content of one segment.
	SegmentLength *int64 `locationName:"segmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Include or exclude RESOLUTION attribute for video in EXT-X-STREAM-INF tag
	// of variant manifest.
	StreamInfResolution *string `locationName:"streamInfResolution" type:"string" enum:"CmafStreamInfResolution"`

	// When set to ENABLED, a DASH MPD manifest will be generated for this output.
	WriteDashManifest *string `locationName:"writeDashManifest" type:"string" enum:"CmafWriteDASHManifest"`

	// When set to ENABLED, an Apple HLS manifest will be generated for this output.
	WriteHlsManifest *string `locationName:"writeHlsManifest" type:"string" enum:"CmafWriteHLSManifest"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to CMAF_GROUP_SETTINGS. Each output in a CMAF Output Group may only contain a single video, audio, or caption output.

func (CmafGroupSettings) GoString added in v1.14.0 

func (s CmafGroupSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetBaseUrl added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetBaseUrl(v string) *CmafGroupSettings

SetBaseUrl sets the BaseUrl field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetClientCache added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetClientCache(v string) *CmafGroupSettings

SetClientCache sets the ClientCache field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetCodecSpecification added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetCodecSpecification(v string) *CmafGroupSettings

SetCodecSpecification sets the CodecSpecification field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetDestination added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetDestination(v string) *CmafGroupSettings

SetDestination sets the Destination field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetDestinationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetDestinationSettings(v *DestinationSettings) *CmafGroupSettings

SetDestinationSettings sets the DestinationSettings field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetEncryption added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetEncryption(v *CmafEncryptionSettings) *CmafGroupSettings

SetEncryption sets the Encryption field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetFragmentLength added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetFragmentLength(v int64) *CmafGroupSettings

SetFragmentLength sets the FragmentLength field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetManifestCompression added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetManifestCompression(v string) *CmafGroupSettings

SetManifestCompression sets the ManifestCompression field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetManifestDurationFormat added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetManifestDurationFormat(v string) *CmafGroupSettings

SetManifestDurationFormat sets the ManifestDurationFormat field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetMinBufferTime added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetMinBufferTime(v int64) *CmafGroupSettings

SetMinBufferTime sets the MinBufferTime field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetMinFinalSegmentLength added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetMinFinalSegmentLength(v float64) *CmafGroupSettings

SetMinFinalSegmentLength sets the MinFinalSegmentLength field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetSegmentControl added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetSegmentControl(v string) *CmafGroupSettings

SetSegmentControl sets the SegmentControl field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetSegmentLength added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetSegmentLength(v int64) *CmafGroupSettings

SetSegmentLength sets the SegmentLength field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetStreamInfResolution added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetStreamInfResolution(v string) *CmafGroupSettings

SetStreamInfResolution sets the StreamInfResolution field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetWriteDashManifest added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetWriteDashManifest(v string) *CmafGroupSettings

SetWriteDashManifest sets the WriteDashManifest field's value.

func (*CmafGroupSettings) SetWriteHlsManifest added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetWriteHlsManifest(v string) *CmafGroupSettings

SetWriteHlsManifest sets the WriteHlsManifest field's value.

func (CmafGroupSettings) String added in v1.14.0 

func (s CmafGroupSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CmafGroupSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CmafGroupSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ColorCorrector 

type ColorCorrector struct {

	// Brightness level.
	Brightness *int64 `locationName:"brightness" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Determines if colorspace conversion will be performed. If set to _None_,
	// no conversion will be performed. If _Force 601_ or _Force 709_ are selected,
	// conversion will be performed for inputs with differing colorspaces. An input's
	// colorspace can be specified explicitly in the "Video Selector":#inputs-video_selector
	// if necessary.
	ColorSpaceConversion *string `locationName:"colorSpaceConversion" type:"string" enum:"ColorSpaceConversion"`

	// Contrast level.
	Contrast *int64 `locationName:"contrast" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use the HDR master display (Hdr10Metadata) settings to correct HDR metadata
	// or to provide missing metadata. Note that these settings are not color correction.
	Hdr10Metadata *Hdr10Metadata `locationName:"hdr10Metadata" type:"structure"`

	// Hue in degrees.
	Hue *int64 `locationName:"hue" type:"integer"`

	// Saturation level.
	Saturation *int64 `locationName:"saturation" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for color correction.

func (ColorCorrector) GoString 

func (s ColorCorrector) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ColorCorrector) SetBrightness 

func (s *ColorCorrector) SetBrightness(v int64) *ColorCorrector

SetBrightness sets the Brightness field's value.

func (*ColorCorrector) SetColorSpaceConversion 

func (s *ColorCorrector) SetColorSpaceConversion(v string) *ColorCorrector

SetColorSpaceConversion sets the ColorSpaceConversion field's value.

func (*ColorCorrector) SetContrast 

func (s *ColorCorrector) SetContrast(v int64) *ColorCorrector

SetContrast sets the Contrast field's value.

func (*ColorCorrector) SetHdr10Metadata 

func (s *ColorCorrector) SetHdr10Metadata(v *Hdr10Metadata) *ColorCorrector

SetHdr10Metadata sets the Hdr10Metadata field's value.

func (*ColorCorrector) SetHue 

func (s *ColorCorrector) SetHue(v int64) *ColorCorrector

SetHue sets the Hue field's value.

func (*ColorCorrector) SetSaturation 

func (s *ColorCorrector) SetSaturation(v int64) *ColorCorrector

SetSaturation sets the Saturation field's value.

func (ColorCorrector) String 

func (s ColorCorrector) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*ColorCorrector) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *ColorCorrector) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ContainerSettings 

type ContainerSettings struct {

	// Container for this output. Some containers require a container settings object.
	// If not specified, the default object will be created.
	Container *string `locationName:"container" type:"string" enum:"ContainerType"`

	// Settings for F4v container
	F4vSettings *F4vSettings `locationName:"f4vSettings" type:"structure"`

	// MPEG-2 TS container settings. These apply to outputs in a File output group
	// when the output's container (ContainerType) is MPEG-2 Transport Stream (M2TS).
	// In these assets, data is organized by the program map table (PMT). Each transport
	// stream program contains subsets of data, including audio, video, and metadata.
	// Each of these subsets of data has a numerical label called a packet identifier
	// (PID). Each transport stream program corresponds to one MediaConvert output.
	// The PMT lists the types of data in a program along with their PID. Downstream
	// systems and players use the program map table to look up the PID for each
	// type of data it accesses and then uses the PIDs to locate specific data within
	// the asset.
	M2tsSettings *M2tsSettings `locationName:"m2tsSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for TS segments in HLS
	M3u8Settings *M3u8Settings `locationName:"m3u8Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for MOV Container.
	MovSettings *MovSettings `locationName:"movSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for MP4 container. You can create audio-only AAC outputs with this
	// container.
	Mp4Settings *Mp4Settings `locationName:"mp4Settings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Container specific settings.

func (ContainerSettings) GoString 

func (s ContainerSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ContainerSettings) SetContainer 

func (s *ContainerSettings) SetContainer(v string) *ContainerSettings

SetContainer sets the Container field's value.

func (*ContainerSettings) SetF4vSettings 

func (s *ContainerSettings) SetF4vSettings(v *F4vSettings) *ContainerSettings

SetF4vSettings sets the F4vSettings field's value.

func (*ContainerSettings) SetM2tsSettings 

func (s *ContainerSettings) SetM2tsSettings(v *M2tsSettings) *ContainerSettings

SetM2tsSettings sets the M2tsSettings field's value.

func (*ContainerSettings) SetM3u8Settings 

func (s *ContainerSettings) SetM3u8Settings(v *M3u8Settings) *ContainerSettings

SetM3u8Settings sets the M3u8Settings field's value.

func (*ContainerSettings) SetMovSettings 

func (s *ContainerSettings) SetMovSettings(v *MovSettings) *ContainerSettings

SetMovSettings sets the MovSettings field's value.

func (*ContainerSettings) SetMp4Settings 

func (s *ContainerSettings) SetMp4Settings(v *Mp4Settings) *ContainerSettings

SetMp4Settings sets the Mp4Settings field's value.

func (ContainerSettings) String 

func (s ContainerSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*ContainerSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *ContainerSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CreateJobInput 

type CreateJobInput struct {

	// Accelerated transcoding can significantly speed up jobs with long, visually
	// complex content. Outputs that use this feature incur pro-tier pricing. For
	// information about feature limitations, see the AWS Elemental MediaConvert
	// User Guide.
	AccelerationSettings *AccelerationSettings `locationName:"accelerationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Optional. Choose a tag type that AWS Billing and Cost Management will use
	// to sort your AWS Elemental MediaConvert costs on any billing report that
	// you set up. Any transcoding outputs that don't have an associated tag will
	// appear in your billing report unsorted. If you don't choose a valid value
	// for this field, your job outputs will appear on the billing report unsorted.
	BillingTagsSource *string `locationName:"billingTagsSource" type:"string" enum:"BillingTagsSource"`

	// Idempotency token for CreateJob operation.
	ClientRequestToken *string `locationName:"clientRequestToken" type:"string" idempotencyToken:"true"`

	// When you create a job, you can either specify a job template or specify the
	// transcoding settings individually
	JobTemplate *string `locationName:"jobTemplate" type:"string"`

	// Optional. When you create a job, you can specify a queue to send it to. If
	// you don't specify, the job will go to the default queue. For more about queues,
	// see the User Guide topic at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html.
	Queue *string `locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// Required. The IAM role you use for creating this job. For details about permissions,
	// see the User Guide topic at the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/iam-role.html.
	//
	// Role is a required field
	Role *string `locationName:"role" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// JobSettings contains all the transcode settings for a job.
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *JobSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch
	// Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert
	// sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing
	// your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.
	StatusUpdateInterval *string `locationName:"statusUpdateInterval" type:"string" enum:"StatusUpdateInterval"`

	// User-defined metadata that you want to associate with an MediaConvert job.
	// You specify metadata in key/value pairs.
	UserMetadata map[string]*string `locationName:"userMetadata" type:"map"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Send your create job request with your job settings and IAM role. Optionally, include user metadata and the ARN for the queue.

func (CreateJobInput) GoString 

func (s CreateJobInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CreateJobInput) SetAccelerationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CreateJobInput) SetAccelerationSettings(v *AccelerationSettings) *CreateJobInput

SetAccelerationSettings sets the AccelerationSettings field's value.

func (*CreateJobInput) SetBillingTagsSource added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CreateJobInput) SetBillingTagsSource(v string) *CreateJobInput

SetBillingTagsSource sets the BillingTagsSource field's value.

func (*CreateJobInput) SetClientRequestToken 

func (s *CreateJobInput) SetClientRequestToken(v string) *CreateJobInput

SetClientRequestToken sets the ClientRequestToken field's value.

func (*CreateJobInput) SetJobTemplate 

func (s *CreateJobInput) SetJobTemplate(v string) *CreateJobInput

SetJobTemplate sets the JobTemplate field's value.

func (*CreateJobInput) SetQueue 

func (s *CreateJobInput) SetQueue(v string) *CreateJobInput

SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.

func (*CreateJobInput) SetRole 

func (s *CreateJobInput) SetRole(v string) *CreateJobInput

SetRole sets the Role field's value.

func (*CreateJobInput) SetSettings 

func (s *CreateJobInput) SetSettings(v *JobSettings) *CreateJobInput

SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.

func (*CreateJobInput) SetStatusUpdateInterval added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CreateJobInput) SetStatusUpdateInterval(v string) *CreateJobInput

SetStatusUpdateInterval sets the StatusUpdateInterval field's value.

func (*CreateJobInput) SetUserMetadata 

func (s *CreateJobInput) SetUserMetadata(v map[string]*string) *CreateJobInput

SetUserMetadata sets the UserMetadata field's value.

func (CreateJobInput) String 

func (s CreateJobInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CreateJobInput) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CreateJobInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CreateJobOutput 

type CreateJobOutput struct {

	// Each job converts an input file into an output file or files. For more information,
	// see the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html
	Job *Job `locationName:"job" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful create job requests will return the job JSON.

func (CreateJobOutput) GoString 

func (s CreateJobOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CreateJobOutput) SetJob 

func (s *CreateJobOutput) SetJob(v *Job) *CreateJobOutput

SetJob sets the Job field's value.

func (CreateJobOutput) String 

func (s CreateJobOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type CreateJobTemplateInput 

type CreateJobTemplateInput struct {

	// Accelerated transcoding can significantly speed up jobs with long, visually
	// complex content. Outputs that use this feature incur pro-tier pricing. For
	// information about feature limitations, see the AWS Elemental MediaConvert
	// User Guide.
	AccelerationSettings *AccelerationSettings `locationName:"accelerationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Optional. A category for the job template you are creating
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// Optional. A description of the job template you are creating.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the job template you are creating.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Optional. The queue that jobs created from this template are assigned to.
	// If you don't specify this, jobs will go to the default queue.
	Queue *string `locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// JobTemplateSettings contains all the transcode settings saved in the template
	// that will be applied to jobs created from it.
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *JobTemplateSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch
	// Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert
	// sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing
	// your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.
	StatusUpdateInterval *string `locationName:"statusUpdateInterval" type:"string" enum:"StatusUpdateInterval"`

	// The tags that you want to add to the resource. You can tag resources with
	// a key-value pair or with only a key.
	Tags map[string]*string `locationName:"tags" type:"map"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Send your create job template request with the name of the template and the JSON for the template. The template JSON should include everything in a valid job, except for input location and filename, IAM role, and user metadata.

func (CreateJobTemplateInput) GoString 

func (s CreateJobTemplateInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CreateJobTemplateInput) SetAccelerationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetAccelerationSettings(v *AccelerationSettings) *CreateJobTemplateInput

SetAccelerationSettings sets the AccelerationSettings field's value.

func (*CreateJobTemplateInput) SetCategory 

func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetCategory(v string) *CreateJobTemplateInput

SetCategory sets the Category field's value.

func (*CreateJobTemplateInput) SetDescription 

func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetDescription(v string) *CreateJobTemplateInput

SetDescription sets the Description field's value.

func (*CreateJobTemplateInput) SetName 

func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetName(v string) *CreateJobTemplateInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (*CreateJobTemplateInput) SetQueue 

func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetQueue(v string) *CreateJobTemplateInput

SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.

func (*CreateJobTemplateInput) SetSettings 

func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetSettings(v *JobTemplateSettings) *CreateJobTemplateInput

SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.

func (*CreateJobTemplateInput) SetStatusUpdateInterval added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetStatusUpdateInterval(v string) *CreateJobTemplateInput

SetStatusUpdateInterval sets the StatusUpdateInterval field's value.

func (*CreateJobTemplateInput) SetTags added in v1.14.21 

func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetTags(v map[string]*string) *CreateJobTemplateInput

SetTags sets the Tags field's value.

func (CreateJobTemplateInput) String 

func (s CreateJobTemplateInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CreateJobTemplateInput) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CreateJobTemplateOutput 

type CreateJobTemplateOutput struct {

	// A job template is a pre-made set of encoding instructions that you can use
	// to quickly create a job.
	JobTemplate *JobTemplate `locationName:"jobTemplate" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful create job template requests will return the template JSON.

func (CreateJobTemplateOutput) GoString 

func (s CreateJobTemplateOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CreateJobTemplateOutput) SetJobTemplate 

func (s *CreateJobTemplateOutput) SetJobTemplate(v *JobTemplate) *CreateJobTemplateOutput

SetJobTemplate sets the JobTemplate field's value.

func (CreateJobTemplateOutput) String 

func (s CreateJobTemplateOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type CreatePresetInput 

type CreatePresetInput struct {

	// Optional. A category for the preset you are creating.
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// Optional. A description of the preset you are creating.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the preset you are creating.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Settings for preset
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *PresetSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// The tags that you want to add to the resource. You can tag resources with
	// a key-value pair or with only a key.
	Tags map[string]*string `locationName:"tags" type:"map"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Send your create preset request with the name of the preset and the JSON for the output settings specified by the preset.

func (CreatePresetInput) GoString 

func (s CreatePresetInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CreatePresetInput) SetCategory 

func (s *CreatePresetInput) SetCategory(v string) *CreatePresetInput

SetCategory sets the Category field's value.

func (*CreatePresetInput) SetDescription 

func (s *CreatePresetInput) SetDescription(v string) *CreatePresetInput

SetDescription sets the Description field's value.

func (*CreatePresetInput) SetName 

func (s *CreatePresetInput) SetName(v string) *CreatePresetInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (*CreatePresetInput) SetSettings 

func (s *CreatePresetInput) SetSettings(v *PresetSettings) *CreatePresetInput

SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.

func (*CreatePresetInput) SetTags added in v1.14.21 

func (s *CreatePresetInput) SetTags(v map[string]*string) *CreatePresetInput

SetTags sets the Tags field's value.

func (CreatePresetInput) String 

func (s CreatePresetInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CreatePresetInput) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CreatePresetInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CreatePresetOutput 

type CreatePresetOutput struct {

	// A preset is a collection of preconfigured media conversion settings that
	// you want MediaConvert to apply to the output during the conversion process.
	Preset *Preset `locationName:"preset" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful create preset requests will return the preset JSON.

func (CreatePresetOutput) GoString 

func (s CreatePresetOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CreatePresetOutput) SetPreset 

func (s *CreatePresetOutput) SetPreset(v *Preset) *CreatePresetOutput

SetPreset sets the Preset field's value.

func (CreatePresetOutput) String 

func (s CreatePresetOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type CreateQueueInput 

type CreateQueueInput struct {

	// Optional. A description of the queue that you are creating.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the queue that you are creating.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Specifies whether the pricing plan for the queue is on-demand or reserved.
	// For on-demand, you pay per minute, billed in increments of .01 minute. For
	// reserved, you pay for the transcoding capacity of the entire queue, regardless
	// of how much or how little you use it. Reserved pricing requires a 12-month
	// commitment. When you use the API to create a queue, the default is on-demand.
	PricingPlan *string `locationName:"pricingPlan" type:"string" enum:"PricingPlan"`

	// Details about the pricing plan for your reserved queue. Required for reserved
	// queues and not applicable to on-demand queues.
	ReservationPlanSettings *ReservationPlanSettings `locationName:"reservationPlanSettings" type:"structure"`

	// The tags that you want to add to the resource. You can tag resources with
	// a key-value pair or with only a key.
	Tags map[string]*string `locationName:"tags" type:"map"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Create an on-demand queue by sending a CreateQueue request with the name of the queue. Create a reserved queue by sending a CreateQueue request with the pricing plan set to RESERVED and with values specified for the settings under reservationPlanSettings. When you create a reserved queue, you enter into a 12-month commitment to purchase the RTS that you specify. You can't cancel this commitment.

func (CreateQueueInput) GoString 

func (s CreateQueueInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CreateQueueInput) SetDescription 

func (s *CreateQueueInput) SetDescription(v string) *CreateQueueInput

SetDescription sets the Description field's value.

func (*CreateQueueInput) SetName 

func (s *CreateQueueInput) SetName(v string) *CreateQueueInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (*CreateQueueInput) SetPricingPlan added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CreateQueueInput) SetPricingPlan(v string) *CreateQueueInput

SetPricingPlan sets the PricingPlan field's value.

func (*CreateQueueInput) SetReservationPlanSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *CreateQueueInput) SetReservationPlanSettings(v *ReservationPlanSettings) *CreateQueueInput

SetReservationPlanSettings sets the ReservationPlanSettings field's value.

func (*CreateQueueInput) SetTags added in v1.14.21 

func (s *CreateQueueInput) SetTags(v map[string]*string) *CreateQueueInput

SetTags sets the Tags field's value.

func (CreateQueueInput) String 

func (s CreateQueueInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*CreateQueueInput) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *CreateQueueInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type CreateQueueOutput 

type CreateQueueOutput struct {

	// You can use queues to manage the resources that are available to your AWS
	// account for running multiple transcoding jobs at the same time. If you don't
	// specify a queue, the service sends all jobs through the default queue. For
	// more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/working-with-queues.html.
	Queue *Queue `locationName:"queue" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful create queue requests return the name of the queue that you just created and information about it.

func (CreateQueueOutput) GoString 

func (s CreateQueueOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*CreateQueueOutput) SetQueue 

func (s *CreateQueueOutput) SetQueue(v *Queue) *CreateQueueOutput

SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.

func (CreateQueueOutput) String 

func (s CreateQueueOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type DashIsoEncryptionSettings 

type DashIsoEncryptionSettings struct {

	// This setting can improve the compatibility of your output with video players
	// on obsolete devices. It applies only to DASH H.264 outputs with DRM encryption.
	// Choose Unencrypted SEI (UNENCRYPTED_SEI) only to correct problems with playback
	// on older devices. Otherwise, keep the default setting CENC v1 (CENC_V1).
	// If you choose Unencrypted SEI, for that output, the service will exclude
	// the access unit delimiter and will leave the SEI NAL units unencrypted.
	PlaybackDeviceCompatibility *string `locationName:"playbackDeviceCompatibility" type:"string" enum:"DashIsoPlaybackDeviceCompatibility"`

	// Settings for use with a SPEKE key provider
	SpekeKeyProvider *SpekeKeyProvider `locationName:"spekeKeyProvider" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Specifies DRM settings for DASH outputs.

func (DashIsoEncryptionSettings) GoString 

func (s DashIsoEncryptionSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DashIsoEncryptionSettings) SetPlaybackDeviceCompatibility added in v1.99.0 

func (s *DashIsoEncryptionSettings) SetPlaybackDeviceCompatibility(v string) *DashIsoEncryptionSettings

SetPlaybackDeviceCompatibility sets the PlaybackDeviceCompatibility field's value.

func (*DashIsoEncryptionSettings) SetSpekeKeyProvider 

func (s *DashIsoEncryptionSettings) SetSpekeKeyProvider(v *SpekeKeyProvider) *DashIsoEncryptionSettings

SetSpekeKeyProvider sets the SpekeKeyProvider field's value.

func (DashIsoEncryptionSettings) String 

func (s DashIsoEncryptionSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type DashIsoGroupSettings 

type DashIsoGroupSettings struct {

	// A partial URI prefix that will be put in the manifest (.mpd) file at the
	// top level BaseURL element. Can be used if streams are delivered from a different
	// URL than the manifest file.
	BaseUrl *string `locationName:"baseUrl" type:"string"`

	// Use Destination (Destination) to specify the S3 output location and the output
	// filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify
	// the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input
	// file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the
	// first input file.
	Destination *string `locationName:"destination" type:"string"`

	// Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of
	// destination
	DestinationSettings *DestinationSettings `locationName:"destinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// DRM settings.
	Encryption *DashIsoEncryptionSettings `locationName:"encryption" type:"structure"`

	// Length of fragments to generate (in seconds). Fragment length must be compatible
	// with GOP size and Framerate. Note that fragments will end on the next keyframe
	// after this number of seconds, so actual fragment length may be longer. When
	// Emit Single File is checked, the fragmentation is internal to a single output
	// file and it does not cause the creation of many output files as in other
	// output types.
	FragmentLength *int64 `locationName:"fragmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Supports HbbTV specification as indicated
	HbbtvCompliance *string `locationName:"hbbtvCompliance" type:"string" enum:"DashIsoHbbtvCompliance"`

	// Minimum time of initially buffered media that is needed to ensure smooth
	// playout.
	MinBufferTime *int64 `locationName:"minBufferTime" type:"integer"`

	// When set to SINGLE_FILE, a single output file is generated, which is internally
	// segmented using the Fragment Length and Segment Length. When set to SEGMENTED_FILES,
	// separate segment files will be created.
	SegmentControl *string `locationName:"segmentControl" type:"string" enum:"DashIsoSegmentControl"`

	// Length of mpd segments to create (in seconds). Note that segments will end
	// on the next keyframe after this number of seconds, so actual segment length
	// may be longer. When Emit Single File is checked, the segmentation is internal
	// to a single output file and it does not cause the creation of many output
	// files as in other output types.
	SegmentLength *int64 `locationName:"segmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// When you enable Precise segment duration in manifests (writeSegmentTimelineInRepresentation),
	// your DASH manifest shows precise segment durations. The segment duration
	// information appears inside the SegmentTimeline element, inside SegmentTemplate
	// at the Representation level. When this feature isn't enabled, the segment
	// durations in your DASH manifest are approximate. The segment duration information
	// appears in the duration attribute of the SegmentTemplate element.
	WriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation *string `locationName:"writeSegmentTimelineInRepresentation" type:"string" enum:"DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to DASH_ISO_GROUP_SETTINGS.

func (DashIsoGroupSettings) GoString 

func (s DashIsoGroupSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) SetBaseUrl 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetBaseUrl(v string) *DashIsoGroupSettings

SetBaseUrl sets the BaseUrl field's value.

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) SetDestination 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetDestination(v string) *DashIsoGroupSettings

SetDestination sets the Destination field's value.

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) SetDestinationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetDestinationSettings(v *DestinationSettings) *DashIsoGroupSettings

SetDestinationSettings sets the DestinationSettings field's value.

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) SetEncryption 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetEncryption(v *DashIsoEncryptionSettings) *DashIsoGroupSettings

SetEncryption sets the Encryption field's value.

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) SetFragmentLength 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetFragmentLength(v int64) *DashIsoGroupSettings

SetFragmentLength sets the FragmentLength field's value.

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) SetHbbtvCompliance 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetHbbtvCompliance(v string) *DashIsoGroupSettings

SetHbbtvCompliance sets the HbbtvCompliance field's value.

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) SetMinBufferTime 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetMinBufferTime(v int64) *DashIsoGroupSettings

SetMinBufferTime sets the MinBufferTime field's value.

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) SetSegmentControl 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetSegmentControl(v string) *DashIsoGroupSettings

SetSegmentControl sets the SegmentControl field's value.

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) SetSegmentLength 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetSegmentLength(v int64) *DashIsoGroupSettings

SetSegmentLength sets the SegmentLength field's value.

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) SetWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation added in v1.99.0 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation(v string) *DashIsoGroupSettings

SetWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation sets the WriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation field's value.

func (DashIsoGroupSettings) String 

func (s DashIsoGroupSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*DashIsoGroupSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Deinterlacer 

type Deinterlacer struct {

	// Only applies when you set Deinterlacer (DeinterlaceMode) to Deinterlace (DEINTERLACE)
	// or Adaptive (ADAPTIVE). Motion adaptive interpolate (INTERPOLATE) produces
	// sharper pictures, while blend (BLEND) produces smoother motion. Use (INTERPOLATE_TICKER)
	// OR (BLEND_TICKER) if your source file includes a ticker, such as a scrolling
	// headline at the bottom of the frame.
	Algorithm *string `locationName:"algorithm" type:"string" enum:"DeinterlaceAlgorithm"`

	// - When set to NORMAL (default), the deinterlacer does not convert frames
	// that are tagged in metadata as progressive. It will only convert those that
	// are tagged as some other type. - When set to FORCE_ALL_FRAMES, the deinterlacer
	// converts every frame to progressive - even those that are already tagged
	// as progressive. Turn Force mode on only if there is a good chance that the
	// metadata has tagged frames as progressive when they are not progressive.
	// Do not turn on otherwise; processing frames that are already progressive
	// into progressive will probably result in lower quality video.
	Control *string `locationName:"control" type:"string" enum:"DeinterlacerControl"`

	// Use Deinterlacer (DeinterlaceMode) to choose how the service will do deinterlacing.
	// Default is Deinterlace. - Deinterlace converts interlaced to progressive.
	// - Inverse telecine converts Hard Telecine 29.97i to progressive 23.976p.
	// - Adaptive auto-detects and converts to progressive.
	Mode *string `locationName:"mode" type:"string" enum:"DeinterlacerMode"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for deinterlacer

func (Deinterlacer) GoString 

func (s Deinterlacer) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Deinterlacer) SetAlgorithm 

func (s *Deinterlacer) SetAlgorithm(v string) *Deinterlacer

SetAlgorithm sets the Algorithm field's value.

func (*Deinterlacer) SetControl 

func (s *Deinterlacer) SetControl(v string) *Deinterlacer

SetControl sets the Control field's value.

func (*Deinterlacer) SetMode 

func (s *Deinterlacer) SetMode(v string) *Deinterlacer

SetMode sets the Mode field's value.

func (Deinterlacer) String 

func (s Deinterlacer) String() string

String returns the string representation

type DeleteJobTemplateInput 

type DeleteJobTemplateInput struct {

	// The name of the job template to be deleted.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Delete a job template by sending a request with the job template name

func (DeleteJobTemplateInput) GoString 

func (s DeleteJobTemplateInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DeleteJobTemplateInput) SetName 

func (s *DeleteJobTemplateInput) SetName(v string) *DeleteJobTemplateInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (DeleteJobTemplateInput) String 

func (s DeleteJobTemplateInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*DeleteJobTemplateInput) Validate 

func (s *DeleteJobTemplateInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type DeleteJobTemplateOutput 

type DeleteJobTemplateOutput struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Delete job template requests will return an OK message or error message with an empty body.

func (DeleteJobTemplateOutput) GoString 

func (s DeleteJobTemplateOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (DeleteJobTemplateOutput) String 

func (s DeleteJobTemplateOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type DeletePresetInput 

type DeletePresetInput struct {

	// The name of the preset to be deleted.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Delete a preset by sending a request with the preset name

func (DeletePresetInput) GoString 

func (s DeletePresetInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DeletePresetInput) SetName 

func (s *DeletePresetInput) SetName(v string) *DeletePresetInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (DeletePresetInput) String 

func (s DeletePresetInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*DeletePresetInput) Validate 

func (s *DeletePresetInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type DeletePresetOutput 

type DeletePresetOutput struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Delete preset requests will return an OK message or error message with an empty body.

func (DeletePresetOutput) GoString 

func (s DeletePresetOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (DeletePresetOutput) String 

func (s DeletePresetOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type DeleteQueueInput 

type DeleteQueueInput struct {

	// The name of the queue that you want to delete.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Delete a queue by sending a request with the queue name. You can't delete a queue with an active pricing plan or one that has unprocessed jobs in it.

func (DeleteQueueInput) GoString 

func (s DeleteQueueInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DeleteQueueInput) SetName 

func (s *DeleteQueueInput) SetName(v string) *DeleteQueueInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (DeleteQueueInput) String 

func (s DeleteQueueInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*DeleteQueueInput) Validate 

func (s *DeleteQueueInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type DeleteQueueOutput 

type DeleteQueueOutput struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Delete queue requests return an OK message or error message with an empty body.

func (DeleteQueueOutput) GoString 

func (s DeleteQueueOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (DeleteQueueOutput) String 

func (s DeleteQueueOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type DescribeEndpointsInput 

type DescribeEndpointsInput struct {

	// Optional. Max number of endpoints, up to twenty, that will be returned at
	// one time.
	MaxResults *int64 `locationName:"maxResults" type:"integer"`

	// Optional field, defaults to DEFAULT. Specify DEFAULT for this operation to
	// return your endpoints if any exist, or to create an endpoint for you and
	// return it if one doesn't already exist. Specify GET_ONLY to return your endpoints
	// if any exist, or an empty list if none exist.
	Mode *string `locationName:"mode" type:"string" enum:"DescribeEndpointsMode"`

	// Use this string, provided with the response to a previous request, to request
	// the next batch of endpoints.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Send an request with an empty body to the regional API endpoint to get your account API endpoint.

func (DescribeEndpointsInput) GoString 

func (s DescribeEndpointsInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DescribeEndpointsInput) SetMaxResults 

func (s *DescribeEndpointsInput) SetMaxResults(v int64) *DescribeEndpointsInput

SetMaxResults sets the MaxResults field's value.

func (*DescribeEndpointsInput) SetMode added in v1.99.0 

func (s *DescribeEndpointsInput) SetMode(v string) *DescribeEndpointsInput

SetMode sets the Mode field's value.

func (*DescribeEndpointsInput) SetNextToken 

func (s *DescribeEndpointsInput) SetNextToken(v string) *DescribeEndpointsInput

SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.

func (DescribeEndpointsInput) String 

func (s DescribeEndpointsInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type DescribeEndpointsOutput 

type DescribeEndpointsOutput struct {

	// List of endpoints
	Endpoints []*Endpoint `locationName:"endpoints" type:"list"`

	// Use this string to request the next batch of endpoints.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful describe endpoints requests will return your account API endpoint.

func (DescribeEndpointsOutput) GoString 

func (s DescribeEndpointsOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DescribeEndpointsOutput) SetEndpoints 

func (s *DescribeEndpointsOutput) SetEndpoints(v []*Endpoint) *DescribeEndpointsOutput

SetEndpoints sets the Endpoints field's value.

func (*DescribeEndpointsOutput) SetNextToken 

func (s *DescribeEndpointsOutput) SetNextToken(v string) *DescribeEndpointsOutput

SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.

func (DescribeEndpointsOutput) String 

func (s DescribeEndpointsOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type DestinationSettings added in v1.99.0 

type DestinationSettings struct {

	// Settings associated with S3 destination
	S3Settings *S3DestinationSettings `locationName:"s3Settings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of destination

func (DestinationSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s DestinationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DestinationSettings) SetS3Settings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *DestinationSettings) SetS3Settings(v *S3DestinationSettings) *DestinationSettings

SetS3Settings sets the S3Settings field's value.

func (DestinationSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s DestinationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type DisassociateCertificateInput added in v1.99.0 

type DisassociateCertificateInput struct {

	// The ARN of the ACM certificate that you want to disassociate from your MediaConvert
	// resource.
	//
	// Arn is a required field
	Arn *string `location:"uri" locationName:"arn" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Removes an association between the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an AWS Certificate Manager (ACM) certificate and an AWS Elemental MediaConvert resource.

func (DisassociateCertificateInput) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s DisassociateCertificateInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DisassociateCertificateInput) SetArn added in v1.99.0 

func (s *DisassociateCertificateInput) SetArn(v string) *DisassociateCertificateInput

SetArn sets the Arn field's value.

func (DisassociateCertificateInput) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s DisassociateCertificateInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*DisassociateCertificateInput) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *DisassociateCertificateInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type DisassociateCertificateOutput added in v1.99.0 

type DisassociateCertificateOutput struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful disassociation of Certificate Manager Amazon Resource Name (ARN) with Mediaconvert returns an OK message.

func (DisassociateCertificateOutput) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s DisassociateCertificateOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (DisassociateCertificateOutput) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s DisassociateCertificateOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type DvbNitSettings 

type DvbNitSettings struct {

	// The numeric value placed in the Network Information Table (NIT).
	NetworkId *int64 `locationName:"networkId" type:"integer"`

	// The network name text placed in the network_name_descriptor inside the Network
	// Information Table. Maximum length is 256 characters.
	NetworkName *string `locationName:"networkName" min:"1" type:"string"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	NitInterval *int64 `locationName:"nitInterval" min:"25" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Inserts DVB Network Information Table (NIT) at the specified table repetition interval.

func (DvbNitSettings) GoString 

func (s DvbNitSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DvbNitSettings) SetNetworkId 

func (s *DvbNitSettings) SetNetworkId(v int64) *DvbNitSettings

SetNetworkId sets the NetworkId field's value.

func (*DvbNitSettings) SetNetworkName 

func (s *DvbNitSettings) SetNetworkName(v string) *DvbNitSettings

SetNetworkName sets the NetworkName field's value.

func (*DvbNitSettings) SetNitInterval 

func (s *DvbNitSettings) SetNitInterval(v int64) *DvbNitSettings

SetNitInterval sets the NitInterval field's value.

func (DvbNitSettings) String 

func (s DvbNitSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*DvbNitSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *DvbNitSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type DvbSdtSettings 

type DvbSdtSettings struct {

	// Selects method of inserting SDT information into output stream. "Follow input
	// SDT" copies SDT information from input stream to output stream. "Follow input
	// SDT if present" copies SDT information from input stream to output stream
	// if SDT information is present in the input, otherwise it will fall back on
	// the user-defined values. Enter "SDT Manually" means user will enter the SDT
	// information. "No SDT" means output stream will not contain SDT information.
	OutputSdt *string `locationName:"outputSdt" type:"string" enum:"OutputSdt"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	SdtInterval *int64 `locationName:"sdtInterval" min:"25" type:"integer"`

	// The service name placed in the service_descriptor in the Service Description
	// Table. Maximum length is 256 characters.
	ServiceName *string `locationName:"serviceName" min:"1" type:"string"`

	// The service provider name placed in the service_descriptor in the Service
	// Description Table. Maximum length is 256 characters.
	ServiceProviderName *string `locationName:"serviceProviderName" min:"1" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Inserts DVB Service Description Table (NIT) at the specified table repetition interval.

func (DvbSdtSettings) GoString 

func (s DvbSdtSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DvbSdtSettings) SetOutputSdt 

func (s *DvbSdtSettings) SetOutputSdt(v string) *DvbSdtSettings

SetOutputSdt sets the OutputSdt field's value.

func (*DvbSdtSettings) SetSdtInterval 

func (s *DvbSdtSettings) SetSdtInterval(v int64) *DvbSdtSettings

SetSdtInterval sets the SdtInterval field's value.

func (*DvbSdtSettings) SetServiceName 

func (s *DvbSdtSettings) SetServiceName(v string) *DvbSdtSettings

SetServiceName sets the ServiceName field's value.

func (*DvbSdtSettings) SetServiceProviderName 

func (s *DvbSdtSettings) SetServiceProviderName(v string) *DvbSdtSettings

SetServiceProviderName sets the ServiceProviderName field's value.

func (DvbSdtSettings) String 

func (s DvbSdtSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*DvbSdtSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *DvbSdtSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type DvbSubDestinationSettings 

type DvbSubDestinationSettings struct {

	// If no explicit x_position or y_position is provided, setting alignment to
	// centered will place the captions at the bottom center of the output. Similarly,
	// setting a left alignment will align captions to the bottom left of the output.
	// If x and y positions are given in conjunction with the alignment parameter,
	// the font will be justified (either left or centered) relative to those coordinates.
	// This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or
	// teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	Alignment *string `locationName:"alignment" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleAlignment"`

	// Specifies the color of the rectangle behind the captions.All burn-in and
	// DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	BackgroundColor *string `locationName:"backgroundColor" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleBackgroundColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the background rectangle. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent.
	// Leaving this parameter blank is equivalent to setting it to 0 (transparent).
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	BackgroundOpacity *int64 `locationName:"backgroundOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the color of the burned-in captions. This option is not valid for
	// source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings
	// are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font
	// settings must match.
	FontColor *string `locationName:"fontColor" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleFontColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the burned-in captions. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent.All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	FontOpacity *int64 `locationName:"fontOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Font resolution in DPI (dots per inch); default is 96 dpi.All burn-in and
	// DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	FontResolution *int64 `locationName:"fontResolution" min:"96" type:"integer"`

	// Provide the font script, using an ISO 15924 script code, if the LanguageCode
	// is not sufficient for determining the script type. Where LanguageCode or
	// CustomLanguageCode is sufficient, use "AUTOMATIC" or leave unset. This is
	// used to help determine the appropriate font for rendering DVB-Sub captions.
	FontScript *string `locationName:"fontScript" type:"string" enum:"FontScript"`

	// A positive integer indicates the exact font size in points. Set to 0 for
	// automatic font size selection. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must
	// match.
	FontSize *int64 `locationName:"fontSize" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies font outline color. This option is not valid for source captions
	// that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already
	// pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings
	// must match.
	OutlineColor *string `locationName:"outlineColor" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleOutlineColor"`

	// Specifies font outline size in pixels. This option is not valid for source
	// captions that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings
	// are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font
	// settings must match.
	OutlineSize *int64 `locationName:"outlineSize" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the color of the shadow cast by the captions.All burn-in and DVB-Sub
	// font settings must match.
	ShadowColor *string `locationName:"shadowColor" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleShadowColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the shadow. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent. Leaving
	// this parameter blank is equivalent to setting it to 0 (transparent). All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowOpacity *int64 `locationName:"shadowOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the horizontal offset of the shadow relative to the captions in
	// pixels. A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels to the left.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowXOffset *int64 `locationName:"shadowXOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the vertical offset of the shadow relative to the captions in pixels.
	// A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels above the text. All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowYOffset *int64 `locationName:"shadowYOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Only applies to jobs with input captions in Teletext or STL formats. Specify
	// whether the spacing between letters in your captions is set by the captions
	// grid or varies depending on letter width. Choose fixed grid to conform to
	// the spacing specified in the captions file more accurately. Choose proportional
	// to make the text easier to read if the captions are closed caption.
	TeletextSpacing *string `locationName:"teletextSpacing" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacing"`

	// Specifies the horizontal position of the caption relative to the left side
	// of the output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting
	// 10 pixels from the left of the output. If no explicit x_position is provided,
	// the horizontal caption position will be determined by the alignment parameter.
	// This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or
	// teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	XPosition *int64 `locationName:"xPosition" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the vertical position of the caption relative to the top of the
	// output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting 10
	// pixels from the top of the output. If no explicit y_position is provided,
	// the caption will be positioned towards the bottom of the output. This option
	// is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext.
	// These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	YPosition *int64 `locationName:"yPosition" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DVB-Sub Destination Settings

func (DvbSubDestinationSettings) GoString 

func (s DvbSubDestinationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetAlignment 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetAlignment(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetAlignment sets the Alignment field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundColor 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundColor(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetBackgroundColor sets the BackgroundColor field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundOpacity 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundOpacity(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetBackgroundOpacity sets the BackgroundOpacity field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontColor 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontColor(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetFontColor sets the FontColor field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontOpacity 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontOpacity(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetFontOpacity sets the FontOpacity field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontResolution 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontResolution(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetFontResolution sets the FontResolution field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontScript added in v1.99.0 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontScript(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetFontScript sets the FontScript field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontSize 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontSize(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetFontSize sets the FontSize field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetOutlineColor 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetOutlineColor(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetOutlineColor sets the OutlineColor field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetOutlineSize 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetOutlineSize(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetOutlineSize sets the OutlineSize field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowColor 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowColor(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetShadowColor sets the ShadowColor field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowOpacity 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowOpacity(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetShadowOpacity sets the ShadowOpacity field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowXOffset 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowXOffset(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetShadowXOffset sets the ShadowXOffset field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowYOffset 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowYOffset(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetShadowYOffset sets the ShadowYOffset field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetTeletextSpacing 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetTeletextSpacing(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetTeletextSpacing sets the TeletextSpacing field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetXPosition 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetXPosition(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetXPosition sets the XPosition field's value.

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetYPosition 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetYPosition(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings

SetYPosition sets the YPosition field's value.

func (DvbSubDestinationSettings) String 

func (s DvbSubDestinationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*DvbSubDestinationSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type DvbSubSourceSettings 

type DvbSubSourceSettings struct {

	// When using DVB-Sub with Burn-In or SMPTE-TT, use this PID for the source
	// content. Unused for DVB-Sub passthrough. All DVB-Sub content is passed through,
	// regardless of selectors.
	Pid *int64 `locationName:"pid" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

DVB Sub Source Settings

func (DvbSubSourceSettings) GoString 

func (s DvbSubSourceSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DvbSubSourceSettings) SetPid 

func (s *DvbSubSourceSettings) SetPid(v int64) *DvbSubSourceSettings

SetPid sets the Pid field's value.

func (DvbSubSourceSettings) String 

func (s DvbSubSourceSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*DvbSubSourceSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *DvbSubSourceSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type DvbTdtSettings 

type DvbTdtSettings struct {

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	TdtInterval *int64 `locationName:"tdtInterval" min:"1000" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Inserts DVB Time and Date Table (TDT) at the specified table repetition interval.

func (DvbTdtSettings) GoString 

func (s DvbTdtSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*DvbTdtSettings) SetTdtInterval 

func (s *DvbTdtSettings) SetTdtInterval(v int64) *DvbTdtSettings

SetTdtInterval sets the TdtInterval field's value.

func (DvbTdtSettings) String 

func (s DvbTdtSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*DvbTdtSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *DvbTdtSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Eac3AtmosSettings added in v1.99.0 

type Eac3AtmosSettings struct {

	// Specify the average bitrate in bits per second.Valid values: 384k, 448k,
	// 640k, 768k
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"384000" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the bitstream mode for the E-AC-3 stream that the encoder emits.
	// For more information about the EAC3 bitstream mode, see ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex
	// E).
	BitstreamMode *string `locationName:"bitstreamMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3AtmosBitstreamMode"`

	// The coding mode for Dolby Digital Plus JOC (Atmos) is always 9.1.6 (CODING_MODE_9_1_6).
	CodingMode *string `locationName:"codingMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3AtmosCodingMode"`

	// Enable Dolby Dialogue Intelligence to adjust loudness based on dialogue analysis.
	DialogueIntelligence *string `locationName:"dialogueIntelligence" type:"string" enum:"Eac3AtmosDialogueIntelligence"`

	// Specify the absolute peak level for a signal with dynamic range compression.
	DynamicRangeCompressionLine *string `locationName:"dynamicRangeCompressionLine" type:"string" enum:"Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLine"`

	// Specify how the service limits the audio dynamic range when compressing the
	// audio.
	DynamicRangeCompressionRf *string `locationName:"dynamicRangeCompressionRf" type:"string" enum:"Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRf"`

	// Specify a value for the following Dolby Atmos setting: Left only/Right only
	// center mix(Lo/Ro center). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. How
	// the service uses thisvalue depends on the value that you choose for Stereo
	// downmix (Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix).Valid values: 3.0, 1.5, 0.0, -1.5, -3.0,
	// -4.5, and -6.0.
	LoRoCenterMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"loRoCenterMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// Specify a value for the following Dolby Atmos setting: Left only/Right only
	// (Lo/Ro surround). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. How the service
	// uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo downmix (Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix).
	// Valid values: -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, -6.0, and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel.
	LoRoSurroundMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"loRoSurroundMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// Specify a value for the following Dolby Atmos setting: Left total/Right total
	// center mix (Lt/Rt center). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. How
	// the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo
	// downmix (Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix). Valid values: 3.0, 1.5, 0.0, -1.5, -3.0,
	// -4.5, and -6.0.
	LtRtCenterMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"ltRtCenterMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// Specify a value for the following Dolby Atmos setting: Left total/Right total
	// surround mix (Lt/Rt surround). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing.
	// How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for
	// Stereo downmix (Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix). Valid values: -1.5, -3.0, -4.5,
	// -6.0, and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel.
	LtRtSurroundMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"ltRtSurroundMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// Choose how the service meters the loudness of your audio.
	MeteringMode *string `locationName:"meteringMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3AtmosMeteringMode"`

	// This value is always 48000. It represents the sample rate in Hz.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"48000" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the percentage of audio content that must be speech before the encoder
	// uses the measured speech loudness as the overall program loudness.
	SpeechThreshold *int64 `locationName:"speechThreshold" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Choose how the service does stereo downmixing.
	StereoDownmix *string `locationName:"stereoDownmix" type:"string" enum:"Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix"`

	// Specify whether your input audio has an additional center rear surround channel
	// matrix encoded into your left and right surround channels.
	SurroundExMode *string `locationName:"surroundExMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3AtmosSurroundExMode"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to the value EAC3_ATMOS.

func (Eac3AtmosSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s Eac3AtmosSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetBitrate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetBitrate(v int64) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetBitstreamMode added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetBitstreamMode(v string) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetBitstreamMode sets the BitstreamMode field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetCodingMode added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetCodingMode(v string) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetCodingMode sets the CodingMode field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetDialogueIntelligence added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetDialogueIntelligence(v string) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetDialogueIntelligence sets the DialogueIntelligence field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionLine added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionLine(v string) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetDynamicRangeCompressionLine sets the DynamicRangeCompressionLine field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionRf added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionRf(v string) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetDynamicRangeCompressionRf sets the DynamicRangeCompressionRf field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetLoRoCenterMixLevel added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetLoRoCenterMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetLoRoCenterMixLevel sets the LoRoCenterMixLevel field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetLoRoSurroundMixLevel added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetLoRoSurroundMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetLoRoSurroundMixLevel sets the LoRoSurroundMixLevel field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetLtRtCenterMixLevel added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetLtRtCenterMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetLtRtCenterMixLevel sets the LtRtCenterMixLevel field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetLtRtSurroundMixLevel added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetLtRtSurroundMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetLtRtSurroundMixLevel sets the LtRtSurroundMixLevel field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetMeteringMode added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetMeteringMode(v string) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetMeteringMode sets the MeteringMode field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetSampleRate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetSpeechThreshold added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetSpeechThreshold(v int64) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetSpeechThreshold sets the SpeechThreshold field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetStereoDownmix added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetStereoDownmix(v string) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetStereoDownmix sets the StereoDownmix field's value.

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) SetSurroundExMode added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) SetSurroundExMode(v string) *Eac3AtmosSettings

SetSurroundExMode sets the SurroundExMode field's value.

func (Eac3AtmosSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s Eac3AtmosSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*Eac3AtmosSettings) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Eac3AtmosSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Eac3Settings 

type Eac3Settings struct {

	// If set to ATTENUATE_3_DB, applies a 3 dB attenuation to the surround channels.
	// Only used for 3/2 coding mode.
	AttenuationControl *string `locationName:"attenuationControl" type:"string" enum:"Eac3AttenuationControl"`

	// Specify the average bitrate in bits per second. Valid bitrates depend on
	// the coding mode.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"64000" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the bitstream mode for the E-AC-3 stream that the encoder emits.
	// For more information about the EAC3 bitstream mode, see ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex
	// E).
	BitstreamMode *string `locationName:"bitstreamMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3BitstreamMode"`

	// Dolby Digital Plus coding mode. Determines number of channels.
	CodingMode *string `locationName:"codingMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3CodingMode"`

	// Activates a DC highpass filter for all input channels.
	DcFilter *string `locationName:"dcFilter" type:"string" enum:"Eac3DcFilter"`

	// Sets the dialnorm for the output. If blank and input audio is Dolby Digital
	// Plus, dialnorm will be passed through.
	Dialnorm *int64 `locationName:"dialnorm" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the absolute peak level for a signal with dynamic range compression.
	DynamicRangeCompressionLine *string `locationName:"dynamicRangeCompressionLine" type:"string" enum:"Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine"`

	// Specify how the service limits the audio dynamic range when compressing the
	// audio.
	DynamicRangeCompressionRf *string `locationName:"dynamicRangeCompressionRf" type:"string" enum:"Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf"`

	// When encoding 3/2 audio, controls whether the LFE channel is enabled
	LfeControl *string `locationName:"lfeControl" type:"string" enum:"Eac3LfeControl"`

	// Applies a 120Hz lowpass filter to the LFE channel prior to encoding. Only
	// valid with 3_2_LFE coding mode.
	LfeFilter *string `locationName:"lfeFilter" type:"string" enum:"Eac3LfeFilter"`

	// Specify a value for the following Dolby Digital Plus setting: Left only/Right
	// only center mix (Lo/Ro center). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing.
	// How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for
	// Stereo downmix (Eac3StereoDownmix). Valid values: 3.0, 1.5, 0.0, -1.5, -3.0,
	// -4.5, -6.0, and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel. This setting applies
	// only if you keep the default value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs (CODING_MODE_3_2)
	// for the setting Coding mode (Eac3CodingMode). If you choose a different value
	// for Coding mode, the service ignores Left only/Right only center (loRoCenterMixLevel).
	LoRoCenterMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"loRoCenterMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// Specify a value for the following Dolby Digital Plus setting: Left only/Right
	// only (Lo/Ro surround). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. How the
	// service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo downmix
	// (Eac3StereoDownmix). Valid values: -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, -6.0, and -60. The value
	// -60 mutes the channel. This setting applies only if you keep the default
	// value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs (CODING_MODE_3_2) for the setting Coding mode
	// (Eac3CodingMode). If you choose a different value for Coding mode, the service
	// ignores Left only/Right only surround (loRoSurroundMixLevel).
	LoRoSurroundMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"loRoSurroundMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// Specify a value for the following Dolby Digital Plus setting: Left total/Right
	// total center mix (Lt/Rt center). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing.
	// How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for
	// Stereo downmix (Eac3StereoDownmix). Valid values: 3.0, 1.5, 0.0, -1.5, -3.0,
	// -4.5, -6.0, and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel. This setting applies
	// only if you keep the default value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs (CODING_MODE_3_2)
	// for the setting Coding mode (Eac3CodingMode). If you choose a different value
	// for Coding mode, the service ignores Left total/Right total center (ltRtCenterMixLevel).
	LtRtCenterMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"ltRtCenterMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// Specify a value for the following Dolby Digital Plus setting: Left total/Right
	// total surround mix (Lt/Rt surround). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing.
	// How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for
	// Stereo downmix (Eac3StereoDownmix). Valid values: -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, -6.0,
	// and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel. This setting applies only if you
	// keep the default value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs (CODING_MODE_3_2) for the
	// setting Coding mode (Eac3CodingMode). If you choose a different value for
	// Coding mode, the service ignores Left total/Right total surround (ltRtSurroundMixLevel).
	LtRtSurroundMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"ltRtSurroundMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, encoder metadata will be sourced from the DD, DD+,
	// or DolbyE decoder that supplied this audio data. If audio was not supplied
	// from one of these streams, then the static metadata settings will be used.
	MetadataControl *string `locationName:"metadataControl" type:"string" enum:"Eac3MetadataControl"`

	// When set to WHEN_POSSIBLE, input DD+ audio will be passed through if it is
	// present on the input. this detection is dynamic over the life of the transcode.
	// Inputs that alternate between DD+ and non-DD+ content will have a consistent
	// DD+ output as the system alternates between passthrough and encoding.
	PassthroughControl *string `locationName:"passthroughControl" type:"string" enum:"Eac3PassthroughControl"`

	// Controls the amount of phase-shift applied to the surround channels. Only
	// used for 3/2 coding mode.
	PhaseControl *string `locationName:"phaseControl" type:"string" enum:"Eac3PhaseControl"`

	// This value is always 48000. It represents the sample rate in Hz.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"48000" type:"integer"`

	// Choose how the service does stereo downmixing. This setting only applies
	// if you keep the default value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs (CODING_MODE_3_2)
	// for the setting Coding mode (Eac3CodingMode). If you choose a different value
	// for Coding mode, the service ignores Stereo downmix (Eac3StereoDownmix).
	StereoDownmix *string `locationName:"stereoDownmix" type:"string" enum:"Eac3StereoDownmix"`

	// When encoding 3/2 audio, sets whether an extra center back surround channel
	// is matrix encoded into the left and right surround channels.
	SurroundExMode *string `locationName:"surroundExMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3SurroundExMode"`

	// When encoding 2/0 audio, sets whether Dolby Surround is matrix encoded into
	// the two channels.
	SurroundMode *string `locationName:"surroundMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3SurroundMode"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to the value EAC3.

func (Eac3Settings) GoString 

func (s Eac3Settings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Eac3Settings) SetAttenuationControl 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetAttenuationControl(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetAttenuationControl sets the AttenuationControl field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetBitrate 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *Eac3Settings

SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetBitstreamMode 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetBitstreamMode(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetBitstreamMode sets the BitstreamMode field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetCodingMode 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetCodingMode(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetCodingMode sets the CodingMode field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetDcFilter 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetDcFilter(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetDcFilter sets the DcFilter field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetDialnorm 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetDialnorm(v int64) *Eac3Settings

SetDialnorm sets the Dialnorm field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionLine 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionLine(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetDynamicRangeCompressionLine sets the DynamicRangeCompressionLine field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionRf 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionRf(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetDynamicRangeCompressionRf sets the DynamicRangeCompressionRf field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetLfeControl 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLfeControl(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetLfeControl sets the LfeControl field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetLfeFilter 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLfeFilter(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetLfeFilter sets the LfeFilter field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetLoRoCenterMixLevel 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLoRoCenterMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3Settings

SetLoRoCenterMixLevel sets the LoRoCenterMixLevel field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetLoRoSurroundMixLevel 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLoRoSurroundMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3Settings

SetLoRoSurroundMixLevel sets the LoRoSurroundMixLevel field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetLtRtCenterMixLevel 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLtRtCenterMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3Settings

SetLtRtCenterMixLevel sets the LtRtCenterMixLevel field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetLtRtSurroundMixLevel 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLtRtSurroundMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3Settings

SetLtRtSurroundMixLevel sets the LtRtSurroundMixLevel field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetMetadataControl 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetMetadataControl(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetMetadataControl sets the MetadataControl field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetPassthroughControl 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetPassthroughControl(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetPassthroughControl sets the PassthroughControl field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetPhaseControl 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetPhaseControl(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetPhaseControl sets the PhaseControl field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetSampleRate 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *Eac3Settings

SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetStereoDownmix 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetStereoDownmix(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetStereoDownmix sets the StereoDownmix field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetSurroundExMode 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetSurroundExMode(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetSurroundExMode sets the SurroundExMode field's value.

func (*Eac3Settings) SetSurroundMode 

func (s *Eac3Settings) SetSurroundMode(v string) *Eac3Settings

SetSurroundMode sets the SurroundMode field's value.

func (Eac3Settings) String 

func (s Eac3Settings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*Eac3Settings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *Eac3Settings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type EmbeddedDestinationSettings added in v1.99.0 

type EmbeddedDestinationSettings struct {

	// Ignore this setting unless your input captions are SCC format. With SCC inputs,
	// you can optionally use this setting to replace the input channel number with
	// the channel number that you specify. Specify a different number for each
	// output captions track for a particular output. If you don't specify an output
	// channel number, the system uses the input channel number for the output channel
	// number. You can optionally combine two captions channels in your output.
	// The two output channel numbers can be one of the following pairs: 1,3; 2,4;
	// 1,4; or 2,3.
	Destination608ChannelNumber *int64 `locationName:"destination608ChannelNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Ignore this setting unless your input captions are SCC format and you are
	// performing SCC upconvert. With SCC inputs, you can optionally use this setting
	// to specify the 708 service number that is in the output. Specify a different
	// service number for each output captions track for a particular output. If
	// you don't specify an output track number, the system uses the 608 channel
	// number for the output 708 service number. You can combine two captions channels
	// in your output. Service numbers must be distinct.
	Destination708ServiceNumber *int64 `locationName:"destination708ServiceNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings specific to embedded/ancillary caption outputs, including 608/708 Channel destination number.

func (EmbeddedDestinationSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s EmbeddedDestinationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*EmbeddedDestinationSettings) SetDestination608ChannelNumber added in v1.99.0 

func (s *EmbeddedDestinationSettings) SetDestination608ChannelNumber(v int64) *EmbeddedDestinationSettings

SetDestination608ChannelNumber sets the Destination608ChannelNumber field's value.

func (*EmbeddedDestinationSettings) SetDestination708ServiceNumber added in v1.99.0 

func (s *EmbeddedDestinationSettings) SetDestination708ServiceNumber(v int64) *EmbeddedDestinationSettings

SetDestination708ServiceNumber sets the Destination708ServiceNumber field's value.

func (EmbeddedDestinationSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s EmbeddedDestinationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*EmbeddedDestinationSettings) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *EmbeddedDestinationSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type EmbeddedSourceSettings 

type EmbeddedSourceSettings struct {

	// When set to UPCONVERT, 608 data is both passed through via the "608 compatibility
	// bytes" fields of the 708 wrapper as well as translated into 708. 708 data
	// present in the source content will be discarded.
	Convert608To708 *string `locationName:"convert608To708" type:"string" enum:"EmbeddedConvert608To708"`

	// Specifies the 608/708 channel number within the video track from which to
	// extract captions. Unused for passthrough.
	Source608ChannelNumber *int64 `locationName:"source608ChannelNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the video track index used for extracting captions. The system
	// only supports one input video track, so this should always be set to '1'.
	Source608TrackNumber *int64 `locationName:"source608TrackNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for embedded captions Source

func (EmbeddedSourceSettings) GoString 

func (s EmbeddedSourceSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*EmbeddedSourceSettings) SetConvert608To708 

func (s *EmbeddedSourceSettings) SetConvert608To708(v string) *EmbeddedSourceSettings

SetConvert608To708 sets the Convert608To708 field's value.

func (*EmbeddedSourceSettings) SetSource608ChannelNumber 

func (s *EmbeddedSourceSettings) SetSource608ChannelNumber(v int64) *EmbeddedSourceSettings

SetSource608ChannelNumber sets the Source608ChannelNumber field's value.

func (*EmbeddedSourceSettings) SetSource608TrackNumber 

func (s *EmbeddedSourceSettings) SetSource608TrackNumber(v int64) *EmbeddedSourceSettings

SetSource608TrackNumber sets the Source608TrackNumber field's value.

func (EmbeddedSourceSettings) String 

func (s EmbeddedSourceSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*EmbeddedSourceSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *EmbeddedSourceSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Endpoint 

type Endpoint struct {

	// URL of endpoint
	Url *string `locationName:"url" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Describes an account-specific API endpoint.

func (Endpoint) GoString 

func (s Endpoint) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Endpoint) SetUrl 

func (s *Endpoint) SetUrl(v string) *Endpoint

SetUrl sets the Url field's value.

func (Endpoint) String 

func (s Endpoint) String() string

String returns the string representation

type EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification added in v1.99.0 

type EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification struct {

	// Provide your ESAM ManifestConfirmConditionNotification XML document inside
	// your JSON job settings. Form the XML document as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.
	// The transcoder will use the Manifest Conditioning instructions in the message
	// that you supply.
	MccXml *string `locationName:"mccXml" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ESAM ManifestConfirmConditionNotification defined by OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.

func (EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) SetMccXml added in v1.99.0 

func (s *EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) SetMccXml(v string) *EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification

SetMccXml sets the MccXml field's value.

func (EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) String() string

String returns the string representation

type EsamSettings added in v1.99.0 

type EsamSettings struct {

	// Specifies an ESAM ManifestConfirmConditionNotification XML as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.
	// The transcoder uses the manifest conditioning instructions that you provide
	// in the setting MCC XML (mccXml).
	ManifestConfirmConditionNotification *EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification `locationName:"manifestConfirmConditionNotification" type:"structure"`

	// Specifies the stream distance, in milliseconds, between the SCTE 35 messages
	// that the transcoder places and the splice points that they refer to. If the
	// time between the start of the asset and the SCTE-35 message is less than
	// this value, then the transcoder places the SCTE-35 marker at the beginning
	// of the stream.
	ResponseSignalPreroll *int64 `locationName:"responseSignalPreroll" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies an ESAM SignalProcessingNotification XML as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.
	// The transcoder uses the signal processing instructions that you provide in
	// the setting SCC XML (sccXml).
	SignalProcessingNotification *EsamSignalProcessingNotification `locationName:"signalProcessingNotification" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for Event Signaling And Messaging (ESAM). If you don't do ad insertion, you can ignore these settings.

func (EsamSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s EsamSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*EsamSettings) SetManifestConfirmConditionNotification added in v1.99.0 

func (s *EsamSettings) SetManifestConfirmConditionNotification(v *EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) *EsamSettings

SetManifestConfirmConditionNotification sets the ManifestConfirmConditionNotification field's value.

func (*EsamSettings) SetResponseSignalPreroll added in v1.99.0 

func (s *EsamSettings) SetResponseSignalPreroll(v int64) *EsamSettings

SetResponseSignalPreroll sets the ResponseSignalPreroll field's value.

func (*EsamSettings) SetSignalProcessingNotification added in v1.99.0 

func (s *EsamSettings) SetSignalProcessingNotification(v *EsamSignalProcessingNotification) *EsamSettings

SetSignalProcessingNotification sets the SignalProcessingNotification field's value.

func (EsamSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s EsamSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type EsamSignalProcessingNotification added in v1.99.0 

type EsamSignalProcessingNotification struct {

	// Provide your ESAM SignalProcessingNotification XML document inside your JSON
	// job settings. Form the XML document as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025. The
	// transcoder will use the signal processing instructions in the message that
	// you supply. Provide your ESAM SignalProcessingNotification XML document inside
	// your JSON job settings. For your MPEG2-TS file outputs, if you want the service
	// to place SCTE-35 markers at the insertion points you specify in the XML document,
	// you must also enable SCTE-35 ESAM (scte35Esam). Note that you can either
	// specify an ESAM XML document or enable SCTE-35 passthrough. You can't do
	// both.
	SccXml *string `locationName:"sccXml" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

ESAM SignalProcessingNotification data defined by OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.

func (EsamSignalProcessingNotification) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s EsamSignalProcessingNotification) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*EsamSignalProcessingNotification) SetSccXml added in v1.99.0 

func (s *EsamSignalProcessingNotification) SetSccXml(v string) *EsamSignalProcessingNotification

SetSccXml sets the SccXml field's value.

func (EsamSignalProcessingNotification) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s EsamSignalProcessingNotification) String() string

String returns the string representation

type F4vSettings 

type F4vSettings struct {

	// If set to PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD, the MOOV atom is relocated to the beginning
	// of the archive as required for progressive downloading. Otherwise it is placed
	// normally at the end.
	MoovPlacement *string `locationName:"moovPlacement" type:"string" enum:"F4vMoovPlacement"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for F4v container

func (F4vSettings) GoString 

func (s F4vSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*F4vSettings) SetMoovPlacement 

func (s *F4vSettings) SetMoovPlacement(v string) *F4vSettings

SetMoovPlacement sets the MoovPlacement field's value.

func (F4vSettings) String 

func (s F4vSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type FileGroupSettings 

type FileGroupSettings struct {

	// Use Destination (Destination) to specify the S3 output location and the output
	// filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify
	// the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input
	// file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the
	// first input file.
	Destination *string `locationName:"destination" type:"string"`

	// Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of
	// destination
	DestinationSettings *DestinationSettings `locationName:"destinationSettings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to FILE_GROUP_SETTINGS.

func (FileGroupSettings) GoString 

func (s FileGroupSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*FileGroupSettings) SetDestination 

func (s *FileGroupSettings) SetDestination(v string) *FileGroupSettings

SetDestination sets the Destination field's value.

func (*FileGroupSettings) SetDestinationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *FileGroupSettings) SetDestinationSettings(v *DestinationSettings) *FileGroupSettings

SetDestinationSettings sets the DestinationSettings field's value.

func (FileGroupSettings) String 

func (s FileGroupSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type FileSourceSettings 

type FileSourceSettings struct {

	// If set to UPCONVERT, 608 caption data is both passed through via the "608
	// compatibility bytes" fields of the 708 wrapper as well as translated into
	// 708. 708 data present in the source content will be discarded.
	Convert608To708 *string `locationName:"convert608To708" type:"string" enum:"FileSourceConvert608To708"`

	// External caption file used for loading captions. Accepted file extensions
	// are 'scc', 'ttml', 'dfxp', 'stl', 'srt', and 'smi'.
	SourceFile *string `locationName:"sourceFile" min:"14" type:"string"`

	// Specifies a time delta in seconds to offset the captions from the source
	// file.
	TimeDelta *int64 `locationName:"timeDelta" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for File-based Captions in Source

func (FileSourceSettings) GoString 

func (s FileSourceSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*FileSourceSettings) SetConvert608To708 

func (s *FileSourceSettings) SetConvert608To708(v string) *FileSourceSettings

SetConvert608To708 sets the Convert608To708 field's value.

func (*FileSourceSettings) SetSourceFile 

func (s *FileSourceSettings) SetSourceFile(v string) *FileSourceSettings

SetSourceFile sets the SourceFile field's value.

func (*FileSourceSettings) SetTimeDelta 

func (s *FileSourceSettings) SetTimeDelta(v int64) *FileSourceSettings

SetTimeDelta sets the TimeDelta field's value.

func (FileSourceSettings) String 

func (s FileSourceSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*FileSourceSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *FileSourceSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type FrameCaptureSettings 

type FrameCaptureSettings struct {

	// Frame capture will encode the first frame of the output stream, then one
	// frame every framerateDenominator/framerateNumerator seconds. For example,
	// settings of framerateNumerator = 1 and framerateDenominator = 3 (a rate of
	// 1/3 frame per second) will capture the first frame, then 1 frame every 3s.
	// Files will be named as filename.n.jpg where n is the 0-based sequence number
	// of each Capture.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Frame capture will encode the first frame of the output stream, then one
	// frame every framerateDenominator/framerateNumerator seconds. For example,
	// settings of framerateNumerator = 1 and framerateDenominator = 3 (a rate of
	// 1/3 frame per second) will capture the first frame, then 1 frame every 3s.
	// Files will be named as filename.NNNNNNN.jpg where N is the 0-based frame
	// sequence number zero padded to 7 decimal places.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Maximum number of captures (encoded jpg output files).
	MaxCaptures *int64 `locationName:"maxCaptures" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// JPEG Quality - a higher value equals higher quality.
	Quality *int64 `locationName:"quality" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to the value FRAME_CAPTURE.

func (FrameCaptureSettings) GoString 

func (s FrameCaptureSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*FrameCaptureSettings) SetFramerateDenominator 

func (s *FrameCaptureSettings) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *FrameCaptureSettings

SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.

func (*FrameCaptureSettings) SetFramerateNumerator 

func (s *FrameCaptureSettings) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *FrameCaptureSettings

SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.

func (*FrameCaptureSettings) SetMaxCaptures 

func (s *FrameCaptureSettings) SetMaxCaptures(v int64) *FrameCaptureSettings

SetMaxCaptures sets the MaxCaptures field's value.

func (*FrameCaptureSettings) SetQuality 

func (s *FrameCaptureSettings) SetQuality(v int64) *FrameCaptureSettings

SetQuality sets the Quality field's value.

func (FrameCaptureSettings) String 

func (s FrameCaptureSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*FrameCaptureSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *FrameCaptureSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type GetJobInput 

type GetJobInput struct {

	// the job ID of the job.
	//
	// Id is a required field
	Id *string `location:"uri" locationName:"id" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Query a job by sending a request with the job ID.

func (GetJobInput) GoString 

func (s GetJobInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*GetJobInput) SetId 

func (s *GetJobInput) SetId(v string) *GetJobInput

SetId sets the Id field's value.

func (GetJobInput) String 

func (s GetJobInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*GetJobInput) Validate 

func (s *GetJobInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type GetJobOutput 

type GetJobOutput struct {

	// Each job converts an input file into an output file or files. For more information,
	// see the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html
	Job *Job `locationName:"job" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful get job requests will return an OK message and the job JSON.

func (GetJobOutput) GoString 

func (s GetJobOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*GetJobOutput) SetJob 

func (s *GetJobOutput) SetJob(v *Job) *GetJobOutput

SetJob sets the Job field's value.

func (GetJobOutput) String 

func (s GetJobOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type GetJobTemplateInput 

type GetJobTemplateInput struct {

	// The name of the job template.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Query a job template by sending a request with the job template name.

func (GetJobTemplateInput) GoString 

func (s GetJobTemplateInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*GetJobTemplateInput) SetName 

func (s *GetJobTemplateInput) SetName(v string) *GetJobTemplateInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (GetJobTemplateInput) String 

func (s GetJobTemplateInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*GetJobTemplateInput) Validate 

func (s *GetJobTemplateInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type GetJobTemplateOutput 

type GetJobTemplateOutput struct {

	// A job template is a pre-made set of encoding instructions that you can use
	// to quickly create a job.
	JobTemplate *JobTemplate `locationName:"jobTemplate" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful get job template requests will return an OK message and the job template JSON.

func (GetJobTemplateOutput) GoString 

func (s GetJobTemplateOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*GetJobTemplateOutput) SetJobTemplate 

func (s *GetJobTemplateOutput) SetJobTemplate(v *JobTemplate) *GetJobTemplateOutput

SetJobTemplate sets the JobTemplate field's value.

func (GetJobTemplateOutput) String 

func (s GetJobTemplateOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type GetPresetInput 

type GetPresetInput struct {

	// The name of the preset.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Query a preset by sending a request with the preset name.

func (GetPresetInput) GoString 

func (s GetPresetInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*GetPresetInput) SetName 

func (s *GetPresetInput) SetName(v string) *GetPresetInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (GetPresetInput) String 

func (s GetPresetInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*GetPresetInput) Validate 

func (s *GetPresetInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type GetPresetOutput 

type GetPresetOutput struct {

	// A preset is a collection of preconfigured media conversion settings that
	// you want MediaConvert to apply to the output during the conversion process.
	Preset *Preset `locationName:"preset" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful get preset requests will return an OK message and the preset JSON.

func (GetPresetOutput) GoString 

func (s GetPresetOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*GetPresetOutput) SetPreset 

func (s *GetPresetOutput) SetPreset(v *Preset) *GetPresetOutput

SetPreset sets the Preset field's value.

func (GetPresetOutput) String 

func (s GetPresetOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type GetQueueInput 

type GetQueueInput struct {

	// The name of the queue that you want information about.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Get information about a queue by sending a request with the queue name.

func (GetQueueInput) GoString 

func (s GetQueueInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*GetQueueInput) SetName 

func (s *GetQueueInput) SetName(v string) *GetQueueInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (GetQueueInput) String 

func (s GetQueueInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*GetQueueInput) Validate 

func (s *GetQueueInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type GetQueueOutput 

type GetQueueOutput struct {

	// You can use queues to manage the resources that are available to your AWS
	// account for running multiple transcoding jobs at the same time. If you don't
	// specify a queue, the service sends all jobs through the default queue. For
	// more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/working-with-queues.html.
	Queue *Queue `locationName:"queue" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful get queue requests return an OK message and information about the queue in JSON.

func (GetQueueOutput) GoString 

func (s GetQueueOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*GetQueueOutput) SetQueue 

func (s *GetQueueOutput) SetQueue(v *Queue) *GetQueueOutput

SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.

func (GetQueueOutput) String 

func (s GetQueueOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type H264QvbrSettings added in v1.99.0 

type H264QvbrSettings struct {

	// Use this setting only when Rate control mode is QVBR and Quality tuning level
	// is Multi-pass HQ. For Max average bitrate values suited to the complexity
	// of your input video, the service limits the average bitrate of the video
	// part of this output to the value that you choose. That is, the total size
	// of the video element is less than or equal to the value you set multiplied
	// by the number of seconds of encoded output.
	MaxAverageBitrate *int64 `locationName:"maxAverageBitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Required when you use QVBR rate control mode. That is, when you specify qvbrSettings
	// within h264Settings. Specify the target quality level for this output, from
	// 1 to 10. Use higher numbers for greater quality. Level 10 results in nearly
	// lossless compression. The quality level for most broadcast-quality transcodes
	// is between 6 and 9.
	QvbrQualityLevel *int64 `locationName:"qvbrQualityLevel" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for quality-defined variable bitrate encoding with the H.264 codec. Required when you set Rate control mode to QVBR. Not valid when you set Rate control mode to a value other than QVBR, or when you don't define Rate control mode.

func (H264QvbrSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s H264QvbrSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*H264QvbrSettings) SetMaxAverageBitrate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *H264QvbrSettings) SetMaxAverageBitrate(v int64) *H264QvbrSettings

SetMaxAverageBitrate sets the MaxAverageBitrate field's value.

func (*H264QvbrSettings) SetQvbrQualityLevel added in v1.99.0 

func (s *H264QvbrSettings) SetQvbrQualityLevel(v int64) *H264QvbrSettings

SetQvbrQualityLevel sets the QvbrQualityLevel field's value.

func (H264QvbrSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s H264QvbrSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*H264QvbrSettings) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *H264QvbrSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type H264Settings 

type H264Settings struct {

	// Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual
	// quality.
	AdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"adaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H264AdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Specify the average bitrate in bits per second. Required for VBR and CBR.
	// For MS Smooth outputs, bitrates must be unique when rounded down to the nearest
	// multiple of 1000.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Specify an H.264 level that is consistent with your output video settings.
	// If you aren't sure what level to specify, choose Auto (AUTO).
	CodecLevel *string `locationName:"codecLevel" type:"string" enum:"H264CodecLevel"`

	// H.264 Profile. High 4:2:2 and 10-bit profiles are only available with the
	// AVC-I License.
	CodecProfile *string `locationName:"codecProfile" type:"string" enum:"H264CodecProfile"`

	// Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content.
	// This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information
	// based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames
	// for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the
	// value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).
	DynamicSubGop *string `locationName:"dynamicSubGop" type:"string" enum:"H264DynamicSubGop"`

	// Entropy encoding mode. Use CABAC (must be in Main or High profile) or CAVLC.
	EntropyEncoding *string `locationName:"entropyEncoding" type:"string" enum:"H264EntropyEncoding"`

	// Choosing FORCE_FIELD disables PAFF encoding for interlaced outputs.
	FieldEncoding *string `locationName:"fieldEncoding" type:"string" enum:"H264FieldEncoding"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame to reduce flicker or 'pop' on I-frames.
	FlickerAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"flickerAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
	// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
	// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
	// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
	// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
	// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
	// job specification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
	// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
	// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
	// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
	// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
	FramerateControl *string `locationName:"framerateControl" type:"string" enum:"H264FramerateControl"`

	// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
	FramerateConversionAlgorithm *string `locationName:"framerateConversionAlgorithm" type:"string" enum:"H264FramerateConversionAlgorithm"`

	// When you use the API for transcode jobs that use frame rate conversion, specify
	// the frame rate as a fraction. For example, 24000 / 1001 = 23.976 fps. Use
	// FramerateDenominator to specify the denominator of this fraction. In this
	// example, use 1001 for the value of FramerateDenominator. When you use the
	// console for transcode jobs that use frame rate conversion, provide the value
	// as a decimal number for Framerate. In this example, specify 23.976.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Frame rate numerator - frame rate is a fraction, e.g. 24000 / 1001 = 23.976
	// fps.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// If enable, use reference B frames for GOP structures that have B frames >
	// 1.
	GopBReference *string `locationName:"gopBReference" type:"string" enum:"H264GopBReference"`

	// Frequency of closed GOPs. In streaming applications, it is recommended that
	// this be set to 1 so a decoder joining mid-stream will receive an IDR frame
	// as quickly as possible. Setting this value to 0 will break output segmenting.
	GopClosedCadence *int64 `locationName:"gopClosedCadence" type:"integer"`

	// GOP Length (keyframe interval) in frames or seconds. Must be greater than
	// zero.
	GopSize *float64 `locationName:"gopSize" type:"double"`

	// Indicates if the GOP Size in H264 is specified in frames or seconds. If seconds
	// the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.
	GopSizeUnits *string `locationName:"gopSizeUnits" type:"string" enum:"H264GopSizeUnits"`

	// Percentage of the buffer that should initially be filled (HRD buffer model).
	HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferInitialFillPercentage" type:"integer"`

	// Size of buffer (HRD buffer model) in bits. For example, enter five megabits
	// as 5000000.
	HrdBufferSize *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferSize" type:"integer"`

	// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
	// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
	// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
	// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
	// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
	// behavior depends on the input scan type, as follows. - If the source is interlaced,
	// the output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will
	// follow the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first"
	// and "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will
	// be interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
	// on which of the Follow options you chose.
	InterlaceMode *string `locationName:"interlaceMode" type:"string" enum:"H264InterlaceMode"`

	// Maximum bitrate in bits/second. For example, enter five megabits per second
	// as 5000000. Required when Rate control mode is QVBR.
	MaxBitrate *int64 `locationName:"maxBitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Enforces separation between repeated (cadence) I-frames and I-frames inserted
	// by Scene Change Detection. If a scene change I-frame is within I-interval
	// frames of a cadence I-frame, the GOP is shrunk and/or stretched to the scene
	// change I-frame. GOP stretch requires enabling lookahead as well as setting
	// I-interval. The normal cadence resumes for the next GOP. This setting is
	// only used when Scene Change Detect is enabled. Note: Maximum GOP stretch
	// = GOP size + Min-I-interval - 1
	MinIInterval *int64 `locationName:"minIInterval" type:"integer"`

	// Number of B-frames between reference frames.
	NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames *int64 `locationName:"numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames" type:"integer"`

	// Number of reference frames to use. The encoder may use more than requested
	// if using B-frames and/or interlaced encoding.
	NumberReferenceFrames *int64 `locationName:"numberReferenceFrames" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the
	// pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing
	// Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.
	ParControl *string `locationName:"parControl" type:"string" enum:"H264ParControl"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio denominator.
	ParDenominator *int64 `locationName:"parDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio numerator.
	ParNumerator *int64 `locationName:"parNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use Quality tuning level (H264QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to
	// use fast single-pass, high-quality singlepass, or high-quality multipass
	// video encoding.
	QualityTuningLevel *string `locationName:"qualityTuningLevel" type:"string" enum:"H264QualityTuningLevel"`

	// Settings for quality-defined variable bitrate encoding with the H.264 codec.
	// Required when you set Rate control mode to QVBR. Not valid when you set Rate
	// control mode to a value other than QVBR, or when you don't define Rate control
	// mode.
	QvbrSettings *H264QvbrSettings `locationName:"qvbrSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Use this setting to specify whether this output has a variable bitrate (VBR),
	// constant bitrate (CBR) or quality-defined variable bitrate (QVBR).
	RateControlMode *string `locationName:"rateControlMode" type:"string" enum:"H264RateControlMode"`

	// Places a PPS header on each encoded picture, even if repeated.
	RepeatPps *string `locationName:"repeatPps" type:"string" enum:"H264RepeatPps"`

	// Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).
	SceneChangeDetect *string `locationName:"sceneChangeDetect" type:"string" enum:"H264SceneChangeDetect"`

	// Number of slices per picture. Must be less than or equal to the number of
	// macroblock rows for progressive pictures, and less than or equal to half
	// the number of macroblock rows for interlaced pictures.
	Slices *int64 `locationName:"slices" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
	// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
	SlowPal *string `locationName:"slowPal" type:"string" enum:"H264SlowPal"`

	// Softness. Selects quantizer matrix, larger values reduce high-frequency content
	// in the encoded image.
	Softness *int64 `locationName:"softness" type:"integer"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content
	// complexity.
	SpatialAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"spatialAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Produces a bitstream compliant with SMPTE RP-2027.
	Syntax *string `locationName:"syntax" type:"string" enum:"H264Syntax"`

	// This field applies only if the Streams > Advanced > Framerate (framerate)
	// field is set to 29.970. This field works with the Streams > Advanced > Preprocessors
	// > Deinterlacer field (deinterlace_mode) and the Streams > Advanced > Interlaced
	// Mode field (interlace_mode) to identify the scan type for the output: Progressive,
	// Interlaced, Hard Telecine or Soft Telecine. - Hard: produces 29.97i output
	// from 23.976 input. - Soft: produces 23.976; the player converts this output
	// to 29.97i.
	Telecine *string `locationName:"telecine" type:"string" enum:"H264Telecine"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content
	// complexity.
	TemporalAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"temporalAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Inserts timecode for each frame as 4 bytes of an unregistered SEI message.
	UnregisteredSeiTimecode *string `locationName:"unregisteredSeiTimecode" type:"string" enum:"H264UnregisteredSeiTimecode"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to the value H_264.

func (H264Settings) GoString 

func (s H264Settings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*H264Settings) SetAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *H264Settings) SetAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H264Settings

SetAdaptiveQuantization sets the AdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetBitrate 

func (s *H264Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *H264Settings

SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetCodecLevel 

func (s *H264Settings) SetCodecLevel(v string) *H264Settings

SetCodecLevel sets the CodecLevel field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetCodecProfile 

func (s *H264Settings) SetCodecProfile(v string) *H264Settings

SetCodecProfile sets the CodecProfile field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetDynamicSubGop added in v1.99.0 

func (s *H264Settings) SetDynamicSubGop(v string) *H264Settings

SetDynamicSubGop sets the DynamicSubGop field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetEntropyEncoding 

func (s *H264Settings) SetEntropyEncoding(v string) *H264Settings

SetEntropyEncoding sets the EntropyEncoding field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetFieldEncoding 

func (s *H264Settings) SetFieldEncoding(v string) *H264Settings

SetFieldEncoding sets the FieldEncoding field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetFlickerAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *H264Settings) SetFlickerAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H264Settings

SetFlickerAdaptiveQuantization sets the FlickerAdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetFramerateControl 

func (s *H264Settings) SetFramerateControl(v string) *H264Settings

SetFramerateControl sets the FramerateControl field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm 

func (s *H264Settings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm(v string) *H264Settings

SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm sets the FramerateConversionAlgorithm field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetFramerateDenominator 

func (s *H264Settings) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *H264Settings

SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetFramerateNumerator 

func (s *H264Settings) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *H264Settings

SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetGopBReference 

func (s *H264Settings) SetGopBReference(v string) *H264Settings

SetGopBReference sets the GopBReference field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetGopClosedCadence 

func (s *H264Settings) SetGopClosedCadence(v int64) *H264Settings

SetGopClosedCadence sets the GopClosedCadence field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetGopSize 

func (s *H264Settings) SetGopSize(v float64) *H264Settings

SetGopSize sets the GopSize field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetGopSizeUnits 

func (s *H264Settings) SetGopSizeUnits(v string) *H264Settings

SetGopSizeUnits sets the GopSizeUnits field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage 

func (s *H264Settings) SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage(v int64) *H264Settings

SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage sets the HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetHrdBufferSize 

func (s *H264Settings) SetHrdBufferSize(v int64) *H264Settings

SetHrdBufferSize sets the HrdBufferSize field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetInterlaceMode 

func (s *H264Settings) SetInterlaceMode(v string) *H264Settings

SetInterlaceMode sets the InterlaceMode field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetMaxBitrate 

func (s *H264Settings) SetMaxBitrate(v int64) *H264Settings

SetMaxBitrate sets the MaxBitrate field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetMinIInterval 

func (s *H264Settings) SetMinIInterval(v int64) *H264Settings

SetMinIInterval sets the MinIInterval field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames 

func (s *H264Settings) SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames(v int64) *H264Settings

SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames sets the NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetNumberReferenceFrames 

func (s *H264Settings) SetNumberReferenceFrames(v int64) *H264Settings

SetNumberReferenceFrames sets the NumberReferenceFrames field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetParControl 

func (s *H264Settings) SetParControl(v string) *H264Settings

SetParControl sets the ParControl field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetParDenominator 

func (s *H264Settings) SetParDenominator(v int64) *H264Settings

SetParDenominator sets the ParDenominator field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetParNumerator 

func (s *H264Settings) SetParNumerator(v int64) *H264Settings

SetParNumerator sets the ParNumerator field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetQualityTuningLevel 

func (s *H264Settings) SetQualityTuningLevel(v string) *H264Settings

SetQualityTuningLevel sets the QualityTuningLevel field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetQvbrSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *H264Settings) SetQvbrSettings(v *H264QvbrSettings) *H264Settings

SetQvbrSettings sets the QvbrSettings field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetRateControlMode 

func (s *H264Settings) SetRateControlMode(v string) *H264Settings

SetRateControlMode sets the RateControlMode field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetRepeatPps 

func (s *H264Settings) SetRepeatPps(v string) *H264Settings

SetRepeatPps sets the RepeatPps field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetSceneChangeDetect 

func (s *H264Settings) SetSceneChangeDetect(v string) *H264Settings

SetSceneChangeDetect sets the SceneChangeDetect field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetSlices 

func (s *H264Settings) SetSlices(v int64) *H264Settings

SetSlices sets the Slices field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetSlowPal 

func (s *H264Settings) SetSlowPal(v string) *H264Settings

SetSlowPal sets the SlowPal field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetSoftness 

func (s *H264Settings) SetSoftness(v int64) *H264Settings

SetSoftness sets the Softness field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *H264Settings) SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H264Settings

SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization sets the SpatialAdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetSyntax 

func (s *H264Settings) SetSyntax(v string) *H264Settings

SetSyntax sets the Syntax field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetTelecine 

func (s *H264Settings) SetTelecine(v string) *H264Settings

SetTelecine sets the Telecine field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *H264Settings) SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H264Settings

SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization sets the TemporalAdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (*H264Settings) SetUnregisteredSeiTimecode 

func (s *H264Settings) SetUnregisteredSeiTimecode(v string) *H264Settings

SetUnregisteredSeiTimecode sets the UnregisteredSeiTimecode field's value.

func (H264Settings) String 

func (s H264Settings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*H264Settings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *H264Settings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type H265QvbrSettings added in v1.99.0 

type H265QvbrSettings struct {

	// Use this setting only when Rate control mode is QVBR and Quality tuning level
	// is Multi-pass HQ. For Max average bitrate values suited to the complexity
	// of your input video, the service limits the average bitrate of the video
	// part of this output to the value that you choose. That is, the total size
	// of the video element is less than or equal to the value you set multiplied
	// by the number of seconds of encoded output.
	MaxAverageBitrate *int64 `locationName:"maxAverageBitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Required when you use QVBR rate control mode. That is, when you specify qvbrSettings
	// within h265Settings. Specify the target quality level for this output, from
	// 1 to 10. Use higher numbers for greater quality. Level 10 results in nearly
	// lossless compression. The quality level for most broadcast-quality transcodes
	// is between 6 and 9.
	QvbrQualityLevel *int64 `locationName:"qvbrQualityLevel" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for quality-defined variable bitrate encoding with the H.265 codec. Required when you set Rate control mode to QVBR. Not valid when you set Rate control mode to a value other than QVBR, or when you don't define Rate control mode.

func (H265QvbrSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s H265QvbrSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*H265QvbrSettings) SetMaxAverageBitrate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *H265QvbrSettings) SetMaxAverageBitrate(v int64) *H265QvbrSettings

SetMaxAverageBitrate sets the MaxAverageBitrate field's value.

func (*H265QvbrSettings) SetQvbrQualityLevel added in v1.99.0 

func (s *H265QvbrSettings) SetQvbrQualityLevel(v int64) *H265QvbrSettings

SetQvbrQualityLevel sets the QvbrQualityLevel field's value.

func (H265QvbrSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s H265QvbrSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*H265QvbrSettings) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *H265QvbrSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type H265Settings 

type H265Settings struct {

	// Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual
	// quality.
	AdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"adaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H265AdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Enables Alternate Transfer Function SEI message for outputs using Hybrid
	// Log Gamma (HLG) Electro-Optical Transfer Function (EOTF).
	AlternateTransferFunctionSei *string `locationName:"alternateTransferFunctionSei" type:"string" enum:"H265AlternateTransferFunctionSei"`

	// Specify the average bitrate in bits per second. Required for VBR and CBR.
	// For MS Smooth outputs, bitrates must be unique when rounded down to the nearest
	// multiple of 1000.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// H.265 Level.
	CodecLevel *string `locationName:"codecLevel" type:"string" enum:"H265CodecLevel"`

	// Represents the Profile and Tier, per the HEVC (H.265) specification. Selections
	// are grouped as [Profile] / [Tier], so "Main/High" represents Main Profile
	// with High Tier. 4:2:2 profiles are only available with the HEVC 4:2:2 License.
	CodecProfile *string `locationName:"codecProfile" type:"string" enum:"H265CodecProfile"`

	// Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content.
	// This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information
	// based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames
	// for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the
	// value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).
	DynamicSubGop *string `locationName:"dynamicSubGop" type:"string" enum:"H265DynamicSubGop"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame to reduce flicker or 'pop' on I-frames.
	FlickerAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"flickerAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
	// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
	// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
	// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
	// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
	// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
	// job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
	// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
	// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
	// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
	// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
	FramerateControl *string `locationName:"framerateControl" type:"string" enum:"H265FramerateControl"`

	// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
	FramerateConversionAlgorithm *string `locationName:"framerateConversionAlgorithm" type:"string" enum:"H265FramerateConversionAlgorithm"`

	// Frame rate denominator.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Frame rate numerator - frame rate is a fraction, e.g. 24000 / 1001 = 23.976
	// fps.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// If enable, use reference B frames for GOP structures that have B frames >
	// 1.
	GopBReference *string `locationName:"gopBReference" type:"string" enum:"H265GopBReference"`

	// Frequency of closed GOPs. In streaming applications, it is recommended that
	// this be set to 1 so a decoder joining mid-stream will receive an IDR frame
	// as quickly as possible. Setting this value to 0 will break output segmenting.
	GopClosedCadence *int64 `locationName:"gopClosedCadence" type:"integer"`

	// GOP Length (keyframe interval) in frames or seconds. Must be greater than
	// zero.
	GopSize *float64 `locationName:"gopSize" type:"double"`

	// Indicates if the GOP Size in H265 is specified in frames or seconds. If seconds
	// the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.
	GopSizeUnits *string `locationName:"gopSizeUnits" type:"string" enum:"H265GopSizeUnits"`

	// Percentage of the buffer that should initially be filled (HRD buffer model).
	HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferInitialFillPercentage" type:"integer"`

	// Size of buffer (HRD buffer model) in bits. For example, enter five megabits
	// as 5000000.
	HrdBufferSize *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferSize" type:"integer"`

	// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
	// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
	// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
	// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
	// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
	// behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the
	// output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow
	// the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and
	// "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be
	// interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
	// on which of the Follow options you chose.
	InterlaceMode *string `locationName:"interlaceMode" type:"string" enum:"H265InterlaceMode"`

	// Maximum bitrate in bits/second. For example, enter five megabits per second
	// as 5000000. Required when Rate control mode is QVBR.
	MaxBitrate *int64 `locationName:"maxBitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Enforces separation between repeated (cadence) I-frames and I-frames inserted
	// by Scene Change Detection. If a scene change I-frame is within I-interval
	// frames of a cadence I-frame, the GOP is shrunk and/or stretched to the scene
	// change I-frame. GOP stretch requires enabling lookahead as well as setting
	// I-interval. The normal cadence resumes for the next GOP. This setting is
	// only used when Scene Change Detect is enabled. Note: Maximum GOP stretch
	// = GOP size + Min-I-interval - 1
	MinIInterval *int64 `locationName:"minIInterval" type:"integer"`

	// Number of B-frames between reference frames.
	NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames *int64 `locationName:"numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames" type:"integer"`

	// Number of reference frames to use. The encoder may use more than requested
	// if using B-frames and/or interlaced encoding.
	NumberReferenceFrames *int64 `locationName:"numberReferenceFrames" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the
	// pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing
	// Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.
	ParControl *string `locationName:"parControl" type:"string" enum:"H265ParControl"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio denominator.
	ParDenominator *int64 `locationName:"parDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio numerator.
	ParNumerator *int64 `locationName:"parNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use Quality tuning level (H265QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to
	// use fast single-pass, high-quality singlepass, or high-quality multipass
	// video encoding.
	QualityTuningLevel *string `locationName:"qualityTuningLevel" type:"string" enum:"H265QualityTuningLevel"`

	// Settings for quality-defined variable bitrate encoding with the H.265 codec.
	// Required when you set Rate control mode to QVBR. Not valid when you set Rate
	// control mode to a value other than QVBR, or when you don't define Rate control
	// mode.
	QvbrSettings *H265QvbrSettings `locationName:"qvbrSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Use this setting to specify whether this output has a variable bitrate (VBR),
	// constant bitrate (CBR) or quality-defined variable bitrate (QVBR).
	RateControlMode *string `locationName:"rateControlMode" type:"string" enum:"H265RateControlMode"`

	// Specify Sample Adaptive Offset (SAO) filter strength. Adaptive mode dynamically
	// selects best strength based on content
	SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode *string `locationName:"sampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode" type:"string" enum:"H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode"`

	// Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).
	SceneChangeDetect *string `locationName:"sceneChangeDetect" type:"string" enum:"H265SceneChangeDetect"`

	// Number of slices per picture. Must be less than or equal to the number of
	// macroblock rows for progressive pictures, and less than or equal to half
	// the number of macroblock rows for interlaced pictures.
	Slices *int64 `locationName:"slices" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
	// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
	SlowPal *string `locationName:"slowPal" type:"string" enum:"H265SlowPal"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content
	// complexity.
	SpatialAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"spatialAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// This field applies only if the Streams > Advanced > Framerate (framerate)
	// field is set to 29.970. This field works with the Streams > Advanced > Preprocessors
	// > Deinterlacer field (deinterlace_mode) and the Streams > Advanced > Interlaced
	// Mode field (interlace_mode) to identify the scan type for the output: Progressive,
	// Interlaced, Hard Telecine or Soft Telecine. - Hard: produces 29.97i output
	// from 23.976 input. - Soft: produces 23.976; the player converts this output
	// to 29.97i.
	Telecine *string `locationName:"telecine" type:"string" enum:"H265Telecine"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content
	// complexity.
	TemporalAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"temporalAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Enables temporal layer identifiers in the encoded bitstream. Up to 3 layers
	// are supported depending on GOP structure: I- and P-frames form one layer,
	// reference B-frames can form a second layer and non-reference b-frames can
	// form a third layer. Decoders can optionally decode only the lower temporal
	// layers to generate a lower frame rate output. For example, given a bitstream
	// with temporal IDs and with b-frames = 1 (i.e. IbPbPb display order), a decoder
	// could decode all the frames for full frame rate output or only the I and
	// P frames (lowest temporal layer) for a half frame rate output.
	TemporalIds *string `locationName:"temporalIds" type:"string" enum:"H265TemporalIds"`

	// Enable use of tiles, allowing horizontal as well as vertical subdivision
	// of the encoded pictures.
	Tiles *string `locationName:"tiles" type:"string" enum:"H265Tiles"`

	// Inserts timecode for each frame as 4 bytes of an unregistered SEI message.
	UnregisteredSeiTimecode *string `locationName:"unregisteredSeiTimecode" type:"string" enum:"H265UnregisteredSeiTimecode"`

	// Use this setting only for outputs encoded with H.265 that are in CMAF or
	// DASH output groups. If you include writeMp4PackagingType in your JSON job
	// specification for other outputs, your video might not work properly with
	// downstream systems and video players. If the location of parameter set NAL
	// units don't matter in your workflow, ignore this setting. The service defaults
	// to marking your output as HEV1. Choose HVC1 to mark your output as HVC1.
	// This makes your output compliant with this specification: ISO IECJTC1 SC29
	// N13798 Text ISO/IEC FDIS 14496-15 3rd Edition. For these outputs, the service
	// stores parameter set NAL units in the sample headers but not in the samples
	// directly. Keep the default HEV1 to mark your output as HEV1. For these outputs,
	// the service writes parameter set NAL units directly into the samples.
	WriteMp4PackagingType *string `locationName:"writeMp4PackagingType" type:"string" enum:"H265WriteMp4PackagingType"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for H265 codec

func (H265Settings) GoString 

func (s H265Settings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*H265Settings) SetAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *H265Settings) SetAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H265Settings

SetAdaptiveQuantization sets the AdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetAlternateTransferFunctionSei 

func (s *H265Settings) SetAlternateTransferFunctionSei(v string) *H265Settings

SetAlternateTransferFunctionSei sets the AlternateTransferFunctionSei field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetBitrate 

func (s *H265Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *H265Settings

SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetCodecLevel 

func (s *H265Settings) SetCodecLevel(v string) *H265Settings

SetCodecLevel sets the CodecLevel field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetCodecProfile 

func (s *H265Settings) SetCodecProfile(v string) *H265Settings

SetCodecProfile sets the CodecProfile field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetDynamicSubGop added in v1.99.0 

func (s *H265Settings) SetDynamicSubGop(v string) *H265Settings

SetDynamicSubGop sets the DynamicSubGop field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetFlickerAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *H265Settings) SetFlickerAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H265Settings

SetFlickerAdaptiveQuantization sets the FlickerAdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetFramerateControl 

func (s *H265Settings) SetFramerateControl(v string) *H265Settings

SetFramerateControl sets the FramerateControl field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm 

func (s *H265Settings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm(v string) *H265Settings

SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm sets the FramerateConversionAlgorithm field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetFramerateDenominator 

func (s *H265Settings) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *H265Settings

SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetFramerateNumerator 

func (s *H265Settings) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *H265Settings

SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetGopBReference 

func (s *H265Settings) SetGopBReference(v string) *H265Settings

SetGopBReference sets the GopBReference field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetGopClosedCadence 

func (s *H265Settings) SetGopClosedCadence(v int64) *H265Settings

SetGopClosedCadence sets the GopClosedCadence field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetGopSize 

func (s *H265Settings) SetGopSize(v float64) *H265Settings

SetGopSize sets the GopSize field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetGopSizeUnits 

func (s *H265Settings) SetGopSizeUnits(v string) *H265Settings

SetGopSizeUnits sets the GopSizeUnits field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage 

func (s *H265Settings) SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage(v int64) *H265Settings

SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage sets the HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetHrdBufferSize 

func (s *H265Settings) SetHrdBufferSize(v int64) *H265Settings

SetHrdBufferSize sets the HrdBufferSize field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetInterlaceMode 

func (s *H265Settings) SetInterlaceMode(v string) *H265Settings

SetInterlaceMode sets the InterlaceMode field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetMaxBitrate 

func (s *H265Settings) SetMaxBitrate(v int64) *H265Settings

SetMaxBitrate sets the MaxBitrate field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetMinIInterval 

func (s *H265Settings) SetMinIInterval(v int64) *H265Settings

SetMinIInterval sets the MinIInterval field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames 

func (s *H265Settings) SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames(v int64) *H265Settings

SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames sets the NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetNumberReferenceFrames 

func (s *H265Settings) SetNumberReferenceFrames(v int64) *H265Settings

SetNumberReferenceFrames sets the NumberReferenceFrames field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetParControl 

func (s *H265Settings) SetParControl(v string) *H265Settings

SetParControl sets the ParControl field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetParDenominator 

func (s *H265Settings) SetParDenominator(v int64) *H265Settings

SetParDenominator sets the ParDenominator field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetParNumerator 

func (s *H265Settings) SetParNumerator(v int64) *H265Settings

SetParNumerator sets the ParNumerator field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetQualityTuningLevel 

func (s *H265Settings) SetQualityTuningLevel(v string) *H265Settings

SetQualityTuningLevel sets the QualityTuningLevel field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetQvbrSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *H265Settings) SetQvbrSettings(v *H265QvbrSettings) *H265Settings

SetQvbrSettings sets the QvbrSettings field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetRateControlMode 

func (s *H265Settings) SetRateControlMode(v string) *H265Settings

SetRateControlMode sets the RateControlMode field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetSampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode 

func (s *H265Settings) SetSampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode(v string) *H265Settings

SetSampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode sets the SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetSceneChangeDetect 

func (s *H265Settings) SetSceneChangeDetect(v string) *H265Settings

SetSceneChangeDetect sets the SceneChangeDetect field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetSlices 

func (s *H265Settings) SetSlices(v int64) *H265Settings

SetSlices sets the Slices field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetSlowPal 

func (s *H265Settings) SetSlowPal(v string) *H265Settings

SetSlowPal sets the SlowPal field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *H265Settings) SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H265Settings

SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization sets the SpatialAdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetTelecine 

func (s *H265Settings) SetTelecine(v string) *H265Settings

SetTelecine sets the Telecine field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *H265Settings) SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H265Settings

SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization sets the TemporalAdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetTemporalIds 

func (s *H265Settings) SetTemporalIds(v string) *H265Settings

SetTemporalIds sets the TemporalIds field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetTiles 

func (s *H265Settings) SetTiles(v string) *H265Settings

SetTiles sets the Tiles field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetUnregisteredSeiTimecode 

func (s *H265Settings) SetUnregisteredSeiTimecode(v string) *H265Settings

SetUnregisteredSeiTimecode sets the UnregisteredSeiTimecode field's value.

func (*H265Settings) SetWriteMp4PackagingType added in v1.14.0 

func (s *H265Settings) SetWriteMp4PackagingType(v string) *H265Settings

SetWriteMp4PackagingType sets the WriteMp4PackagingType field's value.

func (H265Settings) String 

func (s H265Settings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*H265Settings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *H265Settings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Hdr10Metadata 

type Hdr10Metadata struct {

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	BluePrimaryX *int64 `locationName:"bluePrimaryX" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	BluePrimaryY *int64 `locationName:"bluePrimaryY" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	GreenPrimaryX *int64 `locationName:"greenPrimaryX" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	GreenPrimaryY *int64 `locationName:"greenPrimaryY" type:"integer"`

	// Maximum light level among all samples in the coded video sequence, in units
	// of candelas per square meter.
	MaxContentLightLevel *int64 `locationName:"maxContentLightLevel" type:"integer"`

	// Maximum average light level of any frame in the coded video sequence, in
	// units of candelas per square meter.
	MaxFrameAverageLightLevel *int64 `locationName:"maxFrameAverageLightLevel" type:"integer"`

	// Nominal maximum mastering display luminance in units of of 0.0001 candelas
	// per square meter.
	MaxLuminance *int64 `locationName:"maxLuminance" type:"integer"`

	// Nominal minimum mastering display luminance in units of of 0.0001 candelas
	// per square meter
	MinLuminance *int64 `locationName:"minLuminance" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	RedPrimaryX *int64 `locationName:"redPrimaryX" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	RedPrimaryY *int64 `locationName:"redPrimaryY" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	WhitePointX *int64 `locationName:"whitePointX" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	WhitePointY *int64 `locationName:"whitePointY" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Use the "HDR master display information" (Hdr10Metadata) settings to correct HDR metadata or to provide missing metadata. These values vary depending on the input video and must be provided by a color grader. Range is 0 to 50,000; each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that these settings are not color correction. Note that if you are creating HDR outputs inside of an HLS CMAF package, to comply with the Apple specification, you must use the following settings. Set "MP4 packaging type" (writeMp4PackagingType) to HVC1 (HVC1). Set "Profile" (H265Settings > codecProfile) to Main10/High (MAIN10_HIGH). Set "Level" (H265Settings > codecLevel) to 5 (LEVEL_5).

func (Hdr10Metadata) GoString 

func (s Hdr10Metadata) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetBluePrimaryX 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetBluePrimaryX(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetBluePrimaryX sets the BluePrimaryX field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetBluePrimaryY 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetBluePrimaryY(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetBluePrimaryY sets the BluePrimaryY field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetGreenPrimaryX 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetGreenPrimaryX(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetGreenPrimaryX sets the GreenPrimaryX field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetGreenPrimaryY 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetGreenPrimaryY(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetGreenPrimaryY sets the GreenPrimaryY field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetMaxContentLightLevel 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetMaxContentLightLevel(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetMaxContentLightLevel sets the MaxContentLightLevel field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetMaxFrameAverageLightLevel 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetMaxFrameAverageLightLevel(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetMaxFrameAverageLightLevel sets the MaxFrameAverageLightLevel field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetMaxLuminance 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetMaxLuminance(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetMaxLuminance sets the MaxLuminance field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetMinLuminance 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetMinLuminance(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetMinLuminance sets the MinLuminance field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetRedPrimaryX 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetRedPrimaryX(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetRedPrimaryX sets the RedPrimaryX field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetRedPrimaryY 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetRedPrimaryY(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetRedPrimaryY sets the RedPrimaryY field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetWhitePointX 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetWhitePointX(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetWhitePointX sets the WhitePointX field's value.

func (*Hdr10Metadata) SetWhitePointY 

func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetWhitePointY(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata

SetWhitePointY sets the WhitePointY field's value.

func (Hdr10Metadata) String 

func (s Hdr10Metadata) String() string

String returns the string representation

type HlsCaptionLanguageMapping 

type HlsCaptionLanguageMapping struct {

	// Caption channel.
	CaptionChannel *int64 `locationName:"captionChannel" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the language for this caption channel, using the ISO 639-2 or ISO
	// 639-3 three-letter language code
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// Specify the language, using the ISO 639-2 three-letter code listed at https://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/php/code_list.php.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Caption language description.
	LanguageDescription *string `locationName:"languageDescription" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Caption Language Mapping

func (HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) GoString 

func (s HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetCaptionChannel 

func (s *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetCaptionChannel(v int64) *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping

SetCaptionChannel sets the CaptionChannel field's value.

func (*HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetCustomLanguageCode added in v1.14.8 

func (s *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping

SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.

func (*HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetLanguageCode 

func (s *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetLanguageCode(v string) *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping

SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.

func (*HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetLanguageDescription 

func (s *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetLanguageDescription(v string) *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping

SetLanguageDescription sets the LanguageDescription field's value.

func (HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) String 

func (s HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type HlsEncryptionSettings 

type HlsEncryptionSettings struct {

	// This is a 128-bit, 16-byte hex value represented by a 32-character text string.
	// If this parameter is not set then the Initialization Vector will follow the
	// segment number by default.
	ConstantInitializationVector *string `locationName:"constantInitializationVector" min:"32" type:"string"`

	// Encrypts the segments with the given encryption scheme. Leave blank to disable.
	// Selecting 'Disabled' in the web interface also disables encryption.
	EncryptionMethod *string `locationName:"encryptionMethod" type:"string" enum:"HlsEncryptionType"`

	// The Initialization Vector is a 128-bit number used in conjunction with the
	// key for encrypting blocks. If set to INCLUDE, Initialization Vector is listed
	// in the manifest. Otherwise Initialization Vector is not in the manifest.
	InitializationVectorInManifest *string `locationName:"initializationVectorInManifest" type:"string" enum:"HlsInitializationVectorInManifest"`

	// Enable this setting to insert the EXT-X-SESSION-KEY element into the master
	// playlist. This allows for offline Apple HLS FairPlay content protection.
	OfflineEncrypted *string `locationName:"offlineEncrypted" type:"string" enum:"HlsOfflineEncrypted"`

	// Settings for use with a SPEKE key provider
	SpekeKeyProvider *SpekeKeyProvider `locationName:"spekeKeyProvider" type:"structure"`

	// Use these settings to set up encryption with a static key provider.
	StaticKeyProvider *StaticKeyProvider `locationName:"staticKeyProvider" type:"structure"`

	// Indicates which type of key provider is used for encryption.
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"HlsKeyProviderType"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for HLS encryption

func (HlsEncryptionSettings) GoString 

func (s HlsEncryptionSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*HlsEncryptionSettings) SetConstantInitializationVector 

func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetConstantInitializationVector(v string) *HlsEncryptionSettings

SetConstantInitializationVector sets the ConstantInitializationVector field's value.

func (*HlsEncryptionSettings) SetEncryptionMethod 

func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetEncryptionMethod(v string) *HlsEncryptionSettings

SetEncryptionMethod sets the EncryptionMethod field's value.

func (*HlsEncryptionSettings) SetInitializationVectorInManifest 

func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetInitializationVectorInManifest(v string) *HlsEncryptionSettings

SetInitializationVectorInManifest sets the InitializationVectorInManifest field's value.

func (*HlsEncryptionSettings) SetOfflineEncrypted added in v1.99.0 

func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetOfflineEncrypted(v string) *HlsEncryptionSettings

SetOfflineEncrypted sets the OfflineEncrypted field's value.

func (*HlsEncryptionSettings) SetSpekeKeyProvider 

func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetSpekeKeyProvider(v *SpekeKeyProvider) *HlsEncryptionSettings

SetSpekeKeyProvider sets the SpekeKeyProvider field's value.

func (*HlsEncryptionSettings) SetStaticKeyProvider 

func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetStaticKeyProvider(v *StaticKeyProvider) *HlsEncryptionSettings

SetStaticKeyProvider sets the StaticKeyProvider field's value.

func (*HlsEncryptionSettings) SetType 

func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetType(v string) *HlsEncryptionSettings

SetType sets the Type field's value.

func (HlsEncryptionSettings) String 

func (s HlsEncryptionSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*HlsEncryptionSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type HlsGroupSettings 

type HlsGroupSettings struct {

	// Choose one or more ad marker types to decorate your Apple HLS manifest. This
	// setting does not determine whether SCTE-35 markers appear in the outputs
	// themselves.
	AdMarkers []*string `locationName:"adMarkers" type:"list"`

	// A partial URI prefix that will be prepended to each output in the media .m3u8
	// file. Can be used if base manifest is delivered from a different URL than
	// the main .m3u8 file.
	BaseUrl *string `locationName:"baseUrl" type:"string"`

	// Language to be used on Caption outputs
	CaptionLanguageMappings []*HlsCaptionLanguageMapping `locationName:"captionLanguageMappings" type:"list"`

	// Applies only to 608 Embedded output captions. Insert: Include CLOSED-CAPTIONS
	// lines in the manifest. Specify at least one language in the CC1 Language
	// Code field. One CLOSED-CAPTION line is added for each Language Code you specify.
	// Make sure to specify the languages in the order in which they appear in the
	// original source (if the source is embedded format) or the order of the caption
	// selectors (if the source is other than embedded). Otherwise, languages in
	// the manifest will not match up properly with the output captions. None: Include
	// CLOSED-CAPTIONS=NONE line in the manifest. Omit: Omit any CLOSED-CAPTIONS
	// line from the manifest.
	CaptionLanguageSetting *string `locationName:"captionLanguageSetting" type:"string" enum:"HlsCaptionLanguageSetting"`

	// When set to ENABLED, sets #EXT-X-ALLOW-CACHE:no tag, which prevents client
	// from saving media segments for later replay.
	ClientCache *string `locationName:"clientCache" type:"string" enum:"HlsClientCache"`

	// Specification to use (RFC-6381 or the default RFC-4281) during m3u8 playlist
	// generation.
	CodecSpecification *string `locationName:"codecSpecification" type:"string" enum:"HlsCodecSpecification"`

	// Use Destination (Destination) to specify the S3 output location and the output
	// filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify
	// the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input
	// file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the
	// first input file.
	Destination *string `locationName:"destination" type:"string"`

	// Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of
	// destination
	DestinationSettings *DestinationSettings `locationName:"destinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Indicates whether segments should be placed in subdirectories.
	DirectoryStructure *string `locationName:"directoryStructure" type:"string" enum:"HlsDirectoryStructure"`

	// DRM settings.
	Encryption *HlsEncryptionSettings `locationName:"encryption" type:"structure"`

	// When set to GZIP, compresses HLS playlist.
	ManifestCompression *string `locationName:"manifestCompression" type:"string" enum:"HlsManifestCompression"`

	// Indicates whether the output manifest should use floating point values for
	// segment duration.
	ManifestDurationFormat *string `locationName:"manifestDurationFormat" type:"string" enum:"HlsManifestDurationFormat"`

	// Keep this setting at the default value of 0, unless you are troubleshooting
	// a problem with how devices play back the end of your video asset. If you
	// know that player devices are hanging on the final segment of your video because
	// the length of your final segment is too short, use this setting to specify
	// a minimum final segment length, in seconds. Choose a value that is greater
	// than or equal to 1 and less than your segment length. When you specify a
	// value for this setting, the encoder will combine any final segment that is
	// shorter than the length that you specify with the previous segment. For example,
	// your segment length is 3 seconds and your final segment is .5 seconds without
	// a minimum final segment length; when you set the minimum final segment length
	// to 1, your final segment is 3.5 seconds.
	MinFinalSegmentLength *float64 `locationName:"minFinalSegmentLength" type:"double"`

	// When set, Minimum Segment Size is enforced by looking ahead and back within
	// the specified range for a nearby avail and extending the segment size if
	// needed.
	MinSegmentLength *int64 `locationName:"minSegmentLength" type:"integer"`

	// Indicates whether the .m3u8 manifest file should be generated for this HLS
	// output group.
	OutputSelection *string `locationName:"outputSelection" type:"string" enum:"HlsOutputSelection"`

	// Includes or excludes EXT-X-PROGRAM-DATE-TIME tag in .m3u8 manifest files.
	// The value is calculated as follows: either the program date and time are
	// initialized using the input timecode source, or the time is initialized using
	// the input timecode source and the date is initialized using the timestamp_offset.
	ProgramDateTime *string `locationName:"programDateTime" type:"string" enum:"HlsProgramDateTime"`

	// Period of insertion of EXT-X-PROGRAM-DATE-TIME entry, in seconds.
	ProgramDateTimePeriod *int64 `locationName:"programDateTimePeriod" type:"integer"`

	// When set to SINGLE_FILE, emits program as a single media resource (.ts) file,
	// uses #EXT-X-BYTERANGE tags to index segment for playback.
	SegmentControl *string `locationName:"segmentControl" type:"string" enum:"HlsSegmentControl"`

	// Length of MPEG-2 Transport Stream segments to create (in seconds). Note that
	// segments will end on the next keyframe after this number of seconds, so actual
	// segment length may be longer.
	SegmentLength *int64 `locationName:"segmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Number of segments to write to a subdirectory before starting a new one.
	// directoryStructure must be SINGLE_DIRECTORY for this setting to have an effect.
	SegmentsPerSubdirectory *int64 `locationName:"segmentsPerSubdirectory" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Include or exclude RESOLUTION attribute for video in EXT-X-STREAM-INF tag
	// of variant manifest.
	StreamInfResolution *string `locationName:"streamInfResolution" type:"string" enum:"HlsStreamInfResolution"`

	// Indicates ID3 frame that has the timecode.
	TimedMetadataId3Frame *string `locationName:"timedMetadataId3Frame" type:"string" enum:"HlsTimedMetadataId3Frame"`

	// Timed Metadata interval in seconds.
	TimedMetadataId3Period *int64 `locationName:"timedMetadataId3Period" type:"integer"`

	// Provides an extra millisecond delta offset to fine tune the timestamps.
	TimestampDeltaMilliseconds *int64 `locationName:"timestampDeltaMilliseconds" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to HLS_GROUP_SETTINGS.

func (HlsGroupSettings) GoString 

func (s HlsGroupSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetAdMarkers 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetAdMarkers(v []*string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetAdMarkers sets the AdMarkers field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetBaseUrl 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetBaseUrl(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetBaseUrl sets the BaseUrl field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetCaptionLanguageMappings 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetCaptionLanguageMappings(v []*HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) *HlsGroupSettings

SetCaptionLanguageMappings sets the CaptionLanguageMappings field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetCaptionLanguageSetting 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetCaptionLanguageSetting(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetCaptionLanguageSetting sets the CaptionLanguageSetting field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetClientCache 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetClientCache(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetClientCache sets the ClientCache field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetCodecSpecification 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetCodecSpecification(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetCodecSpecification sets the CodecSpecification field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetDestination 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetDestination(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetDestination sets the Destination field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetDestinationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetDestinationSettings(v *DestinationSettings) *HlsGroupSettings

SetDestinationSettings sets the DestinationSettings field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetDirectoryStructure 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetDirectoryStructure(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetDirectoryStructure sets the DirectoryStructure field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetEncryption 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetEncryption(v *HlsEncryptionSettings) *HlsGroupSettings

SetEncryption sets the Encryption field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetManifestCompression 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetManifestCompression(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetManifestCompression sets the ManifestCompression field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetManifestDurationFormat 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetManifestDurationFormat(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetManifestDurationFormat sets the ManifestDurationFormat field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetMinFinalSegmentLength added in v1.99.0 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetMinFinalSegmentLength(v float64) *HlsGroupSettings

SetMinFinalSegmentLength sets the MinFinalSegmentLength field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetMinSegmentLength 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetMinSegmentLength(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings

SetMinSegmentLength sets the MinSegmentLength field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetOutputSelection 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetOutputSelection(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetOutputSelection sets the OutputSelection field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetProgramDateTime 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetProgramDateTime(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetProgramDateTime sets the ProgramDateTime field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetProgramDateTimePeriod 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetProgramDateTimePeriod(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings

SetProgramDateTimePeriod sets the ProgramDateTimePeriod field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetSegmentControl 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetSegmentControl(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetSegmentControl sets the SegmentControl field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetSegmentLength 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetSegmentLength(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings

SetSegmentLength sets the SegmentLength field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetSegmentsPerSubdirectory 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetSegmentsPerSubdirectory(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings

SetSegmentsPerSubdirectory sets the SegmentsPerSubdirectory field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetStreamInfResolution 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetStreamInfResolution(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetStreamInfResolution sets the StreamInfResolution field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetTimedMetadataId3Frame 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetTimedMetadataId3Frame(v string) *HlsGroupSettings

SetTimedMetadataId3Frame sets the TimedMetadataId3Frame field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetTimedMetadataId3Period 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetTimedMetadataId3Period(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings

SetTimedMetadataId3Period sets the TimedMetadataId3Period field's value.

func (*HlsGroupSettings) SetTimestampDeltaMilliseconds 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetTimestampDeltaMilliseconds(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings

SetTimestampDeltaMilliseconds sets the TimestampDeltaMilliseconds field's value.

func (HlsGroupSettings) String 

func (s HlsGroupSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*HlsGroupSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *HlsGroupSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type HlsSettings 

type HlsSettings struct {

	// Specifies the group to which the audio Rendition belongs.
	AudioGroupId *string `locationName:"audioGroupId" type:"string"`

	// Use this setting only in audio-only outputs. Choose MPEG-2 Transport Stream
	// (M2TS) to create a file in an MPEG2-TS container. Keep the default value
	// Automatic (AUTOMATIC) to create an audio-only file in a raw container. Regardless
	// of the value that you specify here, if this output has video, the service
	// will place the output into an MPEG2-TS container.
	AudioOnlyContainer *string `locationName:"audioOnlyContainer" type:"string" enum:"HlsAudioOnlyContainer"`

	// List all the audio groups that are used with the video output stream. Input
	// all the audio GROUP-IDs that are associated to the video, separate by ','.
	AudioRenditionSets *string `locationName:"audioRenditionSets" type:"string"`

	// Four types of audio-only tracks are supported: Audio-Only Variant Stream
	// The client can play back this audio-only stream instead of video in low-bandwidth
	// scenarios. Represented as an EXT-X-STREAM-INF in the HLS manifest. Alternate
	// Audio, Auto Select, Default Alternate rendition that the client should try
	// to play back by default. Represented as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest
	// with DEFAULT=YES, AUTOSELECT=YES Alternate Audio, Auto Select, Not Default
	// Alternate rendition that the client may try to play back by default. Represented
	// as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest with DEFAULT=NO, AUTOSELECT=YES Alternate
	// Audio, not Auto Select Alternate rendition that the client will not try to
	// play back by default. Represented as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest with
	// DEFAULT=NO, AUTOSELECT=NO
	AudioTrackType *string `locationName:"audioTrackType" type:"string" enum:"HlsAudioTrackType"`

	// When set to INCLUDE, writes I-Frame Only Manifest in addition to the HLS
	// manifest
	IFrameOnlyManifest *string `locationName:"iFrameOnlyManifest" type:"string" enum:"HlsIFrameOnlyManifest"`

	// String concatenated to end of segment filenames. Accepts "Format Identifiers":#format_identifier_parameters.
	SegmentModifier *string `locationName:"segmentModifier" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for HLS output groups

func (HlsSettings) GoString 

func (s HlsSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*HlsSettings) SetAudioGroupId 

func (s *HlsSettings) SetAudioGroupId(v string) *HlsSettings

SetAudioGroupId sets the AudioGroupId field's value.

func (*HlsSettings) SetAudioOnlyContainer added in v1.99.0 

func (s *HlsSettings) SetAudioOnlyContainer(v string) *HlsSettings

SetAudioOnlyContainer sets the AudioOnlyContainer field's value.

func (*HlsSettings) SetAudioRenditionSets 

func (s *HlsSettings) SetAudioRenditionSets(v string) *HlsSettings

SetAudioRenditionSets sets the AudioRenditionSets field's value.

func (*HlsSettings) SetAudioTrackType 

func (s *HlsSettings) SetAudioTrackType(v string) *HlsSettings

SetAudioTrackType sets the AudioTrackType field's value.

func (*HlsSettings) SetIFrameOnlyManifest 

func (s *HlsSettings) SetIFrameOnlyManifest(v string) *HlsSettings

SetIFrameOnlyManifest sets the IFrameOnlyManifest field's value.

func (*HlsSettings) SetSegmentModifier 

func (s *HlsSettings) SetSegmentModifier(v string) *HlsSettings

SetSegmentModifier sets the SegmentModifier field's value.

func (HlsSettings) String 

func (s HlsSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type Id3Insertion 

type Id3Insertion struct {

	// Use ID3 tag (Id3) to provide a tag value in base64-encode format.
	Id3 *string `locationName:"id3" type:"string"`

	// Provide a Timecode (TimeCode) in HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF format.
	Timecode *string `locationName:"timecode" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

To insert ID3 tags in your output, specify two values. Use ID3 tag (Id3) to specify the base 64 encoded string and use Timecode (TimeCode) to specify the time when the tag should be inserted. To insert multiple ID3 tags in your output, create multiple instances of ID3 insertion (Id3Insertion).

func (Id3Insertion) GoString 

func (s Id3Insertion) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Id3Insertion) SetId3 

func (s *Id3Insertion) SetId3(v string) *Id3Insertion

SetId3 sets the Id3 field's value.

func (*Id3Insertion) SetTimecode 

func (s *Id3Insertion) SetTimecode(v string) *Id3Insertion

SetTimecode sets the Timecode field's value.

func (Id3Insertion) String 

func (s Id3Insertion) String() string

String returns the string representation

type ImageInserter 

type ImageInserter struct {

	// Specify the images that you want to overlay on your video. The images must
	// be PNG or TGA files.
	InsertableImages []*InsertableImage `locationName:"insertableImages" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Enable the image inserter feature to include a graphic overlay on your video. Enable or disable this feature for each input or output individually. This setting is disabled by default.

func (ImageInserter) GoString 

func (s ImageInserter) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ImageInserter) SetInsertableImages 

func (s *ImageInserter) SetInsertableImages(v []*InsertableImage) *ImageInserter

SetInsertableImages sets the InsertableImages field's value.

func (ImageInserter) String 

func (s ImageInserter) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*ImageInserter) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *ImageInserter) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Input 

type Input struct {

	// Specifies set of audio selectors within an input to combine. An input may
	// have multiple audio selector groups. See "Audio Selector Group":#inputs-audio_selector_group
	// for more information.
	AudioSelectorGroups map[string]*AudioSelectorGroup `locationName:"audioSelectorGroups" type:"map"`

	// Use Audio selectors (AudioSelectors) to specify a track or set of tracks
	// from the input that you will use in your outputs. You can use mutiple Audio
	// selectors per input.
	AudioSelectors map[string]*AudioSelector `locationName:"audioSelectors" type:"map"`

	// Use Captions selectors (CaptionSelectors) to specify the captions data from
	// the input that you will use in your outputs. You can use mutiple captions
	// selectors per input.
	CaptionSelectors map[string]*CaptionSelector `locationName:"captionSelectors" type:"map"`

	// Use Cropping selection (crop) to specify the video area that the service
	// will include in the output video frame. If you specify a value here, it will
	// override any value that you specify in the output setting Cropping selection
	// (crop).
	Crop *Rectangle `locationName:"crop" type:"structure"`

	// Enable Deblock (InputDeblockFilter) to produce smoother motion in the output.
	// Default is disabled. Only manaully controllable for MPEG2 and uncompressed
	// video inputs.
	DeblockFilter *string `locationName:"deblockFilter" type:"string" enum:"InputDeblockFilter"`

	// Settings for decrypting any input files that you encrypt before you upload
	// them to Amazon S3. MediaConvert can decrypt files only when you use AWS Key
	// Management Service (KMS) to encrypt the data key that you use to encrypt
	// your content.
	DecryptionSettings *InputDecryptionSettings `locationName:"decryptionSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Enable Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) to filter noise from the input. Default
	// is disabled. Only applicable to MPEG2, H.264, H.265, and uncompressed video
	// inputs.
	DenoiseFilter *string `locationName:"denoiseFilter" type:"string" enum:"InputDenoiseFilter"`

	// Specify the source file for your transcoding job. You can use multiple inputs
	// in a single job. The service concatenates these inputs, in the order that
	// you specify them in the job, to create the outputs. If your input format
	// is IMF, specify your input by providing the path to your CPL. For example,
	// "s3://bucket/vf/cpl.xml". If the CPL is in an incomplete IMP, make sure to
	// use *Supplemental IMPs* (SupplementalImps) to specify any supplemental IMPs
	// that contain assets referenced by the CPL.
	FileInput *string `locationName:"fileInput" type:"string"`

	// Use Filter enable (InputFilterEnable) to specify how the transcoding service
	// applies the denoise and deblock filters. You must also enable the filters
	// separately, with Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) and Deblock (InputDeblockFilter).
	// * Auto - The transcoding service determines whether to apply filtering, depending
	// on input type and quality. * Disable - The input is not filtered. This is
	// true even if you use the API to enable them in (InputDeblockFilter) and (InputDeblockFilter).
	// * Force - The in put is filtered regardless of input type.
	FilterEnable *string `locationName:"filterEnable" type:"string" enum:"InputFilterEnable"`

	// Use Filter strength (FilterStrength) to adjust the magnitude the input filter
	// settings (Deblock and Denoise). The range is -5 to 5. Default is 0.
	FilterStrength *int64 `locationName:"filterStrength" type:"integer"`

	// Enable the image inserter feature to include a graphic overlay on your video.
	// Enable or disable this feature for each input individually. This setting
	// is disabled by default.
	ImageInserter *ImageInserter `locationName:"imageInserter" type:"structure"`

	// (InputClippings) contains sets of start and end times that together specify
	// a portion of the input to be used in the outputs. If you provide only a start
	// time, the clip will be the entire input from that point to the end. If you
	// provide only an end time, it will be the entire input up to that point. When
	// you specify more than one input clip, the transcoding service creates the
	// job outputs by stringing the clips together in the order you specify them.
	InputClippings []*InputClipping `locationName:"inputClippings" type:"list"`

	// Use Selection placement (position) to define the video area in your output
	// frame. The area outside of the rectangle that you specify here is black.
	// If you specify a value here, it will override any value that you specify
	// in the output setting Selection placement (position). If you specify a value
	// here, this will override any AFD values in your input, even if you set Respond
	// to AFD (RespondToAfd) to Respond (RESPOND). If you specify a value here,
	// this will ignore anything that you specify for the setting Scaling Behavior
	// (scalingBehavior).
	Position *Rectangle `locationName:"position" type:"structure"`

	// Use Program (programNumber) to select a specific program from within a multi-program
	// transport stream. Note that Quad 4K is not currently supported. Default is
	// the first program within the transport stream. If the program you specify
	// doesn't exist, the transcoding service will use this default.
	ProgramNumber *int64 `locationName:"programNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Set PSI control (InputPsiControl) for transport stream inputs to specify
	// which data the demux process to scans. * Ignore PSI - Scan all PIDs for audio
	// and video. * Use PSI - Scan only PSI data.
	PsiControl *string `locationName:"psiControl" type:"string" enum:"InputPsiControl"`

	// Provide a list of any necessary supplemental IMPs. You need supplemental
	// IMPs if the CPL that you're using for your input is in an incomplete IMP.
	// Specify either the supplemental IMP directories with a trailing slash or
	// the ASSETMAP.xml files. For example ["s3://bucket/ov/", "s3://bucket/vf2/ASSETMAP.xml"].
	// You don't need to specify the IMP that contains your input CPL, because the
	// service automatically detects it.
	SupplementalImps []*string `locationName:"supplementalImps" type:"list"`

	// Timecode source under input settings (InputTimecodeSource) only affects the
	// behavior of features that apply to a single input at a time, such as input
	// clipping and synchronizing some captions formats. Use this setting to specify
	// whether the service counts frames by timecodes embedded in the video (EMBEDDED)
	// or by starting the first frame at zero (ZEROBASED). In both cases, the timecode
	// format is HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where FF is the frame number. Only
	// set this to EMBEDDED if your source video has embedded timecodes.
	TimecodeSource *string `locationName:"timecodeSource" type:"string" enum:"InputTimecodeSource"`

	// Selector for video.
	VideoSelector *VideoSelector `locationName:"videoSelector" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Specifies media input

func (Input) GoString 

func (s Input) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Input) SetAudioSelectorGroups 

func (s *Input) SetAudioSelectorGroups(v map[string]*AudioSelectorGroup) *Input

SetAudioSelectorGroups sets the AudioSelectorGroups field's value.

func (*Input) SetAudioSelectors 

func (s *Input) SetAudioSelectors(v map[string]*AudioSelector) *Input

SetAudioSelectors sets the AudioSelectors field's value.

func (*Input) SetCaptionSelectors 

func (s *Input) SetCaptionSelectors(v map[string]*CaptionSelector) *Input

SetCaptionSelectors sets the CaptionSelectors field's value.

func (*Input) SetCrop added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Input) SetCrop(v *Rectangle) *Input

SetCrop sets the Crop field's value.

func (*Input) SetDeblockFilter 

func (s *Input) SetDeblockFilter(v string) *Input

SetDeblockFilter sets the DeblockFilter field's value.

func (*Input) SetDecryptionSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Input) SetDecryptionSettings(v *InputDecryptionSettings) *Input

SetDecryptionSettings sets the DecryptionSettings field's value.

func (*Input) SetDenoiseFilter 

func (s *Input) SetDenoiseFilter(v string) *Input

SetDenoiseFilter sets the DenoiseFilter field's value.

func (*Input) SetFileInput 

func (s *Input) SetFileInput(v string) *Input

SetFileInput sets the FileInput field's value.

func (*Input) SetFilterEnable 

func (s *Input) SetFilterEnable(v string) *Input

SetFilterEnable sets the FilterEnable field's value.

func (*Input) SetFilterStrength 

func (s *Input) SetFilterStrength(v int64) *Input

SetFilterStrength sets the FilterStrength field's value.

func (*Input) SetImageInserter added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Input) SetImageInserter(v *ImageInserter) *Input

SetImageInserter sets the ImageInserter field's value.

func (*Input) SetInputClippings 

func (s *Input) SetInputClippings(v []*InputClipping) *Input

SetInputClippings sets the InputClippings field's value.

func (*Input) SetPosition added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Input) SetPosition(v *Rectangle) *Input

SetPosition sets the Position field's value.

func (*Input) SetProgramNumber 

func (s *Input) SetProgramNumber(v int64) *Input

SetProgramNumber sets the ProgramNumber field's value.

func (*Input) SetPsiControl 

func (s *Input) SetPsiControl(v string) *Input

SetPsiControl sets the PsiControl field's value.

func (*Input) SetSupplementalImps added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Input) SetSupplementalImps(v []*string) *Input

SetSupplementalImps sets the SupplementalImps field's value.

func (*Input) SetTimecodeSource 

func (s *Input) SetTimecodeSource(v string) *Input

SetTimecodeSource sets the TimecodeSource field's value.

func (*Input) SetVideoSelector 

func (s *Input) SetVideoSelector(v *VideoSelector) *Input

SetVideoSelector sets the VideoSelector field's value.

func (Input) String 

func (s Input) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*Input) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *Input) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type InputClipping 

type InputClipping struct {

	// Set End timecode (EndTimecode) to the end of the portion of the input you
	// are clipping. The frame corresponding to the End timecode value is included
	// in the clip. Start timecode or End timecode may be left blank, but not both.
	// Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the hour, MM is the
	// minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When choosing this
	// value, take into account your setting for timecode source under input settings
	// (InputTimecodeSource). For example, if you have embedded timecodes that start
	// at 01:00:00:00 and you want your clip to end six minutes into the video,
	// use 01:06:00:00.
	EndTimecode *string `locationName:"endTimecode" type:"string"`

	// Set Start timecode (StartTimecode) to the beginning of the portion of the
	// input you are clipping. The frame corresponding to the Start timecode value
	// is included in the clip. Start timecode or End timecode may be left blank,
	// but not both. Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the
	// hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When
	// choosing this value, take into account your setting for Input timecode source.
	// For example, if you have embedded timecodes that start at 01:00:00:00 and
	// you want your clip to begin five minutes into the video, use 01:05:00:00.
	StartTimecode *string `locationName:"startTimecode" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

To transcode only portions of your input (clips), include one Input clipping (one instance of InputClipping in the JSON job file) for each input clip. All input clips you specify will be included in every output of the job.

func (InputClipping) GoString 

func (s InputClipping) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*InputClipping) SetEndTimecode 

func (s *InputClipping) SetEndTimecode(v string) *InputClipping

SetEndTimecode sets the EndTimecode field's value.

func (*InputClipping) SetStartTimecode 

func (s *InputClipping) SetStartTimecode(v string) *InputClipping

SetStartTimecode sets the StartTimecode field's value.

func (InputClipping) String 

func (s InputClipping) String() string

String returns the string representation

type InputDecryptionSettings added in v1.99.0 

type InputDecryptionSettings struct {

	// Specify the encryption mode that you used to encrypt your input files.
	DecryptionMode *string `locationName:"decryptionMode" type:"string" enum:"DecryptionMode"`

	// Warning! Don't provide your encryption key in plaintext. Your job settings
	// could be intercepted, making your encrypted content vulnerable. Specify the
	// encrypted version of the data key that you used to encrypt your content.
	// The data key must be encrypted by AWS Key Management Service (KMS). The key
	// can be 128, 192, or 256 bits.
	EncryptedDecryptionKey *string `locationName:"encryptedDecryptionKey" min:"24" type:"string"`

	// Specify the initialization vector that you used when you encrypted your content
	// before uploading it to Amazon S3. You can use a 16-byte initialization vector
	// with any encryption mode. Or, you can use a 12-byte initialization vector
	// with GCM or CTR. MediaConvert accepts only initialization vectors that are
	// base64-encoded.
	InitializationVector *string `locationName:"initializationVector" min:"16" type:"string"`

	// Specify the AWS Region for AWS Key Management Service (KMS) that you used
	// to encrypt your data key, if that Region is different from the one you are
	// using for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
	KmsKeyRegion *string `locationName:"kmsKeyRegion" min:"9" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for decrypting any input files that you encrypt before you upload them to Amazon S3. MediaConvert can decrypt files only when you use AWS Key Management Service (KMS) to encrypt the data key that you use to encrypt your content.

func (InputDecryptionSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s InputDecryptionSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*InputDecryptionSettings) SetDecryptionMode added in v1.99.0 

func (s *InputDecryptionSettings) SetDecryptionMode(v string) *InputDecryptionSettings

SetDecryptionMode sets the DecryptionMode field's value.

func (*InputDecryptionSettings) SetEncryptedDecryptionKey added in v1.99.0 

func (s *InputDecryptionSettings) SetEncryptedDecryptionKey(v string) *InputDecryptionSettings

SetEncryptedDecryptionKey sets the EncryptedDecryptionKey field's value.

func (*InputDecryptionSettings) SetInitializationVector added in v1.99.0 

func (s *InputDecryptionSettings) SetInitializationVector(v string) *InputDecryptionSettings

SetInitializationVector sets the InitializationVector field's value.

func (*InputDecryptionSettings) SetKmsKeyRegion added in v1.99.0 

func (s *InputDecryptionSettings) SetKmsKeyRegion(v string) *InputDecryptionSettings

SetKmsKeyRegion sets the KmsKeyRegion field's value.

func (InputDecryptionSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s InputDecryptionSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*InputDecryptionSettings) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *InputDecryptionSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type InputTemplate 

type InputTemplate struct {

	// Specifies set of audio selectors within an input to combine. An input may
	// have multiple audio selector groups. See "Audio Selector Group":#inputs-audio_selector_group
	// for more information.
	AudioSelectorGroups map[string]*AudioSelectorGroup `locationName:"audioSelectorGroups" type:"map"`

	// Use Audio selectors (AudioSelectors) to specify a track or set of tracks
	// from the input that you will use in your outputs. You can use mutiple Audio
	// selectors per input.
	AudioSelectors map[string]*AudioSelector `locationName:"audioSelectors" type:"map"`

	// Use Captions selectors (CaptionSelectors) to specify the captions data from
	// the input that you will use in your outputs. You can use mutiple captions
	// selectors per input.
	CaptionSelectors map[string]*CaptionSelector `locationName:"captionSelectors" type:"map"`

	// Use Cropping selection (crop) to specify the video area that the service
	// will include in the output video frame. If you specify a value here, it will
	// override any value that you specify in the output setting Cropping selection
	// (crop).
	Crop *Rectangle `locationName:"crop" type:"structure"`

	// Enable Deblock (InputDeblockFilter) to produce smoother motion in the output.
	// Default is disabled. Only manaully controllable for MPEG2 and uncompressed
	// video inputs.
	DeblockFilter *string `locationName:"deblockFilter" type:"string" enum:"InputDeblockFilter"`

	// Enable Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) to filter noise from the input. Default
	// is disabled. Only applicable to MPEG2, H.264, H.265, and uncompressed video
	// inputs.
	DenoiseFilter *string `locationName:"denoiseFilter" type:"string" enum:"InputDenoiseFilter"`

	// Use Filter enable (InputFilterEnable) to specify how the transcoding service
	// applies the denoise and deblock filters. You must also enable the filters
	// separately, with Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) and Deblock (InputDeblockFilter).
	// * Auto - The transcoding service determines whether to apply filtering, depending
	// on input type and quality. * Disable - The input is not filtered. This is
	// true even if you use the API to enable them in (InputDeblockFilter) and (InputDeblockFilter).
	// * Force - The in put is filtered regardless of input type.
	FilterEnable *string `locationName:"filterEnable" type:"string" enum:"InputFilterEnable"`

	// Use Filter strength (FilterStrength) to adjust the magnitude the input filter
	// settings (Deblock and Denoise). The range is -5 to 5. Default is 0.
	FilterStrength *int64 `locationName:"filterStrength" type:"integer"`

	// Enable the image inserter feature to include a graphic overlay on your video.
	// Enable or disable this feature for each input individually. This setting
	// is disabled by default.
	ImageInserter *ImageInserter `locationName:"imageInserter" type:"structure"`

	// (InputClippings) contains sets of start and end times that together specify
	// a portion of the input to be used in the outputs. If you provide only a start
	// time, the clip will be the entire input from that point to the end. If you
	// provide only an end time, it will be the entire input up to that point. When
	// you specify more than one input clip, the transcoding service creates the
	// job outputs by stringing the clips together in the order you specify them.
	InputClippings []*InputClipping `locationName:"inputClippings" type:"list"`

	// Use Selection placement (position) to define the video area in your output
	// frame. The area outside of the rectangle that you specify here is black.
	// If you specify a value here, it will override any value that you specify
	// in the output setting Selection placement (position). If you specify a value
	// here, this will override any AFD values in your input, even if you set Respond
	// to AFD (RespondToAfd) to Respond (RESPOND). If you specify a value here,
	// this will ignore anything that you specify for the setting Scaling Behavior
	// (scalingBehavior).
	Position *Rectangle `locationName:"position" type:"structure"`

	// Use Program (programNumber) to select a specific program from within a multi-program
	// transport stream. Note that Quad 4K is not currently supported. Default is
	// the first program within the transport stream. If the program you specify
	// doesn't exist, the transcoding service will use this default.
	ProgramNumber *int64 `locationName:"programNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Set PSI control (InputPsiControl) for transport stream inputs to specify
	// which data the demux process to scans. * Ignore PSI - Scan all PIDs for audio
	// and video. * Use PSI - Scan only PSI data.
	PsiControl *string `locationName:"psiControl" type:"string" enum:"InputPsiControl"`

	// Timecode source under input settings (InputTimecodeSource) only affects the
	// behavior of features that apply to a single input at a time, such as input
	// clipping and synchronizing some captions formats. Use this setting to specify
	// whether the service counts frames by timecodes embedded in the video (EMBEDDED)
	// or by starting the first frame at zero (ZEROBASED). In both cases, the timecode
	// format is HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where FF is the frame number. Only
	// set this to EMBEDDED if your source video has embedded timecodes.
	TimecodeSource *string `locationName:"timecodeSource" type:"string" enum:"InputTimecodeSource"`

	// Selector for video.
	VideoSelector *VideoSelector `locationName:"videoSelector" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Specified video input in a template.

func (InputTemplate) GoString 

func (s InputTemplate) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*InputTemplate) SetAudioSelectorGroups 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetAudioSelectorGroups(v map[string]*AudioSelectorGroup) *InputTemplate

SetAudioSelectorGroups sets the AudioSelectorGroups field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetAudioSelectors 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetAudioSelectors(v map[string]*AudioSelector) *InputTemplate

SetAudioSelectors sets the AudioSelectors field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetCaptionSelectors 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetCaptionSelectors(v map[string]*CaptionSelector) *InputTemplate

SetCaptionSelectors sets the CaptionSelectors field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetCrop added in v1.99.0 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetCrop(v *Rectangle) *InputTemplate

SetCrop sets the Crop field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetDeblockFilter 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetDeblockFilter(v string) *InputTemplate

SetDeblockFilter sets the DeblockFilter field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetDenoiseFilter 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetDenoiseFilter(v string) *InputTemplate

SetDenoiseFilter sets the DenoiseFilter field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetFilterEnable 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetFilterEnable(v string) *InputTemplate

SetFilterEnable sets the FilterEnable field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetFilterStrength 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetFilterStrength(v int64) *InputTemplate

SetFilterStrength sets the FilterStrength field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetImageInserter added in v1.99.0 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetImageInserter(v *ImageInserter) *InputTemplate

SetImageInserter sets the ImageInserter field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetInputClippings 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetInputClippings(v []*InputClipping) *InputTemplate

SetInputClippings sets the InputClippings field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetPosition added in v1.99.0 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetPosition(v *Rectangle) *InputTemplate

SetPosition sets the Position field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetProgramNumber 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetProgramNumber(v int64) *InputTemplate

SetProgramNumber sets the ProgramNumber field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetPsiControl 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetPsiControl(v string) *InputTemplate

SetPsiControl sets the PsiControl field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetTimecodeSource 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetTimecodeSource(v string) *InputTemplate

SetTimecodeSource sets the TimecodeSource field's value.

func (*InputTemplate) SetVideoSelector 

func (s *InputTemplate) SetVideoSelector(v *VideoSelector) *InputTemplate

SetVideoSelector sets the VideoSelector field's value.

func (InputTemplate) String 

func (s InputTemplate) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*InputTemplate) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *InputTemplate) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type InsertableImage 

type InsertableImage struct {

	// Specify the time, in milliseconds, for the image to remain on the output
	// video. This duration includes fade-in time but not fade-out time.
	Duration *int64 `locationName:"duration" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the length of time, in milliseconds, between the Start time that
	// you specify for the image insertion and the time that the image appears at
	// full opacity. Full opacity is the level that you specify for the opacity
	// setting. If you don't specify a value for Fade-in, the image will appear
	// abruptly at the overlay start time.
	FadeIn *int64 `locationName:"fadeIn" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the length of time, in milliseconds, between the end of the time
	// that you have specified for the image overlay Duration and when the overlaid
	// image has faded to total transparency. If you don't specify a value for Fade-out,
	// the image will disappear abruptly at the end of the inserted image duration.
	FadeOut *int64 `locationName:"fadeOut" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the height of the inserted image in pixels. If you specify a value
	// that's larger than the video resolution height, the service will crop your
	// overlaid image to fit. To use the native height of the image, keep this setting
	// blank.
	Height *int64 `locationName:"height" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the Amazon S3 location of the image that you want to overlay on the
	// video. Use a PNG or TGA file.
	ImageInserterInput *string `locationName:"imageInserterInput" min:"14" type:"string"`

	// Specify the distance, in pixels, between the inserted image and the left
	// edge of the video frame. Required for any image overlay that you specify.
	ImageX *int64 `locationName:"imageX" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the distance, in pixels, between the overlaid image and the top edge
	// of the video frame. Required for any image overlay that you specify.
	ImageY *int64 `locationName:"imageY" type:"integer"`

	// Specify how overlapping inserted images appear. Images with higher values
	// for Layer appear on top of images with lower values for Layer.
	Layer *int64 `locationName:"layer" type:"integer"`

	// Use Opacity (Opacity) to specify how much of the underlying video shows through
	// the inserted image. 0 is transparent and 100 is fully opaque. Default is
	// 50.
	Opacity *int64 `locationName:"opacity" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the timecode of the frame that you want the overlay to first appear
	// on. This must be in timecode (HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF) format. Remember
	// to take into account your timecode source settings.
	StartTime *string `locationName:"startTime" type:"string"`

	// Specify the width of the inserted image in pixels. If you specify a value
	// that's larger than the video resolution width, the service will crop your
	// overlaid image to fit. To use the native width of the image, keep this setting
	// blank.
	Width *int64 `locationName:"width" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings that specify how your still graphic overlay appears.

func (InsertableImage) GoString 

func (s InsertableImage) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*InsertableImage) SetDuration 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetDuration(v int64) *InsertableImage

SetDuration sets the Duration field's value.

func (*InsertableImage) SetFadeIn 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetFadeIn(v int64) *InsertableImage

SetFadeIn sets the FadeIn field's value.

func (*InsertableImage) SetFadeOut 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetFadeOut(v int64) *InsertableImage

SetFadeOut sets the FadeOut field's value.

func (*InsertableImage) SetHeight 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetHeight(v int64) *InsertableImage

SetHeight sets the Height field's value.

func (*InsertableImage) SetImageInserterInput 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetImageInserterInput(v string) *InsertableImage

SetImageInserterInput sets the ImageInserterInput field's value.

func (*InsertableImage) SetImageX 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetImageX(v int64) *InsertableImage

SetImageX sets the ImageX field's value.

func (*InsertableImage) SetImageY 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetImageY(v int64) *InsertableImage

SetImageY sets the ImageY field's value.

func (*InsertableImage) SetLayer 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetLayer(v int64) *InsertableImage

SetLayer sets the Layer field's value.

func (*InsertableImage) SetOpacity 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetOpacity(v int64) *InsertableImage

SetOpacity sets the Opacity field's value.

func (*InsertableImage) SetStartTime 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetStartTime(v string) *InsertableImage

SetStartTime sets the StartTime field's value.

func (*InsertableImage) SetWidth 

func (s *InsertableImage) SetWidth(v int64) *InsertableImage

SetWidth sets the Width field's value.

func (InsertableImage) String 

func (s InsertableImage) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*InsertableImage) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *InsertableImage) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Job 

type Job struct {

	// Accelerated transcoding can significantly speed up jobs with long, visually
	// complex content.
	AccelerationSettings *AccelerationSettings `locationName:"accelerationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// An identifier for this resource that is unique within all of AWS.
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string"`

	// Optional. Choose a tag type that AWS Billing and Cost Management will use
	// to sort your AWS Elemental MediaConvert costs on any billing report that
	// you set up. Any transcoding outputs that don't have an associated tag will
	// appear in your billing report unsorted. If you don't choose a valid value
	// for this field, your job outputs will appear on the billing report unsorted.
	BillingTagsSource *string `locationName:"billingTagsSource" type:"string" enum:"BillingTagsSource"`

	// The time, in Unix epoch format in seconds, when the job got created.
	CreatedAt *time.Time `locationName:"createdAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// A job's phase can be PROBING, TRANSCODING OR UPLOADING
	CurrentPhase *string `locationName:"currentPhase" type:"string" enum:"JobPhase"`

	// Error code for the job
	ErrorCode *int64 `locationName:"errorCode" type:"integer"`

	// Error message of Job
	ErrorMessage *string `locationName:"errorMessage" type:"string"`

	// A portion of the job's ARN, unique within your AWS Elemental MediaConvert
	// resources
	Id *string `locationName:"id" type:"string"`

	// An estimate of how far your job has progressed. This estimate is shown as
	// a percentage of the total time from when your job leaves its queue to when
	// your output files appear in your output Amazon S3 bucket. AWS Elemental MediaConvert
	// provides jobPercentComplete in CloudWatch STATUS_UPDATE events and in the
	// response to GetJob and ListJobs requests. The jobPercentComplete estimate
	// is reliable for the following input containers: Quicktime, Transport Stream,
	// MP4, and MXF. For some jobs, the service can't provide information about
	// job progress. In those cases, jobPercentComplete returns a null value.
	JobPercentComplete *int64 `locationName:"jobPercentComplete" type:"integer"`

	// The job template that the job is created from, if it is created from a job
	// template.
	JobTemplate *string `locationName:"jobTemplate" type:"string"`

	// List of output group details
	OutputGroupDetails []*OutputGroupDetail `locationName:"outputGroupDetails" type:"list"`

	// Optional. When you create a job, you can specify a queue to send it to. If
	// you don't specify, the job will go to the default queue. For more about queues,
	// see the User Guide topic at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html
	Queue *string `locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// The number of times that the service automatically attempted to process your
	// job after encountering an error.
	RetryCount *int64 `locationName:"retryCount" type:"integer"`

	// The IAM role you use for creating this job. For details about permissions,
	// see the User Guide topic at the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/iam-role.html
	//
	// Role is a required field
	Role *string `locationName:"role" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// JobSettings contains all the transcode settings for a job.
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *JobSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// A job's status can be SUBMITTED, PROGRESSING, COMPLETE, CANCELED, or ERROR.
	Status *string `locationName:"status" type:"string" enum:"JobStatus"`

	// Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch
	// Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert
	// sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing
	// your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.
	StatusUpdateInterval *string `locationName:"statusUpdateInterval" type:"string" enum:"StatusUpdateInterval"`

	// Information about when jobs are submitted, started, and finished is specified
	// in Unix epoch format in seconds.
	Timing *Timing `locationName:"timing" type:"structure"`

	// User-defined metadata that you want to associate with an MediaConvert job.
	// You specify metadata in key/value pairs.
	UserMetadata map[string]*string `locationName:"userMetadata" type:"map"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Each job converts an input file into an output file or files. For more information, see the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html

func (Job) GoString 

func (s Job) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Job) SetAccelerationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Job) SetAccelerationSettings(v *AccelerationSettings) *Job

SetAccelerationSettings sets the AccelerationSettings field's value.

func (*Job) SetArn 

func (s *Job) SetArn(v string) *Job

SetArn sets the Arn field's value.

func (*Job) SetBillingTagsSource added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Job) SetBillingTagsSource(v string) *Job

SetBillingTagsSource sets the BillingTagsSource field's value.

func (*Job) SetCreatedAt 

func (s *Job) SetCreatedAt(v time.Time) *Job

SetCreatedAt sets the CreatedAt field's value.

func (*Job) SetCurrentPhase added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Job) SetCurrentPhase(v string) *Job

SetCurrentPhase sets the CurrentPhase field's value.

func (*Job) SetErrorCode 

func (s *Job) SetErrorCode(v int64) *Job

SetErrorCode sets the ErrorCode field's value.

func (*Job) SetErrorMessage 

func (s *Job) SetErrorMessage(v string) *Job

SetErrorMessage sets the ErrorMessage field's value.

func (*Job) SetId 

func (s *Job) SetId(v string) *Job

SetId sets the Id field's value.

func (*Job) SetJobPercentComplete added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Job) SetJobPercentComplete(v int64) *Job

SetJobPercentComplete sets the JobPercentComplete field's value.

func (*Job) SetJobTemplate 

func (s *Job) SetJobTemplate(v string) *Job

SetJobTemplate sets the JobTemplate field's value.

func (*Job) SetOutputGroupDetails 

func (s *Job) SetOutputGroupDetails(v []*OutputGroupDetail) *Job

SetOutputGroupDetails sets the OutputGroupDetails field's value.

func (*Job) SetQueue 

func (s *Job) SetQueue(v string) *Job

SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.

func (*Job) SetRetryCount added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Job) SetRetryCount(v int64) *Job

SetRetryCount sets the RetryCount field's value.

func (*Job) SetRole 

func (s *Job) SetRole(v string) *Job

SetRole sets the Role field's value.

func (*Job) SetSettings 

func (s *Job) SetSettings(v *JobSettings) *Job

SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.

func (*Job) SetStatus 

func (s *Job) SetStatus(v string) *Job

SetStatus sets the Status field's value.

func (*Job) SetStatusUpdateInterval added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Job) SetStatusUpdateInterval(v string) *Job

SetStatusUpdateInterval sets the StatusUpdateInterval field's value.

func (*Job) SetTiming 

func (s *Job) SetTiming(v *Timing) *Job

SetTiming sets the Timing field's value.

func (*Job) SetUserMetadata 

func (s *Job) SetUserMetadata(v map[string]*string) *Job

SetUserMetadata sets the UserMetadata field's value.

func (Job) String 

func (s Job) String() string

String returns the string representation

type JobSettings 

type JobSettings struct {

	// When specified, this offset (in milliseconds) is added to the input Ad Avail
	// PTS time.
	AdAvailOffset *int64 `locationName:"adAvailOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Settings for ad avail blanking. Video can be blanked or overlaid with an
	// image, and audio muted during SCTE-35 triggered ad avails.
	AvailBlanking *AvailBlanking `locationName:"availBlanking" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for Event Signaling And Messaging (ESAM).
	Esam *EsamSettings `locationName:"esam" type:"structure"`

	// Use Inputs (inputs) to define source file used in the transcode job. There
	// can be multiple inputs add in a job. These inputs will be concantenated together
	// to create the output.
	Inputs []*Input `locationName:"inputs" type:"list"`

	// Overlay motion graphics on top of your video. The motion graphics that you
	// specify here appear on all outputs in all output groups.
	MotionImageInserter *MotionImageInserter `locationName:"motionImageInserter" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for your Nielsen configuration. If you don't do Nielsen measurement
	// and analytics, ignore these settings. When you enable Nielsen configuration
	// (nielsenConfiguration), MediaConvert enables PCM to ID3 tagging for all outputs
	// in the job. To enable Nielsen configuration programmatically, include an
	// instance of nielsenConfiguration in your JSON job specification. Even if
	// you don't include any children of nielsenConfiguration, you still enable
	// the setting.
	NielsenConfiguration *NielsenConfiguration `locationName:"nielsenConfiguration" type:"structure"`

	// (OutputGroups) contains one group of settings for each set of outputs that
	// share a common package type. All unpackaged files (MPEG-4, MPEG-2 TS, Quicktime,
	// MXF, and no container) are grouped in a single output group as well. Required
	// in (OutputGroups) is a group of settings that apply to the whole group. This
	// required object depends on the value you set for (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings).
	// Type, settings object pairs are as follows. * FILE_GROUP_SETTINGS, FileGroupSettings
	// * HLS_GROUP_SETTINGS, HlsGroupSettings * DASH_ISO_GROUP_SETTINGS, DashIsoGroupSettings
	// * MS_SMOOTH_GROUP_SETTINGS, MsSmoothGroupSettings * CMAF_GROUP_SETTINGS,
	// CmafGroupSettings
	OutputGroups []*OutputGroup `locationName:"outputGroups" type:"list"`

	// Contains settings used to acquire and adjust timecode information from inputs.
	TimecodeConfig *TimecodeConfig `locationName:"timecodeConfig" type:"structure"`

	// Enable Timed metadata insertion (TimedMetadataInsertion) to include ID3 tags
	// in your job. To include timed metadata, you must enable it here, enable it
	// in each output container, and specify tags and timecodes in ID3 insertion
	// (Id3Insertion) objects.
	TimedMetadataInsertion *TimedMetadataInsertion `locationName:"timedMetadataInsertion" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

JobSettings contains all the transcode settings for a job.

func (JobSettings) GoString 

func (s JobSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*JobSettings) SetAdAvailOffset 

func (s *JobSettings) SetAdAvailOffset(v int64) *JobSettings

SetAdAvailOffset sets the AdAvailOffset field's value.

func (*JobSettings) SetAvailBlanking 

func (s *JobSettings) SetAvailBlanking(v *AvailBlanking) *JobSettings

SetAvailBlanking sets the AvailBlanking field's value.

func (*JobSettings) SetEsam added in v1.99.0 

func (s *JobSettings) SetEsam(v *EsamSettings) *JobSettings

SetEsam sets the Esam field's value.

func (*JobSettings) SetInputs 

func (s *JobSettings) SetInputs(v []*Input) *JobSettings

SetInputs sets the Inputs field's value.

func (*JobSettings) SetMotionImageInserter added in v1.99.0 

func (s *JobSettings) SetMotionImageInserter(v *MotionImageInserter) *JobSettings

SetMotionImageInserter sets the MotionImageInserter field's value.

func (*JobSettings) SetNielsenConfiguration 

func (s *JobSettings) SetNielsenConfiguration(v *NielsenConfiguration) *JobSettings

SetNielsenConfiguration sets the NielsenConfiguration field's value.

func (*JobSettings) SetOutputGroups 

func (s *JobSettings) SetOutputGroups(v []*OutputGroup) *JobSettings

SetOutputGroups sets the OutputGroups field's value.

func (*JobSettings) SetTimecodeConfig 

func (s *JobSettings) SetTimecodeConfig(v *TimecodeConfig) *JobSettings

SetTimecodeConfig sets the TimecodeConfig field's value.

func (*JobSettings) SetTimedMetadataInsertion 

func (s *JobSettings) SetTimedMetadataInsertion(v *TimedMetadataInsertion) *JobSettings

SetTimedMetadataInsertion sets the TimedMetadataInsertion field's value.

func (JobSettings) String 

func (s JobSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*JobSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *JobSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type JobTemplate 

type JobTemplate struct {

	// Accelerated transcoding can significantly speed up jobs with long, visually
	// complex content.
	AccelerationSettings *AccelerationSettings `locationName:"accelerationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// An identifier for this resource that is unique within all of AWS.
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string"`

	// An optional category you create to organize your job templates.
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for Job template creation.
	CreatedAt *time.Time `locationName:"createdAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// An optional description you create for each job template.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds when the Job template was last updated.
	LastUpdated *time.Time `locationName:"lastUpdated" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// A name you create for each job template. Each name must be unique within
	// your account.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Optional. The queue that jobs created from this template are assigned to.
	// If you don't specify this, jobs will go to the default queue.
	Queue *string `locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// JobTemplateSettings contains all the transcode settings saved in the template
	// that will be applied to jobs created from it.
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *JobTemplateSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch
	// Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert
	// sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing
	// your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.
	StatusUpdateInterval *string `locationName:"statusUpdateInterval" type:"string" enum:"StatusUpdateInterval"`

	// A job template can be of two types: system or custom. System or built-in
	// job templates can't be modified or deleted by the user.
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"Type"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

A job template is a pre-made set of encoding instructions that you can use to quickly create a job.

func (JobTemplate) GoString 

func (s JobTemplate) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*JobTemplate) SetAccelerationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetAccelerationSettings(v *AccelerationSettings) *JobTemplate

SetAccelerationSettings sets the AccelerationSettings field's value.

func (*JobTemplate) SetArn 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetArn(v string) *JobTemplate

SetArn sets the Arn field's value.

func (*JobTemplate) SetCategory 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetCategory(v string) *JobTemplate

SetCategory sets the Category field's value.

func (*JobTemplate) SetCreatedAt 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetCreatedAt(v time.Time) *JobTemplate

SetCreatedAt sets the CreatedAt field's value.

func (*JobTemplate) SetDescription 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetDescription(v string) *JobTemplate

SetDescription sets the Description field's value.

func (*JobTemplate) SetLastUpdated 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetLastUpdated(v time.Time) *JobTemplate

SetLastUpdated sets the LastUpdated field's value.

func (*JobTemplate) SetName 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetName(v string) *JobTemplate

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (*JobTemplate) SetQueue 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetQueue(v string) *JobTemplate

SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.

func (*JobTemplate) SetSettings 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetSettings(v *JobTemplateSettings) *JobTemplate

SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.

func (*JobTemplate) SetStatusUpdateInterval added in v1.99.0 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetStatusUpdateInterval(v string) *JobTemplate

SetStatusUpdateInterval sets the StatusUpdateInterval field's value.

func (*JobTemplate) SetType 

func (s *JobTemplate) SetType(v string) *JobTemplate

SetType sets the Type field's value.

func (JobTemplate) String 

func (s JobTemplate) String() string

String returns the string representation

type JobTemplateSettings 

type JobTemplateSettings struct {

	// When specified, this offset (in milliseconds) is added to the input Ad Avail
	// PTS time.
	AdAvailOffset *int64 `locationName:"adAvailOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Settings for ad avail blanking. Video can be blanked or overlaid with an
	// image, and audio muted during SCTE-35 triggered ad avails.
	AvailBlanking *AvailBlanking `locationName:"availBlanking" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for Event Signaling And Messaging (ESAM).
	Esam *EsamSettings `locationName:"esam" type:"structure"`

	// Use Inputs (inputs) to define the source file used in the transcode job.
	// There can only be one input in a job template. Using the API, you can include
	// multiple inputs when referencing a job template.
	Inputs []*InputTemplate `locationName:"inputs" type:"list"`

	// Overlay motion graphics on top of your video. The motion graphics that you
	// specify here appear on all outputs in all output groups.
	MotionImageInserter *MotionImageInserter `locationName:"motionImageInserter" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for your Nielsen configuration. If you don't do Nielsen measurement
	// and analytics, ignore these settings. When you enable Nielsen configuration
	// (nielsenConfiguration), MediaConvert enables PCM to ID3 tagging for all outputs
	// in the job. To enable Nielsen configuration programmatically, include an
	// instance of nielsenConfiguration in your JSON job specification. Even if
	// you don't include any children of nielsenConfiguration, you still enable
	// the setting.
	NielsenConfiguration *NielsenConfiguration `locationName:"nielsenConfiguration" type:"structure"`

	// (OutputGroups) contains one group of settings for each set of outputs that
	// share a common package type. All unpackaged files (MPEG-4, MPEG-2 TS, Quicktime,
	// MXF, and no container) are grouped in a single output group as well. Required
	// in (OutputGroups) is a group of settings that apply to the whole group. This
	// required object depends on the value you set for (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings).
	// Type, settings object pairs are as follows. * FILE_GROUP_SETTINGS, FileGroupSettings
	// * HLS_GROUP_SETTINGS, HlsGroupSettings * DASH_ISO_GROUP_SETTINGS, DashIsoGroupSettings
	// * MS_SMOOTH_GROUP_SETTINGS, MsSmoothGroupSettings * CMAF_GROUP_SETTINGS,
	// CmafGroupSettings
	OutputGroups []*OutputGroup `locationName:"outputGroups" type:"list"`

	// Contains settings used to acquire and adjust timecode information from inputs.
	TimecodeConfig *TimecodeConfig `locationName:"timecodeConfig" type:"structure"`

	// Enable Timed metadata insertion (TimedMetadataInsertion) to include ID3 tags
	// in your job. To include timed metadata, you must enable it here, enable it
	// in each output container, and specify tags and timecodes in ID3 insertion
	// (Id3Insertion) objects.
	TimedMetadataInsertion *TimedMetadataInsertion `locationName:"timedMetadataInsertion" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

JobTemplateSettings contains all the transcode settings saved in the template that will be applied to jobs created from it.

func (JobTemplateSettings) GoString 

func (s JobTemplateSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*JobTemplateSettings) SetAdAvailOffset 

func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetAdAvailOffset(v int64) *JobTemplateSettings

SetAdAvailOffset sets the AdAvailOffset field's value.

func (*JobTemplateSettings) SetAvailBlanking 

func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetAvailBlanking(v *AvailBlanking) *JobTemplateSettings

SetAvailBlanking sets the AvailBlanking field's value.

func (*JobTemplateSettings) SetEsam added in v1.99.0 

func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetEsam(v *EsamSettings) *JobTemplateSettings

SetEsam sets the Esam field's value.

func (*JobTemplateSettings) SetInputs 

func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetInputs(v []*InputTemplate) *JobTemplateSettings

SetInputs sets the Inputs field's value.

func (*JobTemplateSettings) SetMotionImageInserter added in v1.99.0 

func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetMotionImageInserter(v *MotionImageInserter) *JobTemplateSettings

SetMotionImageInserter sets the MotionImageInserter field's value.

func (*JobTemplateSettings) SetNielsenConfiguration 

func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetNielsenConfiguration(v *NielsenConfiguration) *JobTemplateSettings

SetNielsenConfiguration sets the NielsenConfiguration field's value.

func (*JobTemplateSettings) SetOutputGroups 

func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetOutputGroups(v []*OutputGroup) *JobTemplateSettings

SetOutputGroups sets the OutputGroups field's value.

func (*JobTemplateSettings) SetTimecodeConfig 

func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetTimecodeConfig(v *TimecodeConfig) *JobTemplateSettings

SetTimecodeConfig sets the TimecodeConfig field's value.

func (*JobTemplateSettings) SetTimedMetadataInsertion 

func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetTimedMetadataInsertion(v *TimedMetadataInsertion) *JobTemplateSettings

SetTimedMetadataInsertion sets the TimedMetadataInsertion field's value.

func (JobTemplateSettings) String 

func (s JobTemplateSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*JobTemplateSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *JobTemplateSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ListJobTemplatesInput 

type ListJobTemplatesInput struct {

	// Optionally, specify a job template category to limit responses to only job
	// templates from that category.
	Category *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// Optional. When you request a list of job templates, you can choose to list
	// them alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't
	// specify, the service will list them by name.
	ListBy *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"listBy" type:"string" enum:"JobTemplateListBy"`

	// Optional. Number of job templates, up to twenty, that will be returned at
	// one time.
	MaxResults *int64 `location:"querystring" locationName:"maxResults" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use this string, provided with the response to a previous request, to request
	// the next batch of job templates.
	NextToken *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// When you request lists of resources, you can optionally specify whether they
	// are sorted in ASCENDING or DESCENDING order. Default varies by resource.
	Order *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"order" type:"string" enum:"Order"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

You can send list job templates requests with an empty body. Optionally, you can filter the response by category by specifying it in your request body. You can also optionally specify the maximum number, up to twenty, of job templates to be returned.

func (ListJobTemplatesInput) GoString 

func (s ListJobTemplatesInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ListJobTemplatesInput) SetCategory 

func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) SetCategory(v string) *ListJobTemplatesInput

SetCategory sets the Category field's value.

func (*ListJobTemplatesInput) SetListBy 

func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) SetListBy(v string) *ListJobTemplatesInput

SetListBy sets the ListBy field's value.

func (*ListJobTemplatesInput) SetMaxResults 

func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) SetMaxResults(v int64) *ListJobTemplatesInput

SetMaxResults sets the MaxResults field's value.

func (*ListJobTemplatesInput) SetNextToken 

func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListJobTemplatesInput

SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.

func (*ListJobTemplatesInput) SetOrder 

func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) SetOrder(v string) *ListJobTemplatesInput

SetOrder sets the Order field's value.

func (ListJobTemplatesInput) String 

func (s ListJobTemplatesInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*ListJobTemplatesInput) Validate added in v1.14.21 

func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ListJobTemplatesOutput 

type ListJobTemplatesOutput struct {

	// List of Job templates.
	JobTemplates []*JobTemplate `locationName:"jobTemplates" type:"list"`

	// Use this string to request the next batch of job templates.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful list job templates requests return a JSON array of job templates. If you don't specify how they are ordered, you will receive them in alphabetical order by name.

func (ListJobTemplatesOutput) GoString 

func (s ListJobTemplatesOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ListJobTemplatesOutput) SetJobTemplates 

func (s *ListJobTemplatesOutput) SetJobTemplates(v []*JobTemplate) *ListJobTemplatesOutput

SetJobTemplates sets the JobTemplates field's value.

func (*ListJobTemplatesOutput) SetNextToken 

func (s *ListJobTemplatesOutput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListJobTemplatesOutput

SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.

func (ListJobTemplatesOutput) String 

func (s ListJobTemplatesOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type ListJobsInput 

type ListJobsInput struct {

	// Optional. Number of jobs, up to twenty, that will be returned at one time.
	MaxResults *int64 `location:"querystring" locationName:"maxResults" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use this string, provided with the response to a previous request, to request
	// the next batch of jobs.
	NextToken *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// When you request lists of resources, you can optionally specify whether they
	// are sorted in ASCENDING or DESCENDING order. Default varies by resource.
	Order *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"order" type:"string" enum:"Order"`

	// Provide a queue name to get back only jobs from that queue.
	Queue *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// A job's status can be SUBMITTED, PROGRESSING, COMPLETE, CANCELED, or ERROR.
	Status *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"status" type:"string" enum:"JobStatus"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

You can send list jobs requests with an empty body. Optionally, you can filter the response by queue and/or job status by specifying them in your request body. You can also optionally specify the maximum number, up to twenty, of jobs to be returned.

func (ListJobsInput) GoString 

func (s ListJobsInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ListJobsInput) SetMaxResults 

func (s *ListJobsInput) SetMaxResults(v int64) *ListJobsInput

SetMaxResults sets the MaxResults field's value.

func (*ListJobsInput) SetNextToken 

func (s *ListJobsInput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListJobsInput

SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.

func (*ListJobsInput) SetOrder 

func (s *ListJobsInput) SetOrder(v string) *ListJobsInput

SetOrder sets the Order field's value.

func (*ListJobsInput) SetQueue 

func (s *ListJobsInput) SetQueue(v string) *ListJobsInput

SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.

func (*ListJobsInput) SetStatus 

func (s *ListJobsInput) SetStatus(v string) *ListJobsInput

SetStatus sets the Status field's value.

func (ListJobsInput) String 

func (s ListJobsInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*ListJobsInput) Validate added in v1.14.21 

func (s *ListJobsInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ListJobsOutput 

type ListJobsOutput struct {

	// List of jobs
	Jobs []*Job `locationName:"jobs" type:"list"`

	// Use this string to request the next batch of jobs.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful list jobs requests return a JSON array of jobs. If you don't specify how they are ordered, you will receive the most recently created first.

func (ListJobsOutput) GoString 

func (s ListJobsOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ListJobsOutput) SetJobs 

func (s *ListJobsOutput) SetJobs(v []*Job) *ListJobsOutput

SetJobs sets the Jobs field's value.

func (*ListJobsOutput) SetNextToken 

func (s *ListJobsOutput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListJobsOutput

SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.

func (ListJobsOutput) String 

func (s ListJobsOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type ListPresetsInput 

type ListPresetsInput struct {

	// Optionally, specify a preset category to limit responses to only presets
	// from that category.
	Category *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// Optional. When you request a list of presets, you can choose to list them
	// alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't
	// specify, the service will list them by name.
	ListBy *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"listBy" type:"string" enum:"PresetListBy"`

	// Optional. Number of presets, up to twenty, that will be returned at one time
	MaxResults *int64 `location:"querystring" locationName:"maxResults" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use this string, provided with the response to a previous request, to request
	// the next batch of presets.
	NextToken *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// When you request lists of resources, you can optionally specify whether they
	// are sorted in ASCENDING or DESCENDING order. Default varies by resource.
	Order *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"order" type:"string" enum:"Order"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

You can send list presets requests with an empty body. Optionally, you can filter the response by category by specifying it in your request body. You can also optionally specify the maximum number, up to twenty, of queues to be returned.

func (ListPresetsInput) GoString 

func (s ListPresetsInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ListPresetsInput) SetCategory 

func (s *ListPresetsInput) SetCategory(v string) *ListPresetsInput

SetCategory sets the Category field's value.

func (*ListPresetsInput) SetListBy 

func (s *ListPresetsInput) SetListBy(v string) *ListPresetsInput

SetListBy sets the ListBy field's value.

func (*ListPresetsInput) SetMaxResults 

func (s *ListPresetsInput) SetMaxResults(v int64) *ListPresetsInput

SetMaxResults sets the MaxResults field's value.

func (*ListPresetsInput) SetNextToken 

func (s *ListPresetsInput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListPresetsInput

SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.

func (*ListPresetsInput) SetOrder 

func (s *ListPresetsInput) SetOrder(v string) *ListPresetsInput

SetOrder sets the Order field's value.

func (ListPresetsInput) String 

func (s ListPresetsInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*ListPresetsInput) Validate added in v1.14.21 

func (s *ListPresetsInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ListPresetsOutput 

type ListPresetsOutput struct {

	// Use this string to request the next batch of presets.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// List of presets
	Presets []*Preset `locationName:"presets" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful list presets requests return a JSON array of presets. If you don't specify how they are ordered, you will receive them alphabetically by name.

func (ListPresetsOutput) GoString 

func (s ListPresetsOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ListPresetsOutput) SetNextToken 

func (s *ListPresetsOutput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListPresetsOutput

SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.

func (*ListPresetsOutput) SetPresets 

func (s *ListPresetsOutput) SetPresets(v []*Preset) *ListPresetsOutput

SetPresets sets the Presets field's value.

func (ListPresetsOutput) String 

func (s ListPresetsOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type ListQueuesInput 

type ListQueuesInput struct {

	// Optional. When you request a list of queues, you can choose to list them
	// alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't
	// specify, the service will list them by creation date.
	ListBy *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"listBy" type:"string" enum:"QueueListBy"`

	// Optional. Number of queues, up to twenty, that will be returned at one time.
	MaxResults *int64 `location:"querystring" locationName:"maxResults" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use this string, provided with the response to a previous request, to request
	// the next batch of queues.
	NextToken *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// When you request lists of resources, you can optionally specify whether they
	// are sorted in ASCENDING or DESCENDING order. Default varies by resource.
	Order *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"order" type:"string" enum:"Order"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

You can send list queues requests with an empty body. You can optionally specify the maximum number, up to twenty, of queues to be returned.

func (ListQueuesInput) GoString 

func (s ListQueuesInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ListQueuesInput) SetListBy 

func (s *ListQueuesInput) SetListBy(v string) *ListQueuesInput

SetListBy sets the ListBy field's value.

func (*ListQueuesInput) SetMaxResults 

func (s *ListQueuesInput) SetMaxResults(v int64) *ListQueuesInput

SetMaxResults sets the MaxResults field's value.

func (*ListQueuesInput) SetNextToken 

func (s *ListQueuesInput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListQueuesInput

SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.

func (*ListQueuesInput) SetOrder 

func (s *ListQueuesInput) SetOrder(v string) *ListQueuesInput

SetOrder sets the Order field's value.

func (ListQueuesInput) String 

func (s ListQueuesInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*ListQueuesInput) Validate added in v1.14.21 

func (s *ListQueuesInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ListQueuesOutput 

type ListQueuesOutput struct {

	// Use this string to request the next batch of queues.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// List of queues.
	Queues []*Queue `locationName:"queues" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful list queues requests return a JSON array of queues. If you don't specify how they are ordered, you will receive them alphabetically by name.

func (ListQueuesOutput) GoString 

func (s ListQueuesOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ListQueuesOutput) SetNextToken 

func (s *ListQueuesOutput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListQueuesOutput

SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.

func (*ListQueuesOutput) SetQueues 

func (s *ListQueuesOutput) SetQueues(v []*Queue) *ListQueuesOutput

SetQueues sets the Queues field's value.

func (ListQueuesOutput) String 

func (s ListQueuesOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type ListTagsForResourceInput added in v1.14.21 

type ListTagsForResourceInput struct {

	// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to list tags
	// for. To get the ARN, send a GET request with the resource name.
	//
	// Arn is a required field
	Arn *string `location:"uri" locationName:"arn" type:"string" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

List the tags for your AWS Elemental MediaConvert resource by sending a request with the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. To get the ARN, send a GET request with the resource name.

func (ListTagsForResourceInput) GoString added in v1.14.21 

func (s ListTagsForResourceInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ListTagsForResourceInput) SetArn added in v1.14.21 

func (s *ListTagsForResourceInput) SetArn(v string) *ListTagsForResourceInput

SetArn sets the Arn field's value.

func (ListTagsForResourceInput) String added in v1.14.21 

func (s ListTagsForResourceInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*ListTagsForResourceInput) Validate added in v1.14.21 

func (s *ListTagsForResourceInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ListTagsForResourceOutput added in v1.14.21 

type ListTagsForResourceOutput struct {

	// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) and tags for an AWS Elemental MediaConvert
	// resource.
	ResourceTags *ResourceTags `locationName:"resourceTags" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

A successful request to list the tags for a resource returns a JSON map of tags.

func (ListTagsForResourceOutput) GoString added in v1.14.21 

func (s ListTagsForResourceOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ListTagsForResourceOutput) SetResourceTags added in v1.14.21 

func (s *ListTagsForResourceOutput) SetResourceTags(v *ResourceTags) *ListTagsForResourceOutput

SetResourceTags sets the ResourceTags field's value.

func (ListTagsForResourceOutput) String added in v1.14.21 

func (s ListTagsForResourceOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type M2tsScte35Esam added in v1.99.0 

type M2tsScte35Esam struct {

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the SCTE-35 stream in the transport stream generated
	// by ESAM.
	Scte35EsamPid *int64 `locationName:"scte35EsamPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for SCTE-35 signals from ESAM. Include this in your job settings to put SCTE-35 markers in your HLS and transport stream outputs at the insertion points that you specify in an ESAM XML document. Provide the document in the setting SCC XML (sccXml).

func (M2tsScte35Esam) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s M2tsScte35Esam) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*M2tsScte35Esam) SetScte35EsamPid added in v1.99.0 

func (s *M2tsScte35Esam) SetScte35EsamPid(v int64) *M2tsScte35Esam

SetScte35EsamPid sets the Scte35EsamPid field's value.

func (M2tsScte35Esam) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s M2tsScte35Esam) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*M2tsScte35Esam) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *M2tsScte35Esam) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type M2tsSettings 

type M2tsSettings struct {

	// Selects between the DVB and ATSC buffer models for Dolby Digital audio.
	AudioBufferModel *string `locationName:"audioBufferModel" type:"string" enum:"M2tsAudioBufferModel"`

	// The number of audio frames to insert for each PES packet.
	AudioFramesPerPes *int64 `locationName:"audioFramesPerPes" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the packet identifiers (PIDs) for any elementary audio streams you
	// include in this output. Specify multiple PIDs as a JSON array. Default is
	// the range 482-492.
	AudioPids []*int64 `locationName:"audioPids" type:"list"`

	// Specify the output bitrate of the transport stream in bits per second. Setting
	// to 0 lets the muxer automatically determine the appropriate bitrate. Other
	// common values are 3750000, 7500000, and 15000000.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" type:"integer"`

	// Controls what buffer model to use for accurate interleaving. If set to MULTIPLEX,
	// use multiplex buffer model. If set to NONE, this can lead to lower latency,
	// but low-memory devices may not be able to play back the stream without interruptions.
	BufferModel *string `locationName:"bufferModel" type:"string" enum:"M2tsBufferModel"`

	// Inserts DVB Network Information Table (NIT) at the specified table repetition
	// interval.
	DvbNitSettings *DvbNitSettings `locationName:"dvbNitSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Inserts DVB Service Description Table (NIT) at the specified table repetition
	// interval.
	DvbSdtSettings *DvbSdtSettings `locationName:"dvbSdtSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the packet identifiers (PIDs) for DVB subtitle data included in this
	// output. Specify multiple PIDs as a JSON array. Default is the range 460-479.
	DvbSubPids []*int64 `locationName:"dvbSubPids" type:"list"`

	// Inserts DVB Time and Date Table (TDT) at the specified table repetition interval.
	DvbTdtSettings *DvbTdtSettings `locationName:"dvbTdtSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) for DVB teletext data you include in
	// this output. Default is 499.
	DvbTeletextPid *int64 `locationName:"dvbTeletextPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// When set to VIDEO_AND_FIXED_INTERVALS, audio EBP markers will be added to
	// partitions 3 and 4. The interval between these additional markers will be
	// fixed, and will be slightly shorter than the video EBP marker interval. When
	// set to VIDEO_INTERVAL, these additional markers will not be inserted. Only
	// applicable when EBP segmentation markers are is selected (segmentationMarkers
	// is EBP or EBP_LEGACY).
	EbpAudioInterval *string `locationName:"ebpAudioInterval" type:"string" enum:"M2tsEbpAudioInterval"`

	// Selects which PIDs to place EBP markers on. They can either be placed only
	// on the video PID, or on both the video PID and all audio PIDs. Only applicable
	// when EBP segmentation markers are is selected (segmentationMarkers is EBP
	// or EBP_LEGACY).
	EbpPlacement *string `locationName:"ebpPlacement" type:"string" enum:"M2tsEbpPlacement"`

	// Controls whether to include the ES Rate field in the PES header.
	EsRateInPes *string `locationName:"esRateInPes" type:"string" enum:"M2tsEsRateInPes"`

	// Keep the default value (DEFAULT) unless you know that your audio EBP markers
	// are incorrectly appearing before your video EBP markers. To correct this
	// problem, set this value to Force (FORCE).
	ForceTsVideoEbpOrder *string `locationName:"forceTsVideoEbpOrder" type:"string" enum:"M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrder"`

	// The length, in seconds, of each fragment. Only used with EBP markers.
	FragmentTime *float64 `locationName:"fragmentTime" type:"double"`

	// Specify the maximum time, in milliseconds, between Program Clock References
	// (PCRs) inserted into the transport stream.
	MaxPcrInterval *int64 `locationName:"maxPcrInterval" type:"integer"`

	// When set, enforces that Encoder Boundary Points do not come within the specified
	// time interval of each other by looking ahead at input video. If another EBP
	// is going to come in within the specified time interval, the current EBP is
	// not emitted, and the segment is "stretched" to the next marker. The lookahead
	// value does not add latency to the system. The Live Event must be configured
	// elsewhere to create sufficient latency to make the lookahead accurate.
	MinEbpInterval *int64 `locationName:"minEbpInterval" type:"integer"`

	// If INSERT, Nielsen inaudible tones for media tracking will be detected in
	// the input audio and an equivalent ID3 tag will be inserted in the output.
	NielsenId3 *string `locationName:"nielsenId3" type:"string" enum:"M2tsNielsenId3"`

	// Value in bits per second of extra null packets to insert into the transport
	// stream. This can be used if a downstream encryption system requires periodic
	// null packets.
	NullPacketBitrate *float64 `locationName:"nullPacketBitrate" type:"double"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	PatInterval *int64 `locationName:"patInterval" type:"integer"`

	// When set to PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET, a Program Clock Reference value is inserted
	// for every Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) header. This is effective only
	// when the PCR PID is the same as the video or audio elementary stream.
	PcrControl *string `locationName:"pcrControl" type:"string" enum:"M2tsPcrControl"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) for the program clock reference (PCR)
	// in this output. If you do not specify a value, the service will use the value
	// for Video PID (VideoPid).
	PcrPid *int64 `locationName:"pcrPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the number of milliseconds between instances of the program map table
	// (PMT) in the output transport stream.
	PmtInterval *int64 `locationName:"pmtInterval" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) for the program map table (PMT) itself.
	// Default is 480.
	PmtPid *int64 `locationName:"pmtPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) of the private metadata stream. Default
	// is 503.
	PrivateMetadataPid *int64 `locationName:"privateMetadataPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Use Program number (programNumber) to specify the program number used in
	// the program map table (PMT) for this output. Default is 1. Program numbers
	// and program map tables are parts of MPEG-2 transport stream containers, used
	// for organizing data.
	ProgramNumber *int64 `locationName:"programNumber" type:"integer"`

	// When set to CBR, inserts null packets into transport stream to fill specified
	// bitrate. When set to VBR, the bitrate setting acts as the maximum bitrate,
	// but the output will not be padded up to that bitrate.
	RateMode *string `locationName:"rateMode" type:"string" enum:"M2tsRateMode"`

	// Include this in your job settings to put SCTE-35 markers in your HLS and
	// transport stream outputs at the insertion points that you specify in an ESAM
	// XML document. Provide the document in the setting SCC XML (sccXml).
	Scte35Esam *M2tsScte35Esam `locationName:"scte35Esam" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) of the SCTE-35 stream in the transport
	// stream.
	Scte35Pid *int64 `locationName:"scte35Pid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// For SCTE-35 markers from your input-- Choose Passthrough (PASSTHROUGH) if
	// you want SCTE-35 markers that appear in your input to also appear in this
	// output. Choose None (NONE) if you don't want SCTE-35 markers in this output.
	// For SCTE-35 markers from an ESAM XML document-- Choose None (NONE). Also
	// provide the ESAM XML as a string in the setting Signal processing notification
	// XML (sccXml). Also enable ESAM SCTE-35 (include the property scte35Esam).
	Scte35Source *string `locationName:"scte35Source" type:"string" enum:"M2tsScte35Source"`

	// Inserts segmentation markers at each segmentation_time period. rai_segstart
	// sets the Random Access Indicator bit in the adaptation field. rai_adapt sets
	// the RAI bit and adds the current timecode in the private data bytes. psi_segstart
	// inserts PAT and PMT tables at the start of segments. ebp adds Encoder Boundary
	// Point information to the adaptation field as per OpenCable specification
	// OC-SP-EBP-I01-130118. ebp_legacy adds Encoder Boundary Point information
	// to the adaptation field using a legacy proprietary format.
	SegmentationMarkers *string `locationName:"segmentationMarkers" type:"string" enum:"M2tsSegmentationMarkers"`

	// The segmentation style parameter controls how segmentation markers are inserted
	// into the transport stream. With avails, it is possible that segments may
	// be truncated, which can influence where future segmentation markers are inserted.
	// When a segmentation style of "reset_cadence" is selected and a segment is
	// truncated due to an avail, we will reset the segmentation cadence. This means
	// the subsequent segment will have a duration of of $segmentation_time seconds.
	// When a segmentation style of "maintain_cadence" is selected and a segment
	// is truncated due to an avail, we will not reset the segmentation cadence.
	// This means the subsequent segment will likely be truncated as well. However,
	// all segments after that will have a duration of $segmentation_time seconds.
	// Note that EBP lookahead is a slight exception to this rule.
	SegmentationStyle *string `locationName:"segmentationStyle" type:"string" enum:"M2tsSegmentationStyle"`

	// Specify the length, in seconds, of each segment. Required unless markers
	// is set to _none_.
	SegmentationTime *float64 `locationName:"segmentationTime" type:"double"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) for timed metadata in this output. Default
	// is 502.
	TimedMetadataPid *int64 `locationName:"timedMetadataPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the ID for the transport stream itself in the program map table for
	// this output. Transport stream IDs and program map tables are parts of MPEG-2
	// transport stream containers, used for organizing data.
	TransportStreamId *int64 `locationName:"transportStreamId" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) of the elementary video stream in the
	// transport stream.
	VideoPid *int64 `locationName:"videoPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

MPEG-2 TS container settings. These apply to outputs in a File output group when the output's container (ContainerType) is MPEG-2 Transport Stream (M2TS). In these assets, data is organized by the program map table (PMT). Each transport stream program contains subsets of data, including audio, video, and metadata. Each of these subsets of data has a numerical label called a packet identifier (PID). Each transport stream program corresponds to one MediaConvert output. The PMT lists the types of data in a program along with their PID. Downstream systems and players use the program map table to look up the PID for each type of data it accesses and then uses the PIDs to locate specific data within the asset.

func (M2tsSettings) GoString 

func (s M2tsSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*M2tsSettings) SetAudioBufferModel 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetAudioBufferModel(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetAudioBufferModel sets the AudioBufferModel field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetAudioFramesPerPes 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetAudioFramesPerPes(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetAudioFramesPerPes sets the AudioFramesPerPes field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetAudioPids 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetAudioPids(v []*int64) *M2tsSettings

SetAudioPids sets the AudioPids field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetBitrate 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetBitrate(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetBufferModel 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetBufferModel(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetBufferModel sets the BufferModel field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetDvbNitSettings 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetDvbNitSettings(v *DvbNitSettings) *M2tsSettings

SetDvbNitSettings sets the DvbNitSettings field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetDvbSdtSettings 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetDvbSdtSettings(v *DvbSdtSettings) *M2tsSettings

SetDvbSdtSettings sets the DvbSdtSettings field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetDvbSubPids 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetDvbSubPids(v []*int64) *M2tsSettings

SetDvbSubPids sets the DvbSubPids field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetDvbTdtSettings 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetDvbTdtSettings(v *DvbTdtSettings) *M2tsSettings

SetDvbTdtSettings sets the DvbTdtSettings field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetDvbTeletextPid 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetDvbTeletextPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetDvbTeletextPid sets the DvbTeletextPid field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetEbpAudioInterval 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetEbpAudioInterval(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetEbpAudioInterval sets the EbpAudioInterval field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetEbpPlacement 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetEbpPlacement(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetEbpPlacement sets the EbpPlacement field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetEsRateInPes 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetEsRateInPes(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetEsRateInPes sets the EsRateInPes field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetForceTsVideoEbpOrder added in v1.99.0 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetForceTsVideoEbpOrder(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetForceTsVideoEbpOrder sets the ForceTsVideoEbpOrder field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetFragmentTime 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetFragmentTime(v float64) *M2tsSettings

SetFragmentTime sets the FragmentTime field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetMaxPcrInterval 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetMaxPcrInterval(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetMaxPcrInterval sets the MaxPcrInterval field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetMinEbpInterval 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetMinEbpInterval(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetMinEbpInterval sets the MinEbpInterval field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetNielsenId3 added in v1.12.78 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetNielsenId3(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetNielsenId3 sets the NielsenId3 field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetNullPacketBitrate 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetNullPacketBitrate(v float64) *M2tsSettings

SetNullPacketBitrate sets the NullPacketBitrate field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetPatInterval 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPatInterval(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetPatInterval sets the PatInterval field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetPcrControl 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPcrControl(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetPcrControl sets the PcrControl field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetPcrPid 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPcrPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetPcrPid sets the PcrPid field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetPmtInterval 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPmtInterval(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetPmtInterval sets the PmtInterval field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetPmtPid 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPmtPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetPmtPid sets the PmtPid field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetPrivateMetadataPid 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPrivateMetadataPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetPrivateMetadataPid sets the PrivateMetadataPid field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetProgramNumber 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetProgramNumber(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetProgramNumber sets the ProgramNumber field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetRateMode 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetRateMode(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetRateMode sets the RateMode field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetScte35Esam added in v1.99.0 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetScte35Esam(v *M2tsScte35Esam) *M2tsSettings

SetScte35Esam sets the Scte35Esam field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetScte35Pid 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetScte35Pid(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetScte35Pid sets the Scte35Pid field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetScte35Source 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetScte35Source(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetScte35Source sets the Scte35Source field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetSegmentationMarkers 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetSegmentationMarkers(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetSegmentationMarkers sets the SegmentationMarkers field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetSegmentationStyle 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetSegmentationStyle(v string) *M2tsSettings

SetSegmentationStyle sets the SegmentationStyle field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetSegmentationTime 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetSegmentationTime(v float64) *M2tsSettings

SetSegmentationTime sets the SegmentationTime field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetTimedMetadataPid added in v1.12.78 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetTimedMetadataPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetTimedMetadataPid sets the TimedMetadataPid field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetTransportStreamId 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetTransportStreamId(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetTransportStreamId sets the TransportStreamId field's value.

func (*M2tsSettings) SetVideoPid 

func (s *M2tsSettings) SetVideoPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings

SetVideoPid sets the VideoPid field's value.

func (M2tsSettings) String 

func (s M2tsSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*M2tsSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *M2tsSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type M3u8Settings 

type M3u8Settings struct {

	// The number of audio frames to insert for each PES packet.
	AudioFramesPerPes *int64 `locationName:"audioFramesPerPes" type:"integer"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the elementary audio stream(s) in the transport
	// stream. Multiple values are accepted, and can be entered in ranges and/or
	// by comma separation.
	AudioPids []*int64 `locationName:"audioPids" type:"list"`

	// If INSERT, Nielsen inaudible tones for media tracking will be detected in
	// the input audio and an equivalent ID3 tag will be inserted in the output.
	NielsenId3 *string `locationName:"nielsenId3" type:"string" enum:"M3u8NielsenId3"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	PatInterval *int64 `locationName:"patInterval" type:"integer"`

	// When set to PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET a Program Clock Reference value is inserted
	// for every Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) header. This parameter is effective
	// only when the PCR PID is the same as the video or audio elementary stream.
	PcrControl *string `locationName:"pcrControl" type:"string" enum:"M3u8PcrControl"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the Program Clock Reference (PCR) in the transport
	// stream. When no value is given, the encoder will assign the same value as
	// the Video PID.
	PcrPid *int64 `locationName:"pcrPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	PmtInterval *int64 `locationName:"pmtInterval" type:"integer"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) for the Program Map Table (PMT) in the transport
	// stream.
	PmtPid *int64 `locationName:"pmtPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the private metadata stream in the transport stream.
	PrivateMetadataPid *int64 `locationName:"privateMetadataPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// The value of the program number field in the Program Map Table.
	ProgramNumber *int64 `locationName:"programNumber" type:"integer"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the SCTE-35 stream in the transport stream.
	Scte35Pid *int64 `locationName:"scte35Pid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// For SCTE-35 markers from your input-- Choose Passthrough (PASSTHROUGH) if
	// you want SCTE-35 markers that appear in your input to also appear in this
	// output. Choose None (NONE) if you don't want SCTE-35 markers in this output.
	// For SCTE-35 markers from an ESAM XML document-- Choose None (NONE) if you
	// don't want manifest conditioning. Choose Passthrough (PASSTHROUGH) and choose
	// Ad markers (adMarkers) if you do want manifest conditioning. In both cases,
	// also provide the ESAM XML as a string in the setting Signal processing notification
	// XML (sccXml).
	Scte35Source *string `locationName:"scte35Source" type:"string" enum:"M3u8Scte35Source"`

	// Applies only to HLS outputs. Use this setting to specify whether the service
	// inserts the ID3 timed metadata from the input in this output.
	TimedMetadata *string `locationName:"timedMetadata" type:"string" enum:"TimedMetadata"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the timed metadata stream in the transport stream.
	TimedMetadataPid *int64 `locationName:"timedMetadataPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// The value of the transport stream ID field in the Program Map Table.
	TransportStreamId *int64 `locationName:"transportStreamId" type:"integer"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the elementary video stream in the transport stream.
	VideoPid *int64 `locationName:"videoPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for TS segments in HLS

func (M3u8Settings) GoString 

func (s M3u8Settings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*M3u8Settings) SetAudioFramesPerPes 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetAudioFramesPerPes(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetAudioFramesPerPes sets the AudioFramesPerPes field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetAudioPids 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetAudioPids(v []*int64) *M3u8Settings

SetAudioPids sets the AudioPids field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetNielsenId3 added in v1.12.78 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetNielsenId3(v string) *M3u8Settings

SetNielsenId3 sets the NielsenId3 field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetPatInterval 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPatInterval(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetPatInterval sets the PatInterval field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetPcrControl 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPcrControl(v string) *M3u8Settings

SetPcrControl sets the PcrControl field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetPcrPid 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPcrPid(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetPcrPid sets the PcrPid field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetPmtInterval 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPmtInterval(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetPmtInterval sets the PmtInterval field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetPmtPid 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPmtPid(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetPmtPid sets the PmtPid field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetPrivateMetadataPid 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPrivateMetadataPid(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetPrivateMetadataPid sets the PrivateMetadataPid field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetProgramNumber 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetProgramNumber(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetProgramNumber sets the ProgramNumber field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetScte35Pid 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetScte35Pid(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetScte35Pid sets the Scte35Pid field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetScte35Source 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetScte35Source(v string) *M3u8Settings

SetScte35Source sets the Scte35Source field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetTimedMetadata 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetTimedMetadata(v string) *M3u8Settings

SetTimedMetadata sets the TimedMetadata field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetTimedMetadataPid 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetTimedMetadataPid(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetTimedMetadataPid sets the TimedMetadataPid field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetTransportStreamId 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetTransportStreamId(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetTransportStreamId sets the TransportStreamId field's value.

func (*M3u8Settings) SetVideoPid 

func (s *M3u8Settings) SetVideoPid(v int64) *M3u8Settings

SetVideoPid sets the VideoPid field's value.

func (M3u8Settings) String 

func (s M3u8Settings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*M3u8Settings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *M3u8Settings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type MediaConvert 

type MediaConvert struct {
	*client.Client
}

MediaConvert provides the API operation methods for making requests to AWS Elemental MediaConvert. See this package's package overview docs for details on the service.

MediaConvert methods are safe to use concurrently. It is not safe to modify mutate any of the struct's properties though.

func New 

func New(p client.ConfigProvider, cfgs ...*aws.Config) *MediaConvert

New creates a new instance of the MediaConvert client with a session. If additional configuration is needed for the client instance use the optional aws.Config parameter to add your extra config.

Example: 

// Create a MediaConvert client from just a session.
svc := mediaconvert.New(mySession)

// Create a MediaConvert client with additional configuration
svc := mediaconvert.New(mySession, aws.NewConfig().WithRegion("us-west-2"))

func (*MediaConvert) AssociateCertificate added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) AssociateCertificate(input *AssociateCertificateInput) (*AssociateCertificateOutput, error)

AssociateCertificate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Associates an AWS Certificate Manager (ACM) Amazon Resource Name (ARN) with AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation AssociateCertificate for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/AssociateCertificate

func (*MediaConvert) AssociateCertificateRequest added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) AssociateCertificateRequest(input *AssociateCertificateInput) (req *request.Request, output *AssociateCertificateOutput)

AssociateCertificateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the AssociateCertificate operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See AssociateCertificate for more information on using the AssociateCertificate API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the AssociateCertificateRequest method.
req, resp := client.AssociateCertificateRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/AssociateCertificate

func (*MediaConvert) AssociateCertificateWithContext added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) AssociateCertificateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *AssociateCertificateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*AssociateCertificateOutput, error)

AssociateCertificateWithContext is the same as AssociateCertificate with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See AssociateCertificate for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) CancelJob 

func (c *MediaConvert) CancelJob(input *CancelJobInput) (*CancelJobOutput, error)

CancelJob API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Permanently cancel a job. Once you have canceled a job, you can't start it again.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation CancelJob for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CancelJob

func (*MediaConvert) CancelJobRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) CancelJobRequest(input *CancelJobInput) (req *request.Request, output *CancelJobOutput)

CancelJobRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the CancelJob operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See CancelJob for more information on using the CancelJob API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the CancelJobRequest method.
req, resp := client.CancelJobRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CancelJob

func (*MediaConvert) CancelJobWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) CancelJobWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *CancelJobInput, opts ...request.Option) (*CancelJobOutput, error)

CancelJobWithContext is the same as CancelJob with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See CancelJob for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) CreateJob 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJob(input *CreateJobInput) (*CreateJobOutput, error)

CreateJob API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Create a new transcoding job. For information about jobs and job settings, see the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation CreateJob for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateJob

func (*MediaConvert) CreateJobRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJobRequest(input *CreateJobInput) (req *request.Request, output *CreateJobOutput)

CreateJobRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the CreateJob operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See CreateJob for more information on using the CreateJob API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the CreateJobRequest method.
req, resp := client.CreateJobRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateJob

func (*MediaConvert) CreateJobTemplate 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJobTemplate(input *CreateJobTemplateInput) (*CreateJobTemplateOutput, error)

CreateJobTemplate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Create a new job template. For information about job templates see the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation CreateJobTemplate for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateJobTemplate

func (*MediaConvert) CreateJobTemplateRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJobTemplateRequest(input *CreateJobTemplateInput) (req *request.Request, output *CreateJobTemplateOutput)

CreateJobTemplateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the CreateJobTemplate operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See CreateJobTemplate for more information on using the CreateJobTemplate API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the CreateJobTemplateRequest method.
req, resp := client.CreateJobTemplateRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateJobTemplate

func (*MediaConvert) CreateJobTemplateWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJobTemplateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *CreateJobTemplateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*CreateJobTemplateOutput, error)

CreateJobTemplateWithContext is the same as CreateJobTemplate with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See CreateJobTemplate for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) CreateJobWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJobWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *CreateJobInput, opts ...request.Option) (*CreateJobOutput, error)

CreateJobWithContext is the same as CreateJob with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See CreateJob for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) CreatePreset 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreatePreset(input *CreatePresetInput) (*CreatePresetOutput, error)

CreatePreset API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Create a new preset. For information about job templates see the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation CreatePreset for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreatePreset

func (*MediaConvert) CreatePresetRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreatePresetRequest(input *CreatePresetInput) (req *request.Request, output *CreatePresetOutput)

CreatePresetRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the CreatePreset operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See CreatePreset for more information on using the CreatePreset API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the CreatePresetRequest method.
req, resp := client.CreatePresetRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreatePreset

func (*MediaConvert) CreatePresetWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreatePresetWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *CreatePresetInput, opts ...request.Option) (*CreatePresetOutput, error)

CreatePresetWithContext is the same as CreatePreset with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See CreatePreset for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) CreateQueue 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreateQueue(input *CreateQueueInput) (*CreateQueueOutput, error)

CreateQueue API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Create a new transcoding queue. For information about queues, see Working With Queues in the User Guide at https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/working-with-queues.html

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation CreateQueue for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateQueue

func (*MediaConvert) CreateQueueRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreateQueueRequest(input *CreateQueueInput) (req *request.Request, output *CreateQueueOutput)

CreateQueueRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the CreateQueue operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See CreateQueue for more information on using the CreateQueue API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the CreateQueueRequest method.
req, resp := client.CreateQueueRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateQueue

func (*MediaConvert) CreateQueueWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) CreateQueueWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *CreateQueueInput, opts ...request.Option) (*CreateQueueOutput, error)

CreateQueueWithContext is the same as CreateQueue with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See CreateQueue for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) DeleteJobTemplate 

func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteJobTemplate(input *DeleteJobTemplateInput) (*DeleteJobTemplateOutput, error)

DeleteJobTemplate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Permanently delete a job template you have created.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation DeleteJobTemplate for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeleteJobTemplate

func (*MediaConvert) DeleteJobTemplateRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteJobTemplateRequest(input *DeleteJobTemplateInput) (req *request.Request, output *DeleteJobTemplateOutput)

DeleteJobTemplateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the DeleteJobTemplate operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See DeleteJobTemplate for more information on using the DeleteJobTemplate API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the DeleteJobTemplateRequest method.
req, resp := client.DeleteJobTemplateRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeleteJobTemplate

func (*MediaConvert) DeleteJobTemplateWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteJobTemplateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DeleteJobTemplateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*DeleteJobTemplateOutput, error)

DeleteJobTemplateWithContext is the same as DeleteJobTemplate with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See DeleteJobTemplate for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) DeletePreset 

func (c *MediaConvert) DeletePreset(input *DeletePresetInput) (*DeletePresetOutput, error)

DeletePreset API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Permanently delete a preset you have created.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation DeletePreset for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeletePreset

func (*MediaConvert) DeletePresetRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) DeletePresetRequest(input *DeletePresetInput) (req *request.Request, output *DeletePresetOutput)

DeletePresetRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the DeletePreset operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See DeletePreset for more information on using the DeletePreset API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the DeletePresetRequest method.
req, resp := client.DeletePresetRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeletePreset

func (*MediaConvert) DeletePresetWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) DeletePresetWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DeletePresetInput, opts ...request.Option) (*DeletePresetOutput, error)

DeletePresetWithContext is the same as DeletePreset with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See DeletePreset for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) DeleteQueue 

func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteQueue(input *DeleteQueueInput) (*DeleteQueueOutput, error)

DeleteQueue API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Permanently delete a queue you have created.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation DeleteQueue for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeleteQueue

func (*MediaConvert) DeleteQueueRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteQueueRequest(input *DeleteQueueInput) (req *request.Request, output *DeleteQueueOutput)

DeleteQueueRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the DeleteQueue operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See DeleteQueue for more information on using the DeleteQueue API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the DeleteQueueRequest method.
req, resp := client.DeleteQueueRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeleteQueue

func (*MediaConvert) DeleteQueueWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteQueueWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DeleteQueueInput, opts ...request.Option) (*DeleteQueueOutput, error)

DeleteQueueWithContext is the same as DeleteQueue with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See DeleteQueue for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) DescribeEndpoints 

func (c *MediaConvert) DescribeEndpoints(input *DescribeEndpointsInput) (*DescribeEndpointsOutput, error)

DescribeEndpoints API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Send an request with an empty body to the regional API endpoint to get your account API endpoint.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation DescribeEndpoints for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DescribeEndpoints

func (*MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsPages added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsPages(input *DescribeEndpointsInput, fn func(*DescribeEndpointsOutput, bool) bool) error

DescribeEndpointsPages iterates over the pages of a DescribeEndpoints operation, calling the "fn" function with the response data for each page. To stop iterating, return false from the fn function.

See DescribeEndpoints method for more information on how to use this operation.

Note: This operation can generate multiple requests to a service. 

// Example iterating over at most 3 pages of a DescribeEndpoints operation.
pageNum := 0
err := client.DescribeEndpointsPages(params,
    func(page *mediaconvert.DescribeEndpointsOutput, lastPage bool) bool {
        pageNum++
        fmt.Println(page)
        return pageNum <= 3
    })

func (*MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsPagesWithContext added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsPagesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DescribeEndpointsInput, fn func(*DescribeEndpointsOutput, bool) bool, opts ...request.Option) error

DescribeEndpointsPagesWithContext same as DescribeEndpointsPages except it takes a Context and allows setting request options on the pages.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsRequest(input *DescribeEndpointsInput) (req *request.Request, output *DescribeEndpointsOutput)

DescribeEndpointsRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the DescribeEndpoints operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See DescribeEndpoints for more information on using the DescribeEndpoints API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the DescribeEndpointsRequest method.
req, resp := client.DescribeEndpointsRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DescribeEndpoints

func (*MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DescribeEndpointsInput, opts ...request.Option) (*DescribeEndpointsOutput, error)

DescribeEndpointsWithContext is the same as DescribeEndpoints with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See DescribeEndpoints for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) DisassociateCertificate added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) DisassociateCertificate(input *DisassociateCertificateInput) (*DisassociateCertificateOutput, error)

DisassociateCertificate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Removes an association between the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an AWS Certificate Manager (ACM) certificate and an AWS Elemental MediaConvert resource.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation DisassociateCertificate for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DisassociateCertificate

func (*MediaConvert) DisassociateCertificateRequest added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) DisassociateCertificateRequest(input *DisassociateCertificateInput) (req *request.Request, output *DisassociateCertificateOutput)

DisassociateCertificateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the DisassociateCertificate operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See DisassociateCertificate for more information on using the DisassociateCertificate API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the DisassociateCertificateRequest method.
req, resp := client.DisassociateCertificateRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DisassociateCertificate

func (*MediaConvert) DisassociateCertificateWithContext added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) DisassociateCertificateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DisassociateCertificateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*DisassociateCertificateOutput, error)

DisassociateCertificateWithContext is the same as DisassociateCertificate with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See DisassociateCertificate for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) GetJob 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetJob(input *GetJobInput) (*GetJobOutput, error)

GetJob API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Retrieve the JSON for a specific completed transcoding job.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation GetJob for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetJob

func (*MediaConvert) GetJobRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetJobRequest(input *GetJobInput) (req *request.Request, output *GetJobOutput)

GetJobRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the GetJob operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See GetJob for more information on using the GetJob API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the GetJobRequest method.
req, resp := client.GetJobRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetJob

func (*MediaConvert) GetJobTemplate 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetJobTemplate(input *GetJobTemplateInput) (*GetJobTemplateOutput, error)

GetJobTemplate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Retrieve the JSON for a specific job template.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation GetJobTemplate for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetJobTemplate

func (*MediaConvert) GetJobTemplateRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetJobTemplateRequest(input *GetJobTemplateInput) (req *request.Request, output *GetJobTemplateOutput)

GetJobTemplateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the GetJobTemplate operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See GetJobTemplate for more information on using the GetJobTemplate API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the GetJobTemplateRequest method.
req, resp := client.GetJobTemplateRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetJobTemplate

func (*MediaConvert) GetJobTemplateWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetJobTemplateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *GetJobTemplateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*GetJobTemplateOutput, error)

GetJobTemplateWithContext is the same as GetJobTemplate with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See GetJobTemplate for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) GetJobWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetJobWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *GetJobInput, opts ...request.Option) (*GetJobOutput, error)

GetJobWithContext is the same as GetJob with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See GetJob for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) GetPreset 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetPreset(input *GetPresetInput) (*GetPresetOutput, error)

GetPreset API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Retrieve the JSON for a specific preset.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation GetPreset for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetPreset

func (*MediaConvert) GetPresetRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetPresetRequest(input *GetPresetInput) (req *request.Request, output *GetPresetOutput)

GetPresetRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the GetPreset operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See GetPreset for more information on using the GetPreset API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the GetPresetRequest method.
req, resp := client.GetPresetRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetPreset

func (*MediaConvert) GetPresetWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetPresetWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *GetPresetInput, opts ...request.Option) (*GetPresetOutput, error)

GetPresetWithContext is the same as GetPreset with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See GetPreset for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) GetQueue 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetQueue(input *GetQueueInput) (*GetQueueOutput, error)

GetQueue API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Retrieve the JSON for a specific queue.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation GetQueue for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetQueue

func (*MediaConvert) GetQueueRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetQueueRequest(input *GetQueueInput) (req *request.Request, output *GetQueueOutput)

GetQueueRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the GetQueue operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See GetQueue for more information on using the GetQueue API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the GetQueueRequest method.
req, resp := client.GetQueueRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetQueue

func (*MediaConvert) GetQueueWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) GetQueueWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *GetQueueInput, opts ...request.Option) (*GetQueueOutput, error)

GetQueueWithContext is the same as GetQueue with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See GetQueue for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) ListJobTemplates 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobTemplates(input *ListJobTemplatesInput) (*ListJobTemplatesOutput, error)

ListJobTemplates API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Retrieve a JSON array of up to twenty of your job templates. This will return the templates themselves, not just a list of them. To retrieve the next twenty templates, use the nextToken string returned with the array

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation ListJobTemplates for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListJobTemplates

func (*MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesPages added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesPages(input *ListJobTemplatesInput, fn func(*ListJobTemplatesOutput, bool) bool) error

ListJobTemplatesPages iterates over the pages of a ListJobTemplates operation, calling the "fn" function with the response data for each page. To stop iterating, return false from the fn function.

See ListJobTemplates method for more information on how to use this operation.

Note: This operation can generate multiple requests to a service. 

// Example iterating over at most 3 pages of a ListJobTemplates operation.
pageNum := 0
err := client.ListJobTemplatesPages(params,
    func(page *mediaconvert.ListJobTemplatesOutput, lastPage bool) bool {
        pageNum++
        fmt.Println(page)
        return pageNum <= 3
    })

func (*MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesPagesWithContext added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesPagesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListJobTemplatesInput, fn func(*ListJobTemplatesOutput, bool) bool, opts ...request.Option) error

ListJobTemplatesPagesWithContext same as ListJobTemplatesPages except it takes a Context and allows setting request options on the pages.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesRequest(input *ListJobTemplatesInput) (req *request.Request, output *ListJobTemplatesOutput)

ListJobTemplatesRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the ListJobTemplates operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See ListJobTemplates for more information on using the ListJobTemplates API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the ListJobTemplatesRequest method.
req, resp := client.ListJobTemplatesRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListJobTemplates

func (*MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListJobTemplatesInput, opts ...request.Option) (*ListJobTemplatesOutput, error)

ListJobTemplatesWithContext is the same as ListJobTemplates with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See ListJobTemplates for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) ListJobs 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobs(input *ListJobsInput) (*ListJobsOutput, error)

ListJobs API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Retrieve a JSON array of up to twenty of your most recently created jobs. This array includes in-process, completed, and errored jobs. This will return the jobs themselves, not just a list of the jobs. To retrieve the twenty next most recent jobs, use the nextToken string returned with the array.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation ListJobs for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListJobs

func (*MediaConvert) ListJobsPages added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobsPages(input *ListJobsInput, fn func(*ListJobsOutput, bool) bool) error

ListJobsPages iterates over the pages of a ListJobs operation, calling the "fn" function with the response data for each page. To stop iterating, return false from the fn function.

See ListJobs method for more information on how to use this operation.

Note: This operation can generate multiple requests to a service. 

// Example iterating over at most 3 pages of a ListJobs operation.
pageNum := 0
err := client.ListJobsPages(params,
    func(page *mediaconvert.ListJobsOutput, lastPage bool) bool {
        pageNum++
        fmt.Println(page)
        return pageNum <= 3
    })

func (*MediaConvert) ListJobsPagesWithContext added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobsPagesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListJobsInput, fn func(*ListJobsOutput, bool) bool, opts ...request.Option) error

ListJobsPagesWithContext same as ListJobsPages except it takes a Context and allows setting request options on the pages.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) ListJobsRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobsRequest(input *ListJobsInput) (req *request.Request, output *ListJobsOutput)

ListJobsRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the ListJobs operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See ListJobs for more information on using the ListJobs API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the ListJobsRequest method.
req, resp := client.ListJobsRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListJobs

func (*MediaConvert) ListJobsWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobsWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListJobsInput, opts ...request.Option) (*ListJobsOutput, error)

ListJobsWithContext is the same as ListJobs with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See ListJobs for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) ListPresets 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListPresets(input *ListPresetsInput) (*ListPresetsOutput, error)

ListPresets API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Retrieve a JSON array of up to twenty of your presets. This will return the presets themselves, not just a list of them. To retrieve the next twenty presets, use the nextToken string returned with the array.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation ListPresets for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListPresets

func (*MediaConvert) ListPresetsPages added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListPresetsPages(input *ListPresetsInput, fn func(*ListPresetsOutput, bool) bool) error

ListPresetsPages iterates over the pages of a ListPresets operation, calling the "fn" function with the response data for each page. To stop iterating, return false from the fn function.

See ListPresets method for more information on how to use this operation.

Note: This operation can generate multiple requests to a service. 

// Example iterating over at most 3 pages of a ListPresets operation.
pageNum := 0
err := client.ListPresetsPages(params,
    func(page *mediaconvert.ListPresetsOutput, lastPage bool) bool {
        pageNum++
        fmt.Println(page)
        return pageNum <= 3
    })

func (*MediaConvert) ListPresetsPagesWithContext added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListPresetsPagesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListPresetsInput, fn func(*ListPresetsOutput, bool) bool, opts ...request.Option) error

ListPresetsPagesWithContext same as ListPresetsPages except it takes a Context and allows setting request options on the pages.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) ListPresetsRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListPresetsRequest(input *ListPresetsInput) (req *request.Request, output *ListPresetsOutput)

ListPresetsRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the ListPresets operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See ListPresets for more information on using the ListPresets API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the ListPresetsRequest method.
req, resp := client.ListPresetsRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListPresets

func (*MediaConvert) ListPresetsWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListPresetsWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListPresetsInput, opts ...request.Option) (*ListPresetsOutput, error)

ListPresetsWithContext is the same as ListPresets with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See ListPresets for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) ListQueues 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListQueues(input *ListQueuesInput) (*ListQueuesOutput, error)

ListQueues API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Retrieve a JSON array of up to twenty of your queues. This will return the queues themselves, not just a list of them. To retrieve the next twenty queues, use the nextToken string returned with the array.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation ListQueues for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListQueues

func (*MediaConvert) ListQueuesPages added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListQueuesPages(input *ListQueuesInput, fn func(*ListQueuesOutput, bool) bool) error

ListQueuesPages iterates over the pages of a ListQueues operation, calling the "fn" function with the response data for each page. To stop iterating, return false from the fn function.

See ListQueues method for more information on how to use this operation.

Note: This operation can generate multiple requests to a service. 

// Example iterating over at most 3 pages of a ListQueues operation.
pageNum := 0
err := client.ListQueuesPages(params,
    func(page *mediaconvert.ListQueuesOutput, lastPage bool) bool {
        pageNum++
        fmt.Println(page)
        return pageNum <= 3
    })

func (*MediaConvert) ListQueuesPagesWithContext added in v1.99.0 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListQueuesPagesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListQueuesInput, fn func(*ListQueuesOutput, bool) bool, opts ...request.Option) error

ListQueuesPagesWithContext same as ListQueuesPages except it takes a Context and allows setting request options on the pages.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) ListQueuesRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListQueuesRequest(input *ListQueuesInput) (req *request.Request, output *ListQueuesOutput)

ListQueuesRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the ListQueues operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See ListQueues for more information on using the ListQueues API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the ListQueuesRequest method.
req, resp := client.ListQueuesRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListQueues

func (*MediaConvert) ListQueuesWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListQueuesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListQueuesInput, opts ...request.Option) (*ListQueuesOutput, error)

ListQueuesWithContext is the same as ListQueues with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See ListQueues for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) ListTagsForResource added in v1.14.21 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListTagsForResource(input *ListTagsForResourceInput) (*ListTagsForResourceOutput, error)

ListTagsForResource API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Retrieve the tags for a MediaConvert resource.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation ListTagsForResource for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListTagsForResource

func (*MediaConvert) ListTagsForResourceRequest added in v1.14.21 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListTagsForResourceRequest(input *ListTagsForResourceInput) (req *request.Request, output *ListTagsForResourceOutput)

ListTagsForResourceRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the ListTagsForResource operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See ListTagsForResource for more information on using the ListTagsForResource API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the ListTagsForResourceRequest method.
req, resp := client.ListTagsForResourceRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListTagsForResource

func (*MediaConvert) ListTagsForResourceWithContext added in v1.14.21 

func (c *MediaConvert) ListTagsForResourceWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListTagsForResourceInput, opts ...request.Option) (*ListTagsForResourceOutput, error)

ListTagsForResourceWithContext is the same as ListTagsForResource with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See ListTagsForResource for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) TagResource added in v1.14.21 

func (c *MediaConvert) TagResource(input *TagResourceInput) (*TagResourceOutput, error)

TagResource API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Add tags to a MediaConvert queue, preset, or job template. For information about tagging, see the User Guide at https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/tagging-resources.html

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation TagResource for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/TagResource

func (*MediaConvert) TagResourceRequest added in v1.14.21 

func (c *MediaConvert) TagResourceRequest(input *TagResourceInput) (req *request.Request, output *TagResourceOutput)

TagResourceRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the TagResource operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See TagResource for more information on using the TagResource API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the TagResourceRequest method.
req, resp := client.TagResourceRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/TagResource

func (*MediaConvert) TagResourceWithContext added in v1.14.21 

func (c *MediaConvert) TagResourceWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *TagResourceInput, opts ...request.Option) (*TagResourceOutput, error)

TagResourceWithContext is the same as TagResource with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See TagResource for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) UntagResource added in v1.14.21 

func (c *MediaConvert) UntagResource(input *UntagResourceInput) (*UntagResourceOutput, error)

UntagResource API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Remove tags from a MediaConvert queue, preset, or job template. For information about tagging, see the User Guide at https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/tagging-resources.html

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation UntagResource for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UntagResource

func (*MediaConvert) UntagResourceRequest added in v1.14.21 

func (c *MediaConvert) UntagResourceRequest(input *UntagResourceInput) (req *request.Request, output *UntagResourceOutput)

UntagResourceRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the UntagResource operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See UntagResource for more information on using the UntagResource API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the UntagResourceRequest method.
req, resp := client.UntagResourceRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UntagResource

func (*MediaConvert) UntagResourceWithContext added in v1.14.21 

func (c *MediaConvert) UntagResourceWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *UntagResourceInput, opts ...request.Option) (*UntagResourceOutput, error)

UntagResourceWithContext is the same as UntagResource with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See UntagResource for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) UpdateJobTemplate 

func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateJobTemplate(input *UpdateJobTemplateInput) (*UpdateJobTemplateOutput, error)

UpdateJobTemplate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Modify one of your existing job templates.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation UpdateJobTemplate for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdateJobTemplate

func (*MediaConvert) UpdateJobTemplateRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateJobTemplateRequest(input *UpdateJobTemplateInput) (req *request.Request, output *UpdateJobTemplateOutput)

UpdateJobTemplateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the UpdateJobTemplate operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See UpdateJobTemplate for more information on using the UpdateJobTemplate API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the UpdateJobTemplateRequest method.
req, resp := client.UpdateJobTemplateRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdateJobTemplate

func (*MediaConvert) UpdateJobTemplateWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateJobTemplateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *UpdateJobTemplateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*UpdateJobTemplateOutput, error)

UpdateJobTemplateWithContext is the same as UpdateJobTemplate with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See UpdateJobTemplate for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) UpdatePreset 

func (c *MediaConvert) UpdatePreset(input *UpdatePresetInput) (*UpdatePresetOutput, error)

UpdatePreset API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Modify one of your existing presets.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation UpdatePreset for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdatePreset

func (*MediaConvert) UpdatePresetRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) UpdatePresetRequest(input *UpdatePresetInput) (req *request.Request, output *UpdatePresetOutput)

UpdatePresetRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the UpdatePreset operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See UpdatePreset for more information on using the UpdatePreset API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the UpdatePresetRequest method.
req, resp := client.UpdatePresetRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdatePreset

func (*MediaConvert) UpdatePresetWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) UpdatePresetWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *UpdatePresetInput, opts ...request.Option) (*UpdatePresetOutput, error)

UpdatePresetWithContext is the same as UpdatePreset with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See UpdatePreset for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

func (*MediaConvert) UpdateQueue 

func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateQueue(input *UpdateQueueInput) (*UpdateQueueOutput, error)

UpdateQueue API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.

Modify one of your existing queues.

Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about the error.

See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's API operation UpdateQueue for usage and error information.

Returned Error Codes:

  • ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"

  • ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"

  • ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"

  • ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"

  • ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"

  • ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdateQueue

func (*MediaConvert) UpdateQueueRequest 

func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateQueueRequest(input *UpdateQueueInput) (req *request.Request, output *UpdateQueueOutput)

UpdateQueueRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the client's request for the UpdateQueue operation. The "output" return value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes successfully.

Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service. the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.

See UpdateQueue for more information on using the UpdateQueue API call, and error handling.

This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic. 

// Example sending a request using the UpdateQueueRequest method.
req, resp := client.UpdateQueueRequest(params)

err := req.Send()
if err == nil { // resp is now filled
    fmt.Println(resp)
}

See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdateQueue

func (*MediaConvert) UpdateQueueWithContext 

func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateQueueWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *UpdateQueueInput, opts ...request.Option) (*UpdateQueueOutput, error)

UpdateQueueWithContext is the same as UpdateQueue with the addition of the ability to pass a context and additional request options.

See UpdateQueue for details on how to use this API operation.

The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/ for more information on using Contexts.

type MotionImageInserter added in v1.99.0 

type MotionImageInserter struct {

	// If your motion graphic asset is a .mov file, keep this setting unspecified.
	// If your motion graphic asset is a series of .png files, specify the frame
	// rate of the overlay in frames per second, as a fraction. For example, specify
	// 24 fps as 24/1. Make sure that the number of images in your series matches
	// the frame rate and your intended overlay duration. For example, if you want
	// a 30-second overlay at 30 fps, you should have 900 .png images. This overlay
	// frame rate doesn't need to match the frame rate of the underlying video.
	Framerate *MotionImageInsertionFramerate `locationName:"framerate" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the .mov file or series of .png files that you want to overlay on
	// your video. For .png files, provide the file name of the first file in the
	// series. Make sure that the names of the .png files end with sequential numbers
	// that specify the order that they are played in. For example, overlay_000.png,
	// overlay_001.png, overlay_002.png, and so on. The sequence must start at zero,
	// and each image file name must have the same number of digits. Pad your initial
	// file names with enough zeros to complete the sequence. For example, if the
	// first image is overlay_0.png, there can be only 10 images in the sequence,
	// with the last image being overlay_9.png. But if the first image is overlay_00.png,
	// there can be 100 images in the sequence.
	Input *string `locationName:"input" min:"14" type:"string"`

	// Choose the type of motion graphic asset that you are providing for your overlay.
	// You can choose either a .mov file or a series of .png files.
	InsertionMode *string `locationName:"insertionMode" type:"string" enum:"MotionImageInsertionMode"`

	// Use Offset to specify the placement of your motion graphic overlay on the
	// video frame. Specify in pixels, from the upper-left corner of the frame.
	// If you don't specify an offset, the service scales your overlay to the full
	// size of the frame. Otherwise, the service inserts the overlay at its native
	// resolution and scales the size up or down with any video scaling.
	Offset *MotionImageInsertionOffset `locationName:"offset" type:"structure"`

	// Specify whether your motion graphic overlay repeats on a loop or plays only
	// once.
	Playback *string `locationName:"playback" type:"string" enum:"MotionImagePlayback"`

	// Specify when the motion overlay begins. Use timecode format (HH:MM:SS:FF
	// or HH:MM:SS;FF). Make sure that the timecode you provide here takes into
	// account how you have set up your timecode configuration under both job settings
	// and input settings. The simplest way to do that is to set both to start at
	// 0. If you need to set up your job to follow timecodes embedded in your source
	// that don't start at zero, make sure that you specify a start time that is
	// after the first embedded timecode. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/setting-up-timecode.html
	// Find job-wide and input timecode configuration settings in your JSON job
	// settings specification at settings>timecodeConfig>source and settings>inputs>timecodeSource.
	StartTime *string `locationName:"startTime" min:"11" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Overlay motion graphics on top of your video at the time that you specify.

func (MotionImageInserter) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s MotionImageInserter) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*MotionImageInserter) SetFramerate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetFramerate(v *MotionImageInsertionFramerate) *MotionImageInserter

SetFramerate sets the Framerate field's value.

func (*MotionImageInserter) SetInput added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetInput(v string) *MotionImageInserter

SetInput sets the Input field's value.

func (*MotionImageInserter) SetInsertionMode added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetInsertionMode(v string) *MotionImageInserter

SetInsertionMode sets the InsertionMode field's value.

func (*MotionImageInserter) SetOffset added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetOffset(v *MotionImageInsertionOffset) *MotionImageInserter

SetOffset sets the Offset field's value.

func (*MotionImageInserter) SetPlayback added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetPlayback(v string) *MotionImageInserter

SetPlayback sets the Playback field's value.

func (*MotionImageInserter) SetStartTime added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetStartTime(v string) *MotionImageInserter

SetStartTime sets the StartTime field's value.

func (MotionImageInserter) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s MotionImageInserter) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*MotionImageInserter) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInserter) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type MotionImageInsertionFramerate added in v1.99.0 

type MotionImageInsertionFramerate struct {

	// The bottom of the fraction that expresses your overlay frame rate. For example,
	// if your frame rate is 24 fps, set this value to 1.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// The top of the fraction that expresses your overlay frame rate. For example,
	// if your frame rate is 24 fps, set this value to 24.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

For motion overlays that don't have a built-in frame rate, specify the frame rate of the overlay in frames per second, as a fraction. For example, specify 24 fps as 24/1. The overlay frame rate doesn't need to match the frame rate of the underlying video.

func (MotionImageInsertionFramerate) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s MotionImageInsertionFramerate) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*MotionImageInsertionFramerate) SetFramerateDenominator added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInsertionFramerate) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *MotionImageInsertionFramerate

SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.

func (*MotionImageInsertionFramerate) SetFramerateNumerator added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInsertionFramerate) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *MotionImageInsertionFramerate

SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.

func (MotionImageInsertionFramerate) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s MotionImageInsertionFramerate) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*MotionImageInsertionFramerate) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInsertionFramerate) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type MotionImageInsertionOffset added in v1.99.0 

type MotionImageInsertionOffset struct {

	// Set the distance, in pixels, between the overlay and the left edge of the
	// video frame.
	ImageX *int64 `locationName:"imageX" type:"integer"`

	// Set the distance, in pixels, between the overlay and the top edge of the
	// video frame.
	ImageY *int64 `locationName:"imageY" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Specify the offset between the upper-left corner of the video frame and the top left corner of the overlay.

func (MotionImageInsertionOffset) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s MotionImageInsertionOffset) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*MotionImageInsertionOffset) SetImageX added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInsertionOffset) SetImageX(v int64) *MotionImageInsertionOffset

SetImageX sets the ImageX field's value.

func (*MotionImageInsertionOffset) SetImageY added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MotionImageInsertionOffset) SetImageY(v int64) *MotionImageInsertionOffset

SetImageY sets the ImageY field's value.

func (MotionImageInsertionOffset) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s MotionImageInsertionOffset) String() string

String returns the string representation

type MovSettings 

type MovSettings struct {

	// When enabled, include 'clap' atom if appropriate for the video output settings.
	ClapAtom *string `locationName:"clapAtom" type:"string" enum:"MovClapAtom"`

	// When enabled, file composition times will start at zero, composition times
	// in the 'ctts' (composition time to sample) box for B-frames will be negative,
	// and a 'cslg' (composition shift least greatest) box will be included per
	// 14496-1 amendment 1. This improves compatibility with Apple players and tools.
	CslgAtom *string `locationName:"cslgAtom" type:"string" enum:"MovCslgAtom"`

	// When set to XDCAM, writes MPEG2 video streams into the QuickTime file using
	// XDCAM fourcc codes. This increases compatibility with Apple editors and players,
	// but may decrease compatibility with other players. Only applicable when the
	// video codec is MPEG2.
	Mpeg2FourCCControl *string `locationName:"mpeg2FourCCControl" type:"string" enum:"MovMpeg2FourCCControl"`

	// If set to OMNEON, inserts Omneon-compatible padding
	PaddingControl *string `locationName:"paddingControl" type:"string" enum:"MovPaddingControl"`

	// Always keep the default value (SELF_CONTAINED) for this setting.
	Reference *string `locationName:"reference" type:"string" enum:"MovReference"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for MOV Container.

func (MovSettings) GoString 

func (s MovSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*MovSettings) SetClapAtom 

func (s *MovSettings) SetClapAtom(v string) *MovSettings

SetClapAtom sets the ClapAtom field's value.

func (*MovSettings) SetCslgAtom 

func (s *MovSettings) SetCslgAtom(v string) *MovSettings

SetCslgAtom sets the CslgAtom field's value.

func (*MovSettings) SetMpeg2FourCCControl 

func (s *MovSettings) SetMpeg2FourCCControl(v string) *MovSettings

SetMpeg2FourCCControl sets the Mpeg2FourCCControl field's value.

func (*MovSettings) SetPaddingControl 

func (s *MovSettings) SetPaddingControl(v string) *MovSettings

SetPaddingControl sets the PaddingControl field's value.

func (*MovSettings) SetReference 

func (s *MovSettings) SetReference(v string) *MovSettings

SetReference sets the Reference field's value.

func (MovSettings) String 

func (s MovSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type Mp2Settings 

type Mp2Settings struct {

	// Specify the average bitrate in bits per second.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"32000" type:"integer"`

	// Set Channels to specify the number of channels in this output audio track.
	// Choosing Mono in the console will give you 1 output channel; choosing Stereo
	// will give you 2. In the API, valid values are 1 and 2.
	Channels *int64 `locationName:"channels" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Sample rate in hz.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"32000" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to the value MP2.

func (Mp2Settings) GoString 

func (s Mp2Settings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Mp2Settings) SetBitrate 

func (s *Mp2Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *Mp2Settings

SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.

func (*Mp2Settings) SetChannels 

func (s *Mp2Settings) SetChannels(v int64) *Mp2Settings

SetChannels sets the Channels field's value.

func (*Mp2Settings) SetSampleRate 

func (s *Mp2Settings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *Mp2Settings

SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.

func (Mp2Settings) String 

func (s Mp2Settings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*Mp2Settings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *Mp2Settings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Mp4Settings 

type Mp4Settings struct {

	// When enabled, file composition times will start at zero, composition times
	// in the 'ctts' (composition time to sample) box for B-frames will be negative,
	// and a 'cslg' (composition shift least greatest) box will be included per
	// 14496-1 amendment 1. This improves compatibility with Apple players and tools.
	CslgAtom *string `locationName:"cslgAtom" type:"string" enum:"Mp4CslgAtom"`

	// Inserts a free-space box immediately after the moov box.
	FreeSpaceBox *string `locationName:"freeSpaceBox" type:"string" enum:"Mp4FreeSpaceBox"`

	// If set to PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD, the MOOV atom is relocated to the beginning
	// of the archive as required for progressive downloading. Otherwise it is placed
	// normally at the end.
	MoovPlacement *string `locationName:"moovPlacement" type:"string" enum:"Mp4MoovPlacement"`

	// Overrides the "Major Brand" field in the output file. Usually not necessary
	// to specify.
	Mp4MajorBrand *string `locationName:"mp4MajorBrand" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for MP4 container. You can create audio-only AAC outputs with this container.

func (Mp4Settings) GoString 

func (s Mp4Settings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Mp4Settings) SetCslgAtom 

func (s *Mp4Settings) SetCslgAtom(v string) *Mp4Settings

SetCslgAtom sets the CslgAtom field's value.

func (*Mp4Settings) SetFreeSpaceBox 

func (s *Mp4Settings) SetFreeSpaceBox(v string) *Mp4Settings

SetFreeSpaceBox sets the FreeSpaceBox field's value.

func (*Mp4Settings) SetMoovPlacement 

func (s *Mp4Settings) SetMoovPlacement(v string) *Mp4Settings

SetMoovPlacement sets the MoovPlacement field's value.

func (*Mp4Settings) SetMp4MajorBrand 

func (s *Mp4Settings) SetMp4MajorBrand(v string) *Mp4Settings

SetMp4MajorBrand sets the Mp4MajorBrand field's value.

func (Mp4Settings) String 

func (s Mp4Settings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type Mpeg2Settings 

type Mpeg2Settings struct {

	// Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual
	// quality.
	AdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"adaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Specify the average bitrate in bits per second. Required for VBR and CBR.
	// For MS Smooth outputs, bitrates must be unique when rounded down to the nearest
	// multiple of 1000.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Use Level (Mpeg2CodecLevel) to set the MPEG-2 level for the video output.
	CodecLevel *string `locationName:"codecLevel" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2CodecLevel"`

	// Use Profile (Mpeg2CodecProfile) to set the MPEG-2 profile for the video output.
	CodecProfile *string `locationName:"codecProfile" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2CodecProfile"`

	// Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content.
	// This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information
	// based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames
	// for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the
	// value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).
	DynamicSubGop *string `locationName:"dynamicSubGop" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2DynamicSubGop"`

	// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
	// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
	// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
	// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
	// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
	// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
	// job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
	// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
	// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
	// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
	// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
	FramerateControl *string `locationName:"framerateControl" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2FramerateControl"`

	// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
	FramerateConversionAlgorithm *string `locationName:"framerateConversionAlgorithm" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithm"`

	// Frame rate denominator.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Frame rate numerator - frame rate is a fraction, e.g. 24000 / 1001 = 23.976
	// fps.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"24" type:"integer"`

	// Frequency of closed GOPs. In streaming applications, it is recommended that
	// this be set to 1 so a decoder joining mid-stream will receive an IDR frame
	// as quickly as possible. Setting this value to 0 will break output segmenting.
	GopClosedCadence *int64 `locationName:"gopClosedCadence" type:"integer"`

	// GOP Length (keyframe interval) in frames or seconds. Must be greater than
	// zero.
	GopSize *float64 `locationName:"gopSize" type:"double"`

	// Indicates if the GOP Size in MPEG2 is specified in frames or seconds. If
	// seconds the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.
	GopSizeUnits *string `locationName:"gopSizeUnits" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2GopSizeUnits"`

	// Percentage of the buffer that should initially be filled (HRD buffer model).
	HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferInitialFillPercentage" type:"integer"`

	// Size of buffer (HRD buffer model) in bits. For example, enter five megabits
	// as 5000000.
	HrdBufferSize *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferSize" type:"integer"`

	// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
	// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
	// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
	// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
	// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
	// behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the
	// output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow
	// the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and
	// "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be
	// interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
	// on which of the Follow options you chose.
	InterlaceMode *string `locationName:"interlaceMode" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2InterlaceMode"`

	// Use Intra DC precision (Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision) to set quantization precision
	// for intra-block DC coefficients. If you choose the value auto, the service
	// will automatically select the precision based on the per-frame compression
	// ratio.
	IntraDcPrecision *string `locationName:"intraDcPrecision" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision"`

	// Maximum bitrate in bits/second. For example, enter five megabits per second
	// as 5000000.
	MaxBitrate *int64 `locationName:"maxBitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Enforces separation between repeated (cadence) I-frames and I-frames inserted
	// by Scene Change Detection. If a scene change I-frame is within I-interval
	// frames of a cadence I-frame, the GOP is shrunk and/or stretched to the scene
	// change I-frame. GOP stretch requires enabling lookahead as well as setting
	// I-interval. The normal cadence resumes for the next GOP. This setting is
	// only used when Scene Change Detect is enabled. Note: Maximum GOP stretch
	// = GOP size + Min-I-interval - 1
	MinIInterval *int64 `locationName:"minIInterval" type:"integer"`

	// Number of B-frames between reference frames.
	NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames *int64 `locationName:"numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames" type:"integer"`

	// Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the
	// pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing
	// Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.
	ParControl *string `locationName:"parControl" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2ParControl"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio denominator.
	ParDenominator *int64 `locationName:"parDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio numerator.
	ParNumerator *int64 `locationName:"parNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use Quality tuning level (Mpeg2QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to
	// use single-pass or multipass video encoding.
	QualityTuningLevel *string `locationName:"qualityTuningLevel" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2QualityTuningLevel"`

	// Use Rate control mode (Mpeg2RateControlMode) to specifiy whether the bitrate
	// is variable (vbr) or constant (cbr).
	RateControlMode *string `locationName:"rateControlMode" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2RateControlMode"`

	// Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).
	SceneChangeDetect *string `locationName:"sceneChangeDetect" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2SceneChangeDetect"`

	// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
	// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
	SlowPal *string `locationName:"slowPal" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2SlowPal"`

	// Softness. Selects quantizer matrix, larger values reduce high-frequency content
	// in the encoded image.
	Softness *int64 `locationName:"softness" type:"integer"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content
	// complexity.
	SpatialAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"spatialAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Produces a Type D-10 compatible bitstream (SMPTE 356M-2001).
	Syntax *string `locationName:"syntax" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2Syntax"`

	// Only use Telecine (Mpeg2Telecine) when you set Framerate (Framerate) to 29.970.
	// Set Telecine (Mpeg2Telecine) to Hard (hard) to produce a 29.97i output from
	// a 23.976 input. Set it to Soft (soft) to produce 23.976 output and leave
	// converstion to the player.
	Telecine *string `locationName:"telecine" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2Telecine"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content
	// complexity.
	TemporalAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"temporalAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantization"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to the value MPEG2.

func (Mpeg2Settings) GoString 

func (s Mpeg2Settings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetAdaptiveQuantization sets the AdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetBitrate 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetCodecLevel 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetCodecLevel(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetCodecLevel sets the CodecLevel field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetCodecProfile 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetCodecProfile(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetCodecProfile sets the CodecProfile field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetDynamicSubGop added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetDynamicSubGop(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetDynamicSubGop sets the DynamicSubGop field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateControl 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateControl(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetFramerateControl sets the FramerateControl field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm sets the FramerateConversionAlgorithm field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateDenominator 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateNumerator 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetGopClosedCadence 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetGopClosedCadence(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetGopClosedCadence sets the GopClosedCadence field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetGopSize 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetGopSize(v float64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetGopSize sets the GopSize field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetGopSizeUnits 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetGopSizeUnits(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetGopSizeUnits sets the GopSizeUnits field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage sets the HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetHrdBufferSize 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetHrdBufferSize(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetHrdBufferSize sets the HrdBufferSize field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetInterlaceMode 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetInterlaceMode(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetInterlaceMode sets the InterlaceMode field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetIntraDcPrecision 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetIntraDcPrecision(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetIntraDcPrecision sets the IntraDcPrecision field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetMaxBitrate 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetMaxBitrate(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetMaxBitrate sets the MaxBitrate field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetMinIInterval 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetMinIInterval(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetMinIInterval sets the MinIInterval field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames sets the NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetParControl 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetParControl(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetParControl sets the ParControl field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetParDenominator 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetParDenominator(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetParDenominator sets the ParDenominator field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetParNumerator 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetParNumerator(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetParNumerator sets the ParNumerator field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetQualityTuningLevel 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetQualityTuningLevel(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetQualityTuningLevel sets the QualityTuningLevel field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetRateControlMode 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetRateControlMode(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetRateControlMode sets the RateControlMode field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetSceneChangeDetect 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetSceneChangeDetect(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetSceneChangeDetect sets the SceneChangeDetect field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetSlowPal 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetSlowPal(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetSlowPal sets the SlowPal field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetSoftness 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetSoftness(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings

SetSoftness sets the Softness field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization sets the SpatialAdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetSyntax 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetSyntax(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetSyntax sets the Syntax field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetTelecine 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetTelecine(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetTelecine sets the Telecine field's value.

func (*Mpeg2Settings) SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *Mpeg2Settings

SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization sets the TemporalAdaptiveQuantization field's value.

func (Mpeg2Settings) String 

func (s Mpeg2Settings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*Mpeg2Settings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *Mpeg2Settings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type MsSmoothEncryptionSettings 

type MsSmoothEncryptionSettings struct {

	// Settings for use with a SPEKE key provider
	SpekeKeyProvider *SpekeKeyProvider `locationName:"spekeKeyProvider" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

If you are using DRM, set DRM System (MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) to specify the value SpekeKeyProvider.

func (MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) GoString 

func (s MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) SetSpekeKeyProvider 

func (s *MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) SetSpekeKeyProvider(v *SpekeKeyProvider) *MsSmoothEncryptionSettings

SetSpekeKeyProvider sets the SpekeKeyProvider field's value.

func (MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) String 

func (s MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type MsSmoothGroupSettings 

type MsSmoothGroupSettings struct {

	// COMBINE_DUPLICATE_STREAMS combines identical audio encoding settings across
	// a Microsoft Smooth output group into a single audio stream.
	AudioDeduplication *string `locationName:"audioDeduplication" type:"string" enum:"MsSmoothAudioDeduplication"`

	// Use Destination (Destination) to specify the S3 output location and the output
	// filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify
	// the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input
	// file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the
	// first input file.
	Destination *string `locationName:"destination" type:"string"`

	// Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of
	// destination
	DestinationSettings *DestinationSettings `locationName:"destinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// If you are using DRM, set DRM System (MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) to specify
	// the value SpekeKeyProvider.
	Encryption *MsSmoothEncryptionSettings `locationName:"encryption" type:"structure"`

	// Use Fragment length (FragmentLength) to specify the mp4 fragment sizes in
	// seconds. Fragment length must be compatible with GOP size and frame rate.
	FragmentLength *int64 `locationName:"fragmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use Manifest encoding (MsSmoothManifestEncoding) to specify the encoding
	// format for the server and client manifest. Valid options are utf8 and utf16.
	ManifestEncoding *string `locationName:"manifestEncoding" type:"string" enum:"MsSmoothManifestEncoding"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to MS_SMOOTH_GROUP_SETTINGS.

func (MsSmoothGroupSettings) GoString 

func (s MsSmoothGroupSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetAudioDeduplication 

func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetAudioDeduplication(v string) *MsSmoothGroupSettings

SetAudioDeduplication sets the AudioDeduplication field's value.

func (*MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetDestination 

func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetDestination(v string) *MsSmoothGroupSettings

SetDestination sets the Destination field's value.

func (*MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetDestinationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetDestinationSettings(v *DestinationSettings) *MsSmoothGroupSettings

SetDestinationSettings sets the DestinationSettings field's value.

func (*MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetEncryption 

func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetEncryption(v *MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) *MsSmoothGroupSettings

SetEncryption sets the Encryption field's value.

func (*MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetFragmentLength 

func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetFragmentLength(v int64) *MsSmoothGroupSettings

SetFragmentLength sets the FragmentLength field's value.

func (*MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetManifestEncoding 

func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetManifestEncoding(v string) *MsSmoothGroupSettings

SetManifestEncoding sets the ManifestEncoding field's value.

func (MsSmoothGroupSettings) String 

func (s MsSmoothGroupSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*MsSmoothGroupSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type NielsenConfiguration 

type NielsenConfiguration struct {

	// Nielsen has discontinued the use of breakout code functionality. If you must
	// include this property, set the value to zero.
	BreakoutCode *int64 `locationName:"breakoutCode" type:"integer"`

	// Use Distributor ID (DistributorID) to specify the distributor ID that is
	// assigned to your organization by Neilsen.
	DistributorId *string `locationName:"distributorId" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for your Nielsen configuration. If you don't do Nielsen measurement and analytics, ignore these settings. When you enable Nielsen configuration (nielsenConfiguration), MediaConvert enables PCM to ID3 tagging for all outputs in the job. To enable Nielsen configuration programmatically, include an instance of nielsenConfiguration in your JSON job specification. Even if you don't include any children of nielsenConfiguration, you still enable the setting.

func (NielsenConfiguration) GoString 

func (s NielsenConfiguration) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*NielsenConfiguration) SetBreakoutCode 

func (s *NielsenConfiguration) SetBreakoutCode(v int64) *NielsenConfiguration

SetBreakoutCode sets the BreakoutCode field's value.

func (*NielsenConfiguration) SetDistributorId 

func (s *NielsenConfiguration) SetDistributorId(v string) *NielsenConfiguration

SetDistributorId sets the DistributorId field's value.

func (NielsenConfiguration) String 

func (s NielsenConfiguration) String() string

String returns the string representation

type NoiseReducer 

type NoiseReducer struct {

	// Use Noise reducer filter (NoiseReducerFilter) to select one of the following
	// spatial image filtering functions. To use this setting, you must also enable
	// Noise reducer (NoiseReducer). * Bilateral is an edge preserving noise reduction
	// filter. * Mean (softest), Gaussian, Lanczos, and Sharpen (sharpest) are convolution
	// filters. * Conserve is a min/max noise reduction filter. * Spatial is a frequency-domain
	// filter based on JND principles.
	Filter *string `locationName:"filter" type:"string" enum:"NoiseReducerFilter"`

	// Settings for a noise reducer filter
	FilterSettings *NoiseReducerFilterSettings `locationName:"filterSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Noise reducer filter settings for spatial filter.
	SpatialFilterSettings *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings `locationName:"spatialFilterSettings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Enable the Noise reducer (NoiseReducer) feature to remove noise from your video output if necessary. Enable or disable this feature for each output individually. This setting is disabled by default. When you enable Noise reducer (NoiseReducer), you must also select a value for Noise reducer filter (NoiseReducerFilter).

func (NoiseReducer) GoString 

func (s NoiseReducer) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*NoiseReducer) SetFilter 

func (s *NoiseReducer) SetFilter(v string) *NoiseReducer

SetFilter sets the Filter field's value.

func (*NoiseReducer) SetFilterSettings 

func (s *NoiseReducer) SetFilterSettings(v *NoiseReducerFilterSettings) *NoiseReducer

SetFilterSettings sets the FilterSettings field's value.

func (*NoiseReducer) SetSpatialFilterSettings 

func (s *NoiseReducer) SetSpatialFilterSettings(v *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) *NoiseReducer

SetSpatialFilterSettings sets the SpatialFilterSettings field's value.

func (NoiseReducer) String 

func (s NoiseReducer) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*NoiseReducer) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *NoiseReducer) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type NoiseReducerFilterSettings 

type NoiseReducerFilterSettings struct {

	// Relative strength of noise reducing filter. Higher values produce stronger
	// filtering.
	Strength *int64 `locationName:"strength" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for a noise reducer filter

func (NoiseReducerFilterSettings) GoString 

func (s NoiseReducerFilterSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*NoiseReducerFilterSettings) SetStrength 

func (s *NoiseReducerFilterSettings) SetStrength(v int64) *NoiseReducerFilterSettings

SetStrength sets the Strength field's value.

func (NoiseReducerFilterSettings) String 

func (s NoiseReducerFilterSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings 

type NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings struct {

	// Specify strength of post noise reduction sharpening filter, with 0 disabling
	// the filter and 3 enabling it at maximum strength.
	PostFilterSharpenStrength *int64 `locationName:"postFilterSharpenStrength" type:"integer"`

	// The speed of the filter, from -2 (lower speed) to 3 (higher speed), with
	// 0 being the nominal value.
	Speed *int64 `locationName:"speed" type:"integer"`

	// Relative strength of noise reducing filter. Higher values produce stronger
	// filtering.
	Strength *int64 `locationName:"strength" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Noise reducer filter settings for spatial filter.

func (NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) GoString 

func (s NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) SetPostFilterSharpenStrength 

func (s *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) SetPostFilterSharpenStrength(v int64) *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings

SetPostFilterSharpenStrength sets the PostFilterSharpenStrength field's value.

func (*NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) SetSpeed 

func (s *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) SetSpeed(v int64) *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings

SetSpeed sets the Speed field's value.

func (*NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) SetStrength 

func (s *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) SetStrength(v int64) *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings

SetStrength sets the Strength field's value.

func (NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) String 

func (s NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Output 

type Output struct {

	// (AudioDescriptions) contains groups of audio encoding settings organized
	// by audio codec. Include one instance of (AudioDescriptions) per output. (AudioDescriptions)
	// can contain multiple groups of encoding settings.
	AudioDescriptions []*AudioDescription `locationName:"audioDescriptions" type:"list"`

	// (CaptionDescriptions) contains groups of captions settings. For each output
	// that has captions, include one instance of (CaptionDescriptions). (CaptionDescriptions)
	// can contain multiple groups of captions settings.
	CaptionDescriptions []*CaptionDescription `locationName:"captionDescriptions" type:"list"`

	// Container specific settings.
	ContainerSettings *ContainerSettings `locationName:"containerSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Use Extension (Extension) to specify the file extension for outputs in File
	// output groups. If you do not specify a value, the service will use default
	// extensions by container type as follows * MPEG-2 transport stream, m2ts *
	// Quicktime, mov * MXF container, mxf * MPEG-4 container, mp4 * No Container,
	// the service will use codec extensions (e.g. AAC, H265, H265, AC3)
	Extension *string `locationName:"extension" type:"string"`

	// Use Name modifier (NameModifier) to have the service add a string to the
	// end of each output filename. You specify the base filename as part of your
	// destination URI. When you create multiple outputs in the same output group,
	// Name modifier (NameModifier) is required. Name modifier also accepts format
	// identifiers. For DASH ISO outputs, if you use the format identifiers $Number$
	// or $Time$ in one output, you must use them in the same way in all outputs
	// of the output group.
	NameModifier *string `locationName:"nameModifier" min:"1" type:"string"`

	// Specific settings for this type of output.
	OutputSettings *OutputSettings `locationName:"outputSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Use Preset (Preset) to specifiy a preset for your transcoding settings. Provide
	// the system or custom preset name. You can specify either Preset (Preset)
	// or Container settings (ContainerSettings), but not both.
	Preset *string `locationName:"preset" type:"string"`

	// (VideoDescription) contains a group of video encoding settings. The specific
	// video settings depend on the video codec that you choose when you specify
	// a value for Video codec (codec). Include one instance of (VideoDescription)
	// per output.
	VideoDescription *VideoDescription `locationName:"videoDescription" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

An output object describes the settings for a single output file or stream in an output group.

func (Output) GoString 

func (s Output) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Output) SetAudioDescriptions 

func (s *Output) SetAudioDescriptions(v []*AudioDescription) *Output

SetAudioDescriptions sets the AudioDescriptions field's value.

func (*Output) SetCaptionDescriptions 

func (s *Output) SetCaptionDescriptions(v []*CaptionDescription) *Output

SetCaptionDescriptions sets the CaptionDescriptions field's value.

func (*Output) SetContainerSettings 

func (s *Output) SetContainerSettings(v *ContainerSettings) *Output

SetContainerSettings sets the ContainerSettings field's value.

func (*Output) SetExtension 

func (s *Output) SetExtension(v string) *Output

SetExtension sets the Extension field's value.

func (*Output) SetNameModifier 

func (s *Output) SetNameModifier(v string) *Output

SetNameModifier sets the NameModifier field's value.

func (*Output) SetOutputSettings 

func (s *Output) SetOutputSettings(v *OutputSettings) *Output

SetOutputSettings sets the OutputSettings field's value.

func (*Output) SetPreset 

func (s *Output) SetPreset(v string) *Output

SetPreset sets the Preset field's value.

func (*Output) SetVideoDescription 

func (s *Output) SetVideoDescription(v *VideoDescription) *Output

SetVideoDescription sets the VideoDescription field's value.

func (Output) String 

func (s Output) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*Output) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *Output) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type OutputChannelMapping 

type OutputChannelMapping struct {

	// List of input channels
	InputChannels []*int64 `locationName:"inputChannels" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

OutputChannel mapping settings.

func (OutputChannelMapping) GoString 

func (s OutputChannelMapping) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*OutputChannelMapping) SetInputChannels 

func (s *OutputChannelMapping) SetInputChannels(v []*int64) *OutputChannelMapping

SetInputChannels sets the InputChannels field's value.

func (OutputChannelMapping) String 

func (s OutputChannelMapping) String() string

String returns the string representation

type OutputDetail 

type OutputDetail struct {

	// Duration in milliseconds
	DurationInMs *int64 `locationName:"durationInMs" type:"integer"`

	// Contains details about the output's video stream
	VideoDetails *VideoDetail `locationName:"videoDetails" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Details regarding output

func (OutputDetail) GoString 

func (s OutputDetail) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*OutputDetail) SetDurationInMs 

func (s *OutputDetail) SetDurationInMs(v int64) *OutputDetail

SetDurationInMs sets the DurationInMs field's value.

func (*OutputDetail) SetVideoDetails 

func (s *OutputDetail) SetVideoDetails(v *VideoDetail) *OutputDetail

SetVideoDetails sets the VideoDetails field's value.

func (OutputDetail) String 

func (s OutputDetail) String() string

String returns the string representation

type OutputGroup 

type OutputGroup struct {

	// Use Custom Group Name (CustomName) to specify a name for the output group.
	// This value is displayed on the console and can make your job settings JSON
	// more human-readable. It does not affect your outputs. Use up to twelve characters
	// that are either letters, numbers, spaces, or underscores.
	CustomName *string `locationName:"customName" type:"string"`

	// Name of the output group
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string"`

	// Output Group settings, including type
	OutputGroupSettings *OutputGroupSettings `locationName:"outputGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// This object holds groups of encoding settings, one group of settings per
	// output.
	Outputs []*Output `locationName:"outputs" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Group of outputs

func (OutputGroup) GoString 

func (s OutputGroup) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*OutputGroup) SetCustomName 

func (s *OutputGroup) SetCustomName(v string) *OutputGroup

SetCustomName sets the CustomName field's value.

func (*OutputGroup) SetName 

func (s *OutputGroup) SetName(v string) *OutputGroup

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (*OutputGroup) SetOutputGroupSettings 

func (s *OutputGroup) SetOutputGroupSettings(v *OutputGroupSettings) *OutputGroup

SetOutputGroupSettings sets the OutputGroupSettings field's value.

func (*OutputGroup) SetOutputs 

func (s *OutputGroup) SetOutputs(v []*Output) *OutputGroup

SetOutputs sets the Outputs field's value.

func (OutputGroup) String 

func (s OutputGroup) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*OutputGroup) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *OutputGroup) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type OutputGroupDetail 

type OutputGroupDetail struct {

	// Details about the output
	OutputDetails []*OutputDetail `locationName:"outputDetails" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Contains details about the output groups specified in the job settings.

func (OutputGroupDetail) GoString 

func (s OutputGroupDetail) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*OutputGroupDetail) SetOutputDetails 

func (s *OutputGroupDetail) SetOutputDetails(v []*OutputDetail) *OutputGroupDetail

SetOutputDetails sets the OutputDetails field's value.

func (OutputGroupDetail) String 

func (s OutputGroupDetail) String() string

String returns the string representation

type OutputGroupSettings 

type OutputGroupSettings struct {

	// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
	// CMAF_GROUP_SETTINGS. Each output in a CMAF Output Group may only contain
	// a single video, audio, or caption output.
	CmafGroupSettings *CmafGroupSettings `locationName:"cmafGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
	// DASH_ISO_GROUP_SETTINGS.
	DashIsoGroupSettings *DashIsoGroupSettings `locationName:"dashIsoGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
	// FILE_GROUP_SETTINGS.
	FileGroupSettings *FileGroupSettings `locationName:"fileGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
	// HLS_GROUP_SETTINGS.
	HlsGroupSettings *HlsGroupSettings `locationName:"hlsGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
	// MS_SMOOTH_GROUP_SETTINGS.
	MsSmoothGroupSettings *MsSmoothGroupSettings `locationName:"msSmoothGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Type of output group (File group, Apple HLS, DASH ISO, Microsoft Smooth Streaming,
	// CMAF)
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"OutputGroupType"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Output Group settings, including type

func (OutputGroupSettings) GoString 

func (s OutputGroupSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*OutputGroupSettings) SetCmafGroupSettings added in v1.14.0 

func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetCmafGroupSettings(v *CmafGroupSettings) *OutputGroupSettings

SetCmafGroupSettings sets the CmafGroupSettings field's value.

func (*OutputGroupSettings) SetDashIsoGroupSettings 

func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetDashIsoGroupSettings(v *DashIsoGroupSettings) *OutputGroupSettings

SetDashIsoGroupSettings sets the DashIsoGroupSettings field's value.

func (*OutputGroupSettings) SetFileGroupSettings 

func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetFileGroupSettings(v *FileGroupSettings) *OutputGroupSettings

SetFileGroupSettings sets the FileGroupSettings field's value.

func (*OutputGroupSettings) SetHlsGroupSettings 

func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetHlsGroupSettings(v *HlsGroupSettings) *OutputGroupSettings

SetHlsGroupSettings sets the HlsGroupSettings field's value.

func (*OutputGroupSettings) SetMsSmoothGroupSettings 

func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetMsSmoothGroupSettings(v *MsSmoothGroupSettings) *OutputGroupSettings

SetMsSmoothGroupSettings sets the MsSmoothGroupSettings field's value.

func (*OutputGroupSettings) SetType 

func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetType(v string) *OutputGroupSettings

SetType sets the Type field's value.

func (OutputGroupSettings) String 

func (s OutputGroupSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*OutputGroupSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *OutputGroupSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type OutputSettings 

type OutputSettings struct {

	// Settings for HLS output groups
	HlsSettings *HlsSettings `locationName:"hlsSettings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Specific settings for this type of output.

func (OutputSettings) GoString 

func (s OutputSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*OutputSettings) SetHlsSettings 

func (s *OutputSettings) SetHlsSettings(v *HlsSettings) *OutputSettings

SetHlsSettings sets the HlsSettings field's value.

func (OutputSettings) String 

func (s OutputSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type Preset 

type Preset struct {

	// An identifier for this resource that is unique within all of AWS.
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string"`

	// An optional category you create to organize your presets.
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for preset creation.
	CreatedAt *time.Time `locationName:"createdAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// An optional description you create for each preset.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds when the preset was last updated.
	LastUpdated *time.Time `locationName:"lastUpdated" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// A name you create for each preset. Each name must be unique within your account.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Settings for preset
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *PresetSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// A preset can be of two types: system or custom. System or built-in preset
	// can't be modified or deleted by the user.
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"Type"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

A preset is a collection of preconfigured media conversion settings that you want MediaConvert to apply to the output during the conversion process.

func (Preset) GoString 

func (s Preset) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Preset) SetArn 

func (s *Preset) SetArn(v string) *Preset

SetArn sets the Arn field's value.

func (*Preset) SetCategory 

func (s *Preset) SetCategory(v string) *Preset

SetCategory sets the Category field's value.

func (*Preset) SetCreatedAt 

func (s *Preset) SetCreatedAt(v time.Time) *Preset

SetCreatedAt sets the CreatedAt field's value.

func (*Preset) SetDescription 

func (s *Preset) SetDescription(v string) *Preset

SetDescription sets the Description field's value.

func (*Preset) SetLastUpdated 

func (s *Preset) SetLastUpdated(v time.Time) *Preset

SetLastUpdated sets the LastUpdated field's value.

func (*Preset) SetName 

func (s *Preset) SetName(v string) *Preset

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (*Preset) SetSettings 

func (s *Preset) SetSettings(v *PresetSettings) *Preset

SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.

func (*Preset) SetType 

func (s *Preset) SetType(v string) *Preset

SetType sets the Type field's value.

func (Preset) String 

func (s Preset) String() string

String returns the string representation

type PresetSettings 

type PresetSettings struct {

	// (AudioDescriptions) contains groups of audio encoding settings organized
	// by audio codec. Include one instance of (AudioDescriptions) per output. (AudioDescriptions)
	// can contain multiple groups of encoding settings.
	AudioDescriptions []*AudioDescription `locationName:"audioDescriptions" type:"list"`

	// Caption settings for this preset. There can be multiple caption settings
	// in a single output.
	CaptionDescriptions []*CaptionDescriptionPreset `locationName:"captionDescriptions" type:"list"`

	// Container specific settings.
	ContainerSettings *ContainerSettings `locationName:"containerSettings" type:"structure"`

	// (VideoDescription) contains a group of video encoding settings. The specific
	// video settings depend on the video codec that you choose when you specify
	// a value for Video codec (codec). Include one instance of (VideoDescription)
	// per output.
	VideoDescription *VideoDescription `locationName:"videoDescription" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for preset

func (PresetSettings) GoString 

func (s PresetSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*PresetSettings) SetAudioDescriptions 

func (s *PresetSettings) SetAudioDescriptions(v []*AudioDescription) *PresetSettings

SetAudioDescriptions sets the AudioDescriptions field's value.

func (*PresetSettings) SetCaptionDescriptions 

func (s *PresetSettings) SetCaptionDescriptions(v []*CaptionDescriptionPreset) *PresetSettings

SetCaptionDescriptions sets the CaptionDescriptions field's value.

func (*PresetSettings) SetContainerSettings 

func (s *PresetSettings) SetContainerSettings(v *ContainerSettings) *PresetSettings

SetContainerSettings sets the ContainerSettings field's value.

func (*PresetSettings) SetVideoDescription 

func (s *PresetSettings) SetVideoDescription(v *VideoDescription) *PresetSettings

SetVideoDescription sets the VideoDescription field's value.

func (PresetSettings) String 

func (s PresetSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*PresetSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *PresetSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ProresSettings 

type ProresSettings struct {

	// Use Profile (ProResCodecProfile) to specifiy the type of Apple ProRes codec
	// to use for this output.
	CodecProfile *string `locationName:"codecProfile" type:"string" enum:"ProresCodecProfile"`

	// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
	// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
	// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
	// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
	// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
	// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
	// job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
	// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
	// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
	// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
	// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
	FramerateControl *string `locationName:"framerateControl" type:"string" enum:"ProresFramerateControl"`

	// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
	FramerateConversionAlgorithm *string `locationName:"framerateConversionAlgorithm" type:"string" enum:"ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithm"`

	// Frame rate denominator.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// When you use the API for transcode jobs that use frame rate conversion, specify
	// the frame rate as a fraction. For example, 24000 / 1001 = 23.976 fps. Use
	// FramerateNumerator to specify the numerator of this fraction. In this example,
	// use 24000 for the value of FramerateNumerator.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
	// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
	// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
	// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
	// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
	// behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the
	// output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow
	// the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and
	// "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be
	// interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
	// on which of the Follow options you chose.
	InterlaceMode *string `locationName:"interlaceMode" type:"string" enum:"ProresInterlaceMode"`

	// Use (ProresParControl) to specify how the service determines the pixel aspect
	// ratio. Set to Follow source (INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE) to use the pixel aspect
	// ratio from the input. To specify a different pixel aspect ratio: Using the
	// console, choose it from the dropdown menu. Using the API, set ProresParControl
	// to (SPECIFIED) and provide for (ParNumerator) and (ParDenominator).
	ParControl *string `locationName:"parControl" type:"string" enum:"ProresParControl"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio denominator.
	ParDenominator *int64 `locationName:"parDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio numerator.
	ParNumerator *int64 `locationName:"parNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
	// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
	SlowPal *string `locationName:"slowPal" type:"string" enum:"ProresSlowPal"`

	// Only use Telecine (ProresTelecine) when you set Framerate (Framerate) to
	// 29.970. Set Telecine (ProresTelecine) to Hard (hard) to produce a 29.97i
	// output from a 23.976 input. Set it to Soft (soft) to produce 23.976 output
	// and leave converstion to the player.
	Telecine *string `locationName:"telecine" type:"string" enum:"ProresTelecine"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to the value PRORES.

func (ProresSettings) GoString 

func (s ProresSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ProresSettings) SetCodecProfile 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetCodecProfile(v string) *ProresSettings

SetCodecProfile sets the CodecProfile field's value.

func (*ProresSettings) SetFramerateControl 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetFramerateControl(v string) *ProresSettings

SetFramerateControl sets the FramerateControl field's value.

func (*ProresSettings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm(v string) *ProresSettings

SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm sets the FramerateConversionAlgorithm field's value.

func (*ProresSettings) SetFramerateDenominator 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *ProresSettings

SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.

func (*ProresSettings) SetFramerateNumerator 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *ProresSettings

SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.

func (*ProresSettings) SetInterlaceMode 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetInterlaceMode(v string) *ProresSettings

SetInterlaceMode sets the InterlaceMode field's value.

func (*ProresSettings) SetParControl 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetParControl(v string) *ProresSettings

SetParControl sets the ParControl field's value.

func (*ProresSettings) SetParDenominator 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetParDenominator(v int64) *ProresSettings

SetParDenominator sets the ParDenominator field's value.

func (*ProresSettings) SetParNumerator 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetParNumerator(v int64) *ProresSettings

SetParNumerator sets the ParNumerator field's value.

func (*ProresSettings) SetSlowPal 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetSlowPal(v string) *ProresSettings

SetSlowPal sets the SlowPal field's value.

func (*ProresSettings) SetTelecine 

func (s *ProresSettings) SetTelecine(v string) *ProresSettings

SetTelecine sets the Telecine field's value.

func (ProresSettings) String 

func (s ProresSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*ProresSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *ProresSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type Queue 

type Queue struct {

	// An identifier for this resource that is unique within all of AWS.
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for when you created the queue.
	CreatedAt *time.Time `locationName:"createdAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// An optional description that you create for each queue.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for when you most recently updated the queue.
	LastUpdated *time.Time `locationName:"lastUpdated" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// A name that you create for each queue. Each name must be unique within your
	// account.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Specifies whether the pricing plan for the queue is on-demand or reserved.
	// For on-demand, you pay per minute, billed in increments of .01 minute. For
	// reserved, you pay for the transcoding capacity of the entire queue, regardless
	// of how much or how little you use it. Reserved pricing requires a 12-month
	// commitment.
	PricingPlan *string `locationName:"pricingPlan" type:"string" enum:"PricingPlan"`

	// The estimated number of jobs with a PROGRESSING status.
	ProgressingJobsCount *int64 `locationName:"progressingJobsCount" type:"integer"`

	// Details about the pricing plan for your reserved queue. Required for reserved
	// queues and not applicable to on-demand queues.
	ReservationPlan *ReservationPlan `locationName:"reservationPlan" type:"structure"`

	// Queues can be ACTIVE or PAUSED. If you pause a queue, the service won't begin
	// processing jobs in that queue. Jobs that are running when you pause the queue
	// continue to run until they finish or result in an error.
	Status *string `locationName:"status" type:"string" enum:"QueueStatus"`

	// The estimated number of jobs with a SUBMITTED status.
	SubmittedJobsCount *int64 `locationName:"submittedJobsCount" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies whether this on-demand queue is system or custom. System queues
	// are built in. You can't modify or delete system queues. You can create and
	// modify custom queues.
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"Type"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

You can use queues to manage the resources that are available to your AWS account for running multiple transcoding jobs at the same time. If you don't specify a queue, the service sends all jobs through the default queue. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/working-with-queues.html.

func (Queue) GoString 

func (s Queue) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Queue) SetArn 

func (s *Queue) SetArn(v string) *Queue

SetArn sets the Arn field's value.

func (*Queue) SetCreatedAt 

func (s *Queue) SetCreatedAt(v time.Time) *Queue

SetCreatedAt sets the CreatedAt field's value.

func (*Queue) SetDescription 

func (s *Queue) SetDescription(v string) *Queue

SetDescription sets the Description field's value.

func (*Queue) SetLastUpdated 

func (s *Queue) SetLastUpdated(v time.Time) *Queue

SetLastUpdated sets the LastUpdated field's value.

func (*Queue) SetName 

func (s *Queue) SetName(v string) *Queue

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (*Queue) SetPricingPlan added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Queue) SetPricingPlan(v string) *Queue

SetPricingPlan sets the PricingPlan field's value.

func (*Queue) SetProgressingJobsCount added in v1.14.21 

func (s *Queue) SetProgressingJobsCount(v int64) *Queue

SetProgressingJobsCount sets the ProgressingJobsCount field's value.

func (*Queue) SetReservationPlan added in v1.99.0 

func (s *Queue) SetReservationPlan(v *ReservationPlan) *Queue

SetReservationPlan sets the ReservationPlan field's value.

func (*Queue) SetStatus 

func (s *Queue) SetStatus(v string) *Queue

SetStatus sets the Status field's value.

func (*Queue) SetSubmittedJobsCount added in v1.14.21 

func (s *Queue) SetSubmittedJobsCount(v int64) *Queue

SetSubmittedJobsCount sets the SubmittedJobsCount field's value.

func (*Queue) SetType 

func (s *Queue) SetType(v string) *Queue

SetType sets the Type field's value.

func (Queue) String 

func (s Queue) String() string

String returns the string representation

type Rectangle 

type Rectangle struct {

	// Height of rectangle in pixels. Specify only even numbers.
	Height *int64 `locationName:"height" min:"2" type:"integer"`

	// Width of rectangle in pixels. Specify only even numbers.
	Width *int64 `locationName:"width" min:"2" type:"integer"`

	// The distance, in pixels, between the rectangle and the left edge of the video
	// frame. Specify only even numbers.
	X *int64 `locationName:"x" type:"integer"`

	// The distance, in pixels, between the rectangle and the top edge of the video
	// frame. Specify only even numbers.
	Y *int64 `locationName:"y" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Use Rectangle to identify a specific area of the video frame.

func (Rectangle) GoString 

func (s Rectangle) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Rectangle) SetHeight 

func (s *Rectangle) SetHeight(v int64) *Rectangle

SetHeight sets the Height field's value.

func (*Rectangle) SetWidth 

func (s *Rectangle) SetWidth(v int64) *Rectangle

SetWidth sets the Width field's value.

func (*Rectangle) SetX 

func (s *Rectangle) SetX(v int64) *Rectangle

SetX sets the X field's value.

func (*Rectangle) SetY 

func (s *Rectangle) SetY(v int64) *Rectangle

SetY sets the Y field's value.

func (Rectangle) String 

func (s Rectangle) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*Rectangle) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *Rectangle) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type RemixSettings 

type RemixSettings struct {

	// Channel mapping (ChannelMapping) contains the group of fields that hold the
	// remixing value for each channel. Units are in dB. Acceptable values are within
	// the range from -60 (mute) through 6. A setting of 0 passes the input channel
	// unchanged to the output channel (no attenuation or amplification).
	ChannelMapping *ChannelMapping `locationName:"channelMapping" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the number of audio channels from your input that you want to use
	// in your output. With remixing, you might combine or split the data in these
	// channels, so the number of channels in your final output might be different.
	ChannelsIn *int64 `locationName:"channelsIn" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the number of channels in this output after remixing. Valid values:
	// 1, 2, 4, 6, 8
	ChannelsOut *int64 `locationName:"channelsOut" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Use Manual audio remixing (RemixSettings) to adjust audio levels for each audio channel in each output of your job. With audio remixing, you can output more or fewer audio channels than your input audio source provides.

func (RemixSettings) GoString 

func (s RemixSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*RemixSettings) SetChannelMapping 

func (s *RemixSettings) SetChannelMapping(v *ChannelMapping) *RemixSettings

SetChannelMapping sets the ChannelMapping field's value.

func (*RemixSettings) SetChannelsIn 

func (s *RemixSettings) SetChannelsIn(v int64) *RemixSettings

SetChannelsIn sets the ChannelsIn field's value.

func (*RemixSettings) SetChannelsOut 

func (s *RemixSettings) SetChannelsOut(v int64) *RemixSettings

SetChannelsOut sets the ChannelsOut field's value.

func (RemixSettings) String 

func (s RemixSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*RemixSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *RemixSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ReservationPlan added in v1.99.0 

type ReservationPlan struct {

	// The length of the term of your reserved queue pricing plan commitment.
	Commitment *string `locationName:"commitment" type:"string" enum:"Commitment"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for when the current pricing plan term for
	// this reserved queue expires.
	ExpiresAt *time.Time `locationName:"expiresAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for when you set up the current pricing plan
	// for this reserved queue.
	PurchasedAt *time.Time `locationName:"purchasedAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// Specifies whether the term of your reserved queue pricing plan is automatically
	// extended (AUTO_RENEW) or expires (EXPIRE) at the end of the term.
	RenewalType *string `locationName:"renewalType" type:"string" enum:"RenewalType"`

	// Specifies the number of reserved transcode slots (RTS) for this queue. The
	// number of RTS determines how many jobs the queue can process in parallel;
	// each RTS can process one job at a time. When you increase this number, you
	// extend your existing commitment with a new 12-month commitment for a larger
	// number of RTS. The new commitment begins when you purchase the additional
	// capacity. You can't decrease the number of RTS in your reserved queue.
	ReservedSlots *int64 `locationName:"reservedSlots" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies whether the pricing plan for your reserved queue is ACTIVE or EXPIRED.
	Status *string `locationName:"status" type:"string" enum:"ReservationPlanStatus"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Details about the pricing plan for your reserved queue. Required for reserved queues and not applicable to on-demand queues.

func (ReservationPlan) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s ReservationPlan) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ReservationPlan) SetCommitment added in v1.99.0 

func (s *ReservationPlan) SetCommitment(v string) *ReservationPlan

SetCommitment sets the Commitment field's value.

func (*ReservationPlan) SetExpiresAt added in v1.99.0 

func (s *ReservationPlan) SetExpiresAt(v time.Time) *ReservationPlan

SetExpiresAt sets the ExpiresAt field's value.

func (*ReservationPlan) SetPurchasedAt added in v1.99.0 

func (s *ReservationPlan) SetPurchasedAt(v time.Time) *ReservationPlan

SetPurchasedAt sets the PurchasedAt field's value.

func (*ReservationPlan) SetRenewalType added in v1.99.0 

func (s *ReservationPlan) SetRenewalType(v string) *ReservationPlan

SetRenewalType sets the RenewalType field's value.

func (*ReservationPlan) SetReservedSlots added in v1.99.0 

func (s *ReservationPlan) SetReservedSlots(v int64) *ReservationPlan

SetReservedSlots sets the ReservedSlots field's value.

func (*ReservationPlan) SetStatus added in v1.99.0 

func (s *ReservationPlan) SetStatus(v string) *ReservationPlan

SetStatus sets the Status field's value.

func (ReservationPlan) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s ReservationPlan) String() string

String returns the string representation

type ReservationPlanSettings added in v1.99.0 

type ReservationPlanSettings struct {

	// The length of the term of your reserved queue pricing plan commitment.
	//
	// Commitment is a required field
	Commitment *string `locationName:"commitment" type:"string" required:"true" enum:"Commitment"`

	// Specifies whether the term of your reserved queue pricing plan is automatically
	// extended (AUTO_RENEW) or expires (EXPIRE) at the end of the term. When your
	// term is auto renewed, you extend your commitment by 12 months from the auto
	// renew date. You can cancel this commitment.
	//
	// RenewalType is a required field
	RenewalType *string `locationName:"renewalType" type:"string" required:"true" enum:"RenewalType"`

	// Specifies the number of reserved transcode slots (RTS) for this queue. The
	// number of RTS determines how many jobs the queue can process in parallel;
	// each RTS can process one job at a time. You can't decrease the number of
	// RTS in your reserved queue. You can increase the number of RTS by extending
	// your existing commitment with a new 12-month commitment for the larger number.
	// The new commitment begins when you purchase the additional capacity. You
	// can't cancel your commitment or revert to your original commitment after
	// you increase the capacity.
	//
	// ReservedSlots is a required field
	ReservedSlots *int64 `locationName:"reservedSlots" type:"integer" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Details about the pricing plan for your reserved queue. Required for reserved queues and not applicable to on-demand queues.

func (ReservationPlanSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s ReservationPlanSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ReservationPlanSettings) SetCommitment added in v1.99.0 

func (s *ReservationPlanSettings) SetCommitment(v string) *ReservationPlanSettings

SetCommitment sets the Commitment field's value.

func (*ReservationPlanSettings) SetRenewalType added in v1.99.0 

func (s *ReservationPlanSettings) SetRenewalType(v string) *ReservationPlanSettings

SetRenewalType sets the RenewalType field's value.

func (*ReservationPlanSettings) SetReservedSlots added in v1.99.0 

func (s *ReservationPlanSettings) SetReservedSlots(v int64) *ReservationPlanSettings

SetReservedSlots sets the ReservedSlots field's value.

func (ReservationPlanSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s ReservationPlanSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*ReservationPlanSettings) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *ReservationPlanSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type ResourceTags added in v1.14.21 

type ResourceTags struct {

	// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource.
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string"`

	// The tags for the resource.
	Tags map[string]*string `locationName:"tags" type:"map"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) and tags for an AWS Elemental MediaConvert resource.

func (ResourceTags) GoString added in v1.14.21 

func (s ResourceTags) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*ResourceTags) SetArn added in v1.14.21 

func (s *ResourceTags) SetArn(v string) *ResourceTags

SetArn sets the Arn field's value.

func (*ResourceTags) SetTags added in v1.14.21 

func (s *ResourceTags) SetTags(v map[string]*string) *ResourceTags

SetTags sets the Tags field's value.

func (ResourceTags) String added in v1.14.21 

func (s ResourceTags) String() string

String returns the string representation

type S3DestinationSettings added in v1.99.0 

type S3DestinationSettings struct {

	// Settings for how your job outputs are encrypted as they are uploaded to Amazon
	// S3.
	Encryption *S3EncryptionSettings `locationName:"encryption" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings associated with S3 destination

func (S3DestinationSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s S3DestinationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*S3DestinationSettings) SetEncryption added in v1.99.0 

func (s *S3DestinationSettings) SetEncryption(v *S3EncryptionSettings) *S3DestinationSettings

SetEncryption sets the Encryption field's value.

func (S3DestinationSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s S3DestinationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type S3EncryptionSettings added in v1.99.0 

type S3EncryptionSettings struct {

	// Specify how you want your data keys managed. AWS uses data keys to encrypt
	// your content. AWS also encrypts the data keys themselves, using a customer
	// master key (CMK), and then stores the encrypted data keys alongside your
	// encrypted content. Use this setting to specify which AWS service manages
	// the CMK. For simplest set up, choose Amazon S3 (SERVER_SIDE_ENCRYPTION_S3).
	// If you want your master key to be managed by AWS Key Management Service (KMS),
	// choose AWS KMS (SERVER_SIDE_ENCRYPTION_KMS). By default, when you choose
	// AWS KMS, KMS uses the AWS managed customer master key (CMK) associated with
	// Amazon S3 to encrypt your data keys. You can optionally choose to specify
	// a different, customer managed CMK. Do so by specifying the Amazon Resource
	// Name (ARN) of the key for the setting KMS ARN (kmsKeyArn).
	EncryptionType *string `locationName:"encryptionType" type:"string" enum:"S3ServerSideEncryptionType"`

	// Optionally, specify the customer master key (CMK) that you want to use to
	// encrypt the data key that AWS uses to encrypt your output content. Enter
	// the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the CMK. To use this setting, you must
	// also set Server-side encryption (S3ServerSideEncryptionType) to AWS KMS (SERVER_SIDE_ENCRYPTION_KMS).
	// If you set Server-side encryption to AWS KMS but don't specify a CMK here,
	// AWS uses the AWS managed CMK associated with Amazon S3.
	KmsKeyArn *string `locationName:"kmsKeyArn" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for how your job outputs are encrypted as they are uploaded to Amazon S3.

func (S3EncryptionSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s S3EncryptionSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*S3EncryptionSettings) SetEncryptionType added in v1.99.0 

func (s *S3EncryptionSettings) SetEncryptionType(v string) *S3EncryptionSettings

SetEncryptionType sets the EncryptionType field's value.

func (*S3EncryptionSettings) SetKmsKeyArn added in v1.99.0 

func (s *S3EncryptionSettings) SetKmsKeyArn(v string) *S3EncryptionSettings

SetKmsKeyArn sets the KmsKeyArn field's value.

func (S3EncryptionSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s S3EncryptionSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type SccDestinationSettings 

type SccDestinationSettings struct {

	// Set Framerate (SccDestinationFramerate) to make sure that the captions and
	// the video are synchronized in the output. Specify a frame rate that matches
	// the frame rate of the associated video. If the video frame rate is 29.97,
	// choose 29.97 dropframe (FRAMERATE_29_97_DROPFRAME) only if the video has
	// video_insertion=true and drop_frame_timecode=true; otherwise, choose 29.97
	// non-dropframe (FRAMERATE_29_97_NON_DROPFRAME).
	Framerate *string `locationName:"framerate" type:"string" enum:"SccDestinationFramerate"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for SCC caption output.

func (SccDestinationSettings) GoString 

func (s SccDestinationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*SccDestinationSettings) SetFramerate 

func (s *SccDestinationSettings) SetFramerate(v string) *SccDestinationSettings

SetFramerate sets the Framerate field's value.

func (SccDestinationSettings) String 

func (s SccDestinationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type SpekeKeyProvider 

type SpekeKeyProvider struct {

	// Optional AWS Certificate Manager ARN for a certificate to send to the keyprovider.
	// The certificate holds a key used by the keyprovider to encrypt the keys in
	// its response.
	CertificateArn *string `locationName:"certificateArn" type:"string"`

	// The SPEKE-compliant server uses Resource ID (ResourceId) to identify content.
	ResourceId *string `locationName:"resourceId" type:"string"`

	// Relates to SPEKE implementation. DRM system identifiers. DASH output groups
	// support a max of two system ids. Other group types support one system id.
	SystemIds []*string `locationName:"systemIds" type:"list"`

	// Use URL (Url) to specify the SPEKE-compliant server that will provide keys
	// for content.
	Url *string `locationName:"url" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for use with a SPEKE key provider

func (SpekeKeyProvider) GoString 

func (s SpekeKeyProvider) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*SpekeKeyProvider) SetCertificateArn added in v1.99.0 

func (s *SpekeKeyProvider) SetCertificateArn(v string) *SpekeKeyProvider

SetCertificateArn sets the CertificateArn field's value.

func (*SpekeKeyProvider) SetResourceId 

func (s *SpekeKeyProvider) SetResourceId(v string) *SpekeKeyProvider

SetResourceId sets the ResourceId field's value.

func (*SpekeKeyProvider) SetSystemIds 

func (s *SpekeKeyProvider) SetSystemIds(v []*string) *SpekeKeyProvider

SetSystemIds sets the SystemIds field's value.

func (*SpekeKeyProvider) SetUrl 

func (s *SpekeKeyProvider) SetUrl(v string) *SpekeKeyProvider

SetUrl sets the Url field's value.

func (SpekeKeyProvider) String 

func (s SpekeKeyProvider) String() string

String returns the string representation

type StaticKeyProvider 

type StaticKeyProvider struct {

	// Relates to DRM implementation. Sets the value of the KEYFORMAT attribute.
	// Must be 'identity' or a reverse DNS string. May be omitted to indicate an
	// implicit value of 'identity'.
	KeyFormat *string `locationName:"keyFormat" type:"string"`

	// Relates to DRM implementation. Either a single positive integer version value
	// or a slash delimited list of version values (1/2/3).
	KeyFormatVersions *string `locationName:"keyFormatVersions" type:"string"`

	// Relates to DRM implementation. Use a 32-character hexidecimal string to specify
	// Key Value (StaticKeyValue).
	StaticKeyValue *string `locationName:"staticKeyValue" type:"string"`

	// Relates to DRM implementation. The location of the license server used for
	// protecting content.
	Url *string `locationName:"url" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Use these settings to set up encryption with a static key provider.

func (StaticKeyProvider) GoString 

func (s StaticKeyProvider) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*StaticKeyProvider) SetKeyFormat 

func (s *StaticKeyProvider) SetKeyFormat(v string) *StaticKeyProvider

SetKeyFormat sets the KeyFormat field's value.

func (*StaticKeyProvider) SetKeyFormatVersions 

func (s *StaticKeyProvider) SetKeyFormatVersions(v string) *StaticKeyProvider

SetKeyFormatVersions sets the KeyFormatVersions field's value.

func (*StaticKeyProvider) SetStaticKeyValue 

func (s *StaticKeyProvider) SetStaticKeyValue(v string) *StaticKeyProvider

SetStaticKeyValue sets the StaticKeyValue field's value.

func (*StaticKeyProvider) SetUrl 

func (s *StaticKeyProvider) SetUrl(v string) *StaticKeyProvider

SetUrl sets the Url field's value.

func (StaticKeyProvider) String 

func (s StaticKeyProvider) String() string

String returns the string representation

type TagResourceInput added in v1.14.21 

type TagResourceInput struct {

	// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to tag. To get
	// the ARN, send a GET request with the resource name.
	//
	// Arn is a required field
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// The tags that you want to add to the resource. You can tag resources with
	// a key-value pair or with only a key.
	//
	// Tags is a required field
	Tags map[string]*string `locationName:"tags" type:"map" required:"true"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

To add tags to a queue, preset, or job template, send a request with the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource and the tags that you want to add.

func (TagResourceInput) GoString added in v1.14.21 

func (s TagResourceInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*TagResourceInput) SetArn added in v1.14.21 

func (s *TagResourceInput) SetArn(v string) *TagResourceInput

SetArn sets the Arn field's value.

func (*TagResourceInput) SetTags added in v1.14.21 

func (s *TagResourceInput) SetTags(v map[string]*string) *TagResourceInput

SetTags sets the Tags field's value.

func (TagResourceInput) String added in v1.14.21 

func (s TagResourceInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*TagResourceInput) Validate added in v1.14.21 

func (s *TagResourceInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type TagResourceOutput added in v1.14.21 

type TagResourceOutput struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

A successful request to add tags to a resource returns an OK message.

func (TagResourceOutput) GoString added in v1.14.21 

func (s TagResourceOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (TagResourceOutput) String added in v1.14.21 

func (s TagResourceOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type TeletextDestinationSettings 

type TeletextDestinationSettings struct {

	// Set pageNumber to the Teletext page number for the destination captions for
	// this output. This value must be a three-digit hexadecimal string; strings
	// ending in -FF are invalid. If you are passing through the entire set of Teletext
	// data, do not use this field.
	PageNumber *string `locationName:"pageNumber" min:"3" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for Teletext caption output

func (TeletextDestinationSettings) GoString 

func (s TeletextDestinationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*TeletextDestinationSettings) SetPageNumber 

func (s *TeletextDestinationSettings) SetPageNumber(v string) *TeletextDestinationSettings

SetPageNumber sets the PageNumber field's value.

func (TeletextDestinationSettings) String 

func (s TeletextDestinationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*TeletextDestinationSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *TeletextDestinationSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type TeletextSourceSettings 

type TeletextSourceSettings struct {

	// Use Page Number (PageNumber) to specify the three-digit hexadecimal page
	// number that will be used for Teletext captions. Do not use this setting if
	// you are passing through teletext from the input source to output.
	PageNumber *string `locationName:"pageNumber" min:"3" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings specific to Teletext caption sources, including Page number.

func (TeletextSourceSettings) GoString 

func (s TeletextSourceSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*TeletextSourceSettings) SetPageNumber 

func (s *TeletextSourceSettings) SetPageNumber(v string) *TeletextSourceSettings

SetPageNumber sets the PageNumber field's value.

func (TeletextSourceSettings) String 

func (s TeletextSourceSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*TeletextSourceSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *TeletextSourceSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type TimecodeBurnin 

type TimecodeBurnin struct {

	// Use Font Size (FontSize) to set the font size of any burned-in timecode.
	// Valid values are 10, 16, 32, 48.
	FontSize *int64 `locationName:"fontSize" min:"10" type:"integer"`

	// Use Position (Position) under under Timecode burn-in (TimecodeBurnIn) to
	// specify the location the burned-in timecode on output video.
	Position *string `locationName:"position" type:"string" enum:"TimecodeBurninPosition"`

	// Use Prefix (Prefix) to place ASCII characters before any burned-in timecode.
	// For example, a prefix of "EZ-" will result in the timecode "EZ-00:00:00:00".
	// Provide either the characters themselves or the ASCII code equivalents. The
	// supported range of characters is 0x20 through 0x7e. This includes letters,
	// numbers, and all special characters represented on a standard English keyboard.
	Prefix *string `locationName:"prefix" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Timecode burn-in (TimecodeBurnIn)--Burns the output timecode and specified prefix into the output.

func (TimecodeBurnin) GoString 

func (s TimecodeBurnin) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*TimecodeBurnin) SetFontSize 

func (s *TimecodeBurnin) SetFontSize(v int64) *TimecodeBurnin

SetFontSize sets the FontSize field's value.

func (*TimecodeBurnin) SetPosition 

func (s *TimecodeBurnin) SetPosition(v string) *TimecodeBurnin

SetPosition sets the Position field's value.

func (*TimecodeBurnin) SetPrefix 

func (s *TimecodeBurnin) SetPrefix(v string) *TimecodeBurnin

SetPrefix sets the Prefix field's value.

func (TimecodeBurnin) String 

func (s TimecodeBurnin) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*TimecodeBurnin) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *TimecodeBurnin) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type TimecodeConfig 

type TimecodeConfig struct {

	// If you use an editing platform that relies on an anchor timecode, use Anchor
	// Timecode (Anchor) to specify a timecode that will match the input video frame
	// to the output video frame. Use 24-hour format with frame number, (HH:MM:SS:FF)
	// or (HH:MM:SS;FF). This setting ignores frame rate conversion. System behavior
	// for Anchor Timecode varies depending on your setting for Source (TimecodeSource).
	// * If Source (TimecodeSource) is set to Specified Start (SPECIFIEDSTART),
	// the first input frame is the specified value in Start Timecode (Start). Anchor
	// Timecode (Anchor) and Start Timecode (Start) are used calculate output timecode.
	// * If Source (TimecodeSource) is set to Start at 0 (ZEROBASED) the first frame
	// is 00:00:00:00. * If Source (TimecodeSource) is set to Embedded (EMBEDDED),
	// the first frame is the timecode value on the first input frame of the input.
	Anchor *string `locationName:"anchor" type:"string"`

	// Use Source (TimecodeSource) to set how timecodes are handled within this
	// job. To make sure that your video, audio, captions, and markers are synchronized
	// and that time-based features, such as image inserter, work correctly, choose
	// the Timecode source option that matches your assets. All timecodes are in
	// a 24-hour format with frame number (HH:MM:SS:FF). * Embedded (EMBEDDED) -
	// Use the timecode that is in the input video. If no embedded timecode is in
	// the source, the service will use Start at 0 (ZEROBASED) instead. * Start
	// at 0 (ZEROBASED) - Set the timecode of the initial frame to 00:00:00:00.
	// * Specified Start (SPECIFIEDSTART) - Set the timecode of the initial frame
	// to a value other than zero. You use Start timecode (Start) to provide this
	// value.
	Source *string `locationName:"source" type:"string" enum:"TimecodeSource"`

	// Only use when you set Source (TimecodeSource) to Specified start (SPECIFIEDSTART).
	// Use Start timecode (Start) to specify the timecode for the initial frame.
	// Use 24-hour format with frame number, (HH:MM:SS:FF) or (HH:MM:SS;FF).
	Start *string `locationName:"start" type:"string"`

	// Only applies to outputs that support program-date-time stamp. Use Timestamp
	// offset (TimestampOffset) to overwrite the timecode date without affecting
	// the time and frame number. Provide the new date as a string in the format
	// "yyyy-mm-dd". To use Time stamp offset, you must also enable Insert program-date-time
	// (InsertProgramDateTime) in the output settings. For example, if the date
	// part of your timecodes is 2002-1-25 and you want to change it to one year
	// later, set Timestamp offset (TimestampOffset) to 2003-1-25.
	TimestampOffset *string `locationName:"timestampOffset" type:"string"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

These settings control how the service handles timecodes throughout the job. These settings don't affect input clipping.

func (TimecodeConfig) GoString 

func (s TimecodeConfig) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*TimecodeConfig) SetAnchor 

func (s *TimecodeConfig) SetAnchor(v string) *TimecodeConfig

SetAnchor sets the Anchor field's value.

func (*TimecodeConfig) SetSource 

func (s *TimecodeConfig) SetSource(v string) *TimecodeConfig

SetSource sets the Source field's value.

func (*TimecodeConfig) SetStart 

func (s *TimecodeConfig) SetStart(v string) *TimecodeConfig

SetStart sets the Start field's value.

func (*TimecodeConfig) SetTimestampOffset 

func (s *TimecodeConfig) SetTimestampOffset(v string) *TimecodeConfig

SetTimestampOffset sets the TimestampOffset field's value.

func (TimecodeConfig) String 

func (s TimecodeConfig) String() string

String returns the string representation

type TimedMetadataInsertion 

type TimedMetadataInsertion struct {

	// Id3Insertions contains the array of Id3Insertion instances.
	Id3Insertions []*Id3Insertion `locationName:"id3Insertions" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Enable Timed metadata insertion (TimedMetadataInsertion) to include ID3 tags in your job. To include timed metadata, you must enable it here, enable it in each output container, and specify tags and timecodes in ID3 insertion (Id3Insertion) objects.

func (TimedMetadataInsertion) GoString 

func (s TimedMetadataInsertion) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*TimedMetadataInsertion) SetId3Insertions 

func (s *TimedMetadataInsertion) SetId3Insertions(v []*Id3Insertion) *TimedMetadataInsertion

SetId3Insertions sets the Id3Insertions field's value.

func (TimedMetadataInsertion) String 

func (s TimedMetadataInsertion) String() string

String returns the string representation

type Timing 

type Timing struct {

	// The time, in Unix epoch format, that the transcoding job finished
	FinishTime *time.Time `locationName:"finishTime" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// The time, in Unix epoch format, that transcoding for the job began.
	StartTime *time.Time `locationName:"startTime" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// The time, in Unix epoch format, that you submitted the job.
	SubmitTime *time.Time `locationName:"submitTime" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Information about when jobs are submitted, started, and finished is specified in Unix epoch format in seconds.

func (Timing) GoString 

func (s Timing) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*Timing) SetFinishTime 

func (s *Timing) SetFinishTime(v time.Time) *Timing

SetFinishTime sets the FinishTime field's value.

func (*Timing) SetStartTime 

func (s *Timing) SetStartTime(v time.Time) *Timing

SetStartTime sets the StartTime field's value.

func (*Timing) SetSubmitTime 

func (s *Timing) SetSubmitTime(v time.Time) *Timing

SetSubmitTime sets the SubmitTime field's value.

func (Timing) String 

func (s Timing) String() string

String returns the string representation

type TrackSourceSettings added in v1.99.0 

type TrackSourceSettings struct {

	// Use this setting to select a single captions track from a source. Track numbers
	// correspond to the order in the captions source file. For IMF sources, track
	// numbering is based on the order that the captions appear in the CPL. For
	// example, use 1 to select the captions asset that is listed first in the CPL.
	// To include more than one captions track in your job outputs, create multiple
	// input captions selectors. Specify one track per selector.
	TrackNumber *int64 `locationName:"trackNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings specific to caption sources that are specfied by track number. Sources include IMSC in IMF.

func (TrackSourceSettings) GoString added in v1.99.0 

func (s TrackSourceSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*TrackSourceSettings) SetTrackNumber added in v1.99.0 

func (s *TrackSourceSettings) SetTrackNumber(v int64) *TrackSourceSettings

SetTrackNumber sets the TrackNumber field's value.

func (TrackSourceSettings) String added in v1.99.0 

func (s TrackSourceSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*TrackSourceSettings) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *TrackSourceSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type TtmlDestinationSettings 

type TtmlDestinationSettings struct {

	// Pass through style and position information from a TTML-like input source
	// (TTML, SMPTE-TT, CFF-TT) to the CFF-TT output or TTML output.
	StylePassthrough *string `locationName:"stylePassthrough" type:"string" enum:"TtmlStylePassthrough"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings specific to TTML caption outputs, including Pass style information (TtmlStylePassthrough).

func (TtmlDestinationSettings) GoString 

func (s TtmlDestinationSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*TtmlDestinationSettings) SetStylePassthrough 

func (s *TtmlDestinationSettings) SetStylePassthrough(v string) *TtmlDestinationSettings

SetStylePassthrough sets the StylePassthrough field's value.

func (TtmlDestinationSettings) String 

func (s TtmlDestinationSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

type UntagResourceInput added in v1.14.21 

type UntagResourceInput struct {

	// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to remove tags
	// from. To get the ARN, send a GET request with the resource name.
	//
	// Arn is a required field
	Arn *string `location:"uri" locationName:"arn" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// The keys of the tags that you want to remove from the resource.
	TagKeys []*string `locationName:"tagKeys" type:"list"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

To remove tags from a resource, send a request with the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource and the keys of the tags that you want to remove.

func (UntagResourceInput) GoString added in v1.14.21 

func (s UntagResourceInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*UntagResourceInput) SetArn added in v1.14.21 

func (s *UntagResourceInput) SetArn(v string) *UntagResourceInput

SetArn sets the Arn field's value.

func (*UntagResourceInput) SetTagKeys added in v1.14.21 

func (s *UntagResourceInput) SetTagKeys(v []*string) *UntagResourceInput

SetTagKeys sets the TagKeys field's value.

func (UntagResourceInput) String added in v1.14.21 

func (s UntagResourceInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*UntagResourceInput) Validate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *UntagResourceInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type UntagResourceOutput added in v1.14.21 

type UntagResourceOutput struct {
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

A successful request to remove tags from a resource returns an OK message.

func (UntagResourceOutput) GoString added in v1.14.21 

func (s UntagResourceOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (UntagResourceOutput) String added in v1.14.21 

func (s UntagResourceOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type UpdateJobTemplateInput 

type UpdateJobTemplateInput struct {

	// Accelerated transcoding can significantly speed up jobs with long, visually
	// complex content. Outputs that use this feature incur pro-tier pricing. For
	// information about feature limitations, see the AWS Elemental MediaConvert
	// User Guide.
	AccelerationSettings *AccelerationSettings `locationName:"accelerationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// The new category for the job template, if you are changing it.
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// The new description for the job template, if you are changing it.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the job template you are modifying
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// The new queue for the job template, if you are changing it.
	Queue *string `locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// JobTemplateSettings contains all the transcode settings saved in the template
	// that will be applied to jobs created from it.
	Settings *JobTemplateSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch
	// Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert
	// sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing
	// your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.
	StatusUpdateInterval *string `locationName:"statusUpdateInterval" type:"string" enum:"StatusUpdateInterval"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Modify a job template by sending a request with the job template name and any of the following that you wish to change: description, category, and queue.

func (UpdateJobTemplateInput) GoString 

func (s UpdateJobTemplateInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetAccelerationSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetAccelerationSettings(v *AccelerationSettings) *UpdateJobTemplateInput

SetAccelerationSettings sets the AccelerationSettings field's value.

func (*UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetCategory 

func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetCategory(v string) *UpdateJobTemplateInput

SetCategory sets the Category field's value.

func (*UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetDescription 

func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetDescription(v string) *UpdateJobTemplateInput

SetDescription sets the Description field's value.

func (*UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetName 

func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetName(v string) *UpdateJobTemplateInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (*UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetQueue 

func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetQueue(v string) *UpdateJobTemplateInput

SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.

func (*UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetSettings 

func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetSettings(v *JobTemplateSettings) *UpdateJobTemplateInput

SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.

func (*UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetStatusUpdateInterval added in v1.99.0 

func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetStatusUpdateInterval(v string) *UpdateJobTemplateInput

SetStatusUpdateInterval sets the StatusUpdateInterval field's value.

func (UpdateJobTemplateInput) String 

func (s UpdateJobTemplateInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*UpdateJobTemplateInput) Validate 

func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type UpdateJobTemplateOutput 

type UpdateJobTemplateOutput struct {

	// A job template is a pre-made set of encoding instructions that you can use
	// to quickly create a job.
	JobTemplate *JobTemplate `locationName:"jobTemplate" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful update job template requests will return the new job template JSON.

func (UpdateJobTemplateOutput) GoString 

func (s UpdateJobTemplateOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*UpdateJobTemplateOutput) SetJobTemplate 

func (s *UpdateJobTemplateOutput) SetJobTemplate(v *JobTemplate) *UpdateJobTemplateOutput

SetJobTemplate sets the JobTemplate field's value.

func (UpdateJobTemplateOutput) String 

func (s UpdateJobTemplateOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type UpdatePresetInput 

type UpdatePresetInput struct {

	// The new category for the preset, if you are changing it.
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// The new description for the preset, if you are changing it.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the preset you are modifying.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Settings for preset
	Settings *PresetSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Modify a preset by sending a request with the preset name and any of the following that you wish to change: description, category, and transcoding settings.

func (UpdatePresetInput) GoString 

func (s UpdatePresetInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*UpdatePresetInput) SetCategory 

func (s *UpdatePresetInput) SetCategory(v string) *UpdatePresetInput

SetCategory sets the Category field's value.

func (*UpdatePresetInput) SetDescription 

func (s *UpdatePresetInput) SetDescription(v string) *UpdatePresetInput

SetDescription sets the Description field's value.

func (*UpdatePresetInput) SetName 

func (s *UpdatePresetInput) SetName(v string) *UpdatePresetInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (*UpdatePresetInput) SetSettings 

func (s *UpdatePresetInput) SetSettings(v *PresetSettings) *UpdatePresetInput

SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.

func (UpdatePresetInput) String 

func (s UpdatePresetInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*UpdatePresetInput) Validate 

func (s *UpdatePresetInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type UpdatePresetOutput 

type UpdatePresetOutput struct {

	// A preset is a collection of preconfigured media conversion settings that
	// you want MediaConvert to apply to the output during the conversion process.
	Preset *Preset `locationName:"preset" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful update preset requests will return the new preset JSON.

func (UpdatePresetOutput) GoString 

func (s UpdatePresetOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*UpdatePresetOutput) SetPreset 

func (s *UpdatePresetOutput) SetPreset(v *Preset) *UpdatePresetOutput

SetPreset sets the Preset field's value.

func (UpdatePresetOutput) String 

func (s UpdatePresetOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type UpdateQueueInput 

type UpdateQueueInput struct {

	// The new description for the queue, if you are changing it.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the queue that you are modifying.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// The new details of your pricing plan for your reserved queue. When you set
	// up a new pricing plan to replace an expired one, you enter into another 12-month
	// commitment. When you add capacity to your queue by increasing the number
	// of RTS, you extend the term of your commitment to 12 months from when you
	// add capacity. After you make these commitments, you can't cancel them.
	ReservationPlanSettings *ReservationPlanSettings `locationName:"reservationPlanSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Pause or activate a queue by changing its status between ACTIVE and PAUSED.
	// If you pause a queue, jobs in that queue won't begin. Jobs that are running
	// when you pause the queue continue to run until they finish or result in an
	// error.
	Status *string `locationName:"status" type:"string" enum:"QueueStatus"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Modify a queue by sending a request with the queue name and any changes to the queue.

func (UpdateQueueInput) GoString 

func (s UpdateQueueInput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*UpdateQueueInput) SetDescription 

func (s *UpdateQueueInput) SetDescription(v string) *UpdateQueueInput

SetDescription sets the Description field's value.

func (*UpdateQueueInput) SetName 

func (s *UpdateQueueInput) SetName(v string) *UpdateQueueInput

SetName sets the Name field's value.

func (*UpdateQueueInput) SetReservationPlanSettings added in v1.99.0 

func (s *UpdateQueueInput) SetReservationPlanSettings(v *ReservationPlanSettings) *UpdateQueueInput

SetReservationPlanSettings sets the ReservationPlanSettings field's value.

func (*UpdateQueueInput) SetStatus 

func (s *UpdateQueueInput) SetStatus(v string) *UpdateQueueInput

SetStatus sets the Status field's value.

func (UpdateQueueInput) String 

func (s UpdateQueueInput) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*UpdateQueueInput) Validate 

func (s *UpdateQueueInput) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type UpdateQueueOutput 

type UpdateQueueOutput struct {

	// You can use queues to manage the resources that are available to your AWS
	// account for running multiple transcoding jobs at the same time. If you don't
	// specify a queue, the service sends all jobs through the default queue. For
	// more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/working-with-queues.html.
	Queue *Queue `locationName:"queue" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Successful update queue requests return the new queue information in JSON format.

func (UpdateQueueOutput) GoString 

func (s UpdateQueueOutput) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*UpdateQueueOutput) SetQueue 

func (s *UpdateQueueOutput) SetQueue(v *Queue) *UpdateQueueOutput

SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.

func (UpdateQueueOutput) String 

func (s UpdateQueueOutput) String() string

String returns the string representation

type VideoCodecSettings 

type VideoCodecSettings struct {

	// Specifies the video codec. This must be equal to one of the enum values defined
	// by the object VideoCodec.
	Codec *string `locationName:"codec" type:"string" enum:"VideoCodec"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value FRAME_CAPTURE.
	FrameCaptureSettings *FrameCaptureSettings `locationName:"frameCaptureSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value H_264.
	H264Settings *H264Settings `locationName:"h264Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for H265 codec
	H265Settings *H265Settings `locationName:"h265Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value MPEG2.
	Mpeg2Settings *Mpeg2Settings `locationName:"mpeg2Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value PRORES.
	ProresSettings *ProresSettings `locationName:"proresSettings" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Video codec settings, (CodecSettings) under (VideoDescription), contains the group of settings related to video encoding. The settings in this group vary depending on the value that you choose for Video codec (Codec). For each codec enum that you choose, define the corresponding settings object. The following lists the codec enum, settings object pairs. * H_264, H264Settings * H_265, H265Settings * MPEG2, Mpeg2Settings * PRORES, ProresSettings * FRAME_CAPTURE, FrameCaptureSettings

func (VideoCodecSettings) GoString 

func (s VideoCodecSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*VideoCodecSettings) SetCodec 

func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetCodec(v string) *VideoCodecSettings

SetCodec sets the Codec field's value.

func (*VideoCodecSettings) SetFrameCaptureSettings 

func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetFrameCaptureSettings(v *FrameCaptureSettings) *VideoCodecSettings

SetFrameCaptureSettings sets the FrameCaptureSettings field's value.

func (*VideoCodecSettings) SetH264Settings 

func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetH264Settings(v *H264Settings) *VideoCodecSettings

SetH264Settings sets the H264Settings field's value.

func (*VideoCodecSettings) SetH265Settings 

func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetH265Settings(v *H265Settings) *VideoCodecSettings

SetH265Settings sets the H265Settings field's value.

func (*VideoCodecSettings) SetMpeg2Settings 

func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetMpeg2Settings(v *Mpeg2Settings) *VideoCodecSettings

SetMpeg2Settings sets the Mpeg2Settings field's value.

func (*VideoCodecSettings) SetProresSettings 

func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetProresSettings(v *ProresSettings) *VideoCodecSettings

SetProresSettings sets the ProresSettings field's value.

func (VideoCodecSettings) String 

func (s VideoCodecSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*VideoCodecSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *VideoCodecSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type VideoDescription 

type VideoDescription struct {

	// This setting only applies to H.264, H.265, and MPEG2 outputs. Use Insert
	// AFD signaling (AfdSignaling) to specify whether the service includes AFD
	// values in the output video data and what those values are. * Choose None
	// to remove all AFD values from this output. * Choose Fixed to ignore input
	// AFD values and instead encode the value specified in the job. * Choose Auto
	// to calculate output AFD values based on the input AFD scaler data.
	AfdSignaling *string `locationName:"afdSignaling" type:"string" enum:"AfdSignaling"`

	// The anti-alias filter is automatically applied to all outputs. The service
	// no longer accepts the value DISABLED for AntiAlias. If you specify that in
	// your job, the service will ignore the setting.
	AntiAlias *string `locationName:"antiAlias" type:"string" enum:"AntiAlias"`

	// Video codec settings, (CodecSettings) under (VideoDescription), contains
	// the group of settings related to video encoding. The settings in this group
	// vary depending on the value that you choose for Video codec (Codec). For
	// each codec enum that you choose, define the corresponding settings object.
	// The following lists the codec enum, settings object pairs. * H_264, H264Settings
	// * H_265, H265Settings * MPEG2, Mpeg2Settings * PRORES, ProresSettings * FRAME_CAPTURE,
	// FrameCaptureSettings
	CodecSettings *VideoCodecSettings `locationName:"codecSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Enable Insert color metadata (ColorMetadata) to include color metadata in
	// this output. This setting is enabled by default.
	ColorMetadata *string `locationName:"colorMetadata" type:"string" enum:"ColorMetadata"`

	// Use Cropping selection (crop) to specify the video area that the service
	// will include in the output video frame.
	Crop *Rectangle `locationName:"crop" type:"structure"`

	// Applies only to 29.97 fps outputs. When this feature is enabled, the service
	// will use drop-frame timecode on outputs. If it is not possible to use drop-frame
	// timecode, the system will fall back to non-drop-frame. This setting is enabled
	// by default when Timecode insertion (TimecodeInsertion) is enabled.
	DropFrameTimecode *string `locationName:"dropFrameTimecode" type:"string" enum:"DropFrameTimecode"`

	// Applies only if you set AFD Signaling(AfdSignaling) to Fixed (FIXED). Use
	// Fixed (FixedAfd) to specify a four-bit AFD value which the service will write
	// on all frames of this video output.
	FixedAfd *int64 `locationName:"fixedAfd" type:"integer"`

	// Use the Height (Height) setting to define the video resolution height for
	// this output. Specify in pixels. If you don't provide a value here, the service
	// will use the input height.
	Height *int64 `locationName:"height" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Use Selection placement (position) to define the video area in your output
	// frame. The area outside of the rectangle that you specify here is black.
	Position *Rectangle `locationName:"position" type:"structure"`

	// Use Respond to AFD (RespondToAfd) to specify how the service changes the
	// video itself in response to AFD values in the input. * Choose Respond to
	// clip the input video frame according to the AFD value, input display aspect
	// ratio, and output display aspect ratio. * Choose Passthrough to include the
	// input AFD values. Do not choose this when AfdSignaling is set to (NONE).
	// A preferred implementation of this workflow is to set RespondToAfd to (NONE)
	// and set AfdSignaling to (AUTO). * Choose None to remove all input AFD values
	// from this output.
	RespondToAfd *string `locationName:"respondToAfd" type:"string" enum:"RespondToAfd"`

	// Specify how the service handles outputs that have a different aspect ratio
	// from the input aspect ratio. Choose Stretch to output (STRETCH_TO_OUTPUT)
	// to have the service stretch your video image to fit. Keep the setting Default
	// (DEFAULT) to have the service letterbox your video instead. This setting
	// overrides any value that you specify for the setting Selection placement
	// (position) in this output.
	ScalingBehavior *string `locationName:"scalingBehavior" type:"string" enum:"ScalingBehavior"`

	// Use Sharpness (Sharpness) setting to specify the strength of anti-aliasing.
	// This setting changes the width of the anti-alias filter kernel used for scaling.
	// Sharpness only applies if your output resolution is different from your input
	// resolution. 0 is the softest setting, 100 the sharpest, and 50 recommended
	// for most content.
	Sharpness *int64 `locationName:"sharpness" type:"integer"`

	// Applies only to H.264, H.265, MPEG2, and ProRes outputs. Only enable Timecode
	// insertion when the input frame rate is identical to the output frame rate.
	// To include timecodes in this output, set Timecode insertion (VideoTimecodeInsertion)
	// to PIC_TIMING_SEI. To leave them out, set it to DISABLED. Default is DISABLED.
	// When the service inserts timecodes in an output, by default, it uses any
	// embedded timecodes from the input. If none are present, the service will
	// set the timecode for the first output frame to zero. To change this default
	// behavior, adjust the settings under Timecode configuration (TimecodeConfig).
	// In the console, these settings are located under Job > Job settings > Timecode
	// configuration. Note - Timecode source under input settings (InputTimecodeSource)
	// does not affect the timecodes that are inserted in the output. Source under
	// Job settings > Timecode configuration (TimecodeSource) does.
	TimecodeInsertion *string `locationName:"timecodeInsertion" type:"string" enum:"VideoTimecodeInsertion"`

	// Find additional transcoding features under Preprocessors (VideoPreprocessors).
	// Enable the features at each output individually. These features are disabled
	// by default.
	VideoPreprocessors *VideoPreprocessor `locationName:"videoPreprocessors" type:"structure"`

	// Use Width (Width) to define the video resolution width, in pixels, for this
	// output. If you don't provide a value here, the service will use the input
	// width.
	Width *int64 `locationName:"width" min:"32" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Settings for video outputs

func (VideoDescription) GoString 

func (s VideoDescription) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*VideoDescription) SetAfdSignaling 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetAfdSignaling(v string) *VideoDescription

SetAfdSignaling sets the AfdSignaling field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetAntiAlias 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetAntiAlias(v string) *VideoDescription

SetAntiAlias sets the AntiAlias field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetCodecSettings 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetCodecSettings(v *VideoCodecSettings) *VideoDescription

SetCodecSettings sets the CodecSettings field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetColorMetadata 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetColorMetadata(v string) *VideoDescription

SetColorMetadata sets the ColorMetadata field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetCrop 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetCrop(v *Rectangle) *VideoDescription

SetCrop sets the Crop field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetDropFrameTimecode 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetDropFrameTimecode(v string) *VideoDescription

SetDropFrameTimecode sets the DropFrameTimecode field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetFixedAfd 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetFixedAfd(v int64) *VideoDescription

SetFixedAfd sets the FixedAfd field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetHeight 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetHeight(v int64) *VideoDescription

SetHeight sets the Height field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetPosition 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetPosition(v *Rectangle) *VideoDescription

SetPosition sets the Position field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetRespondToAfd 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetRespondToAfd(v string) *VideoDescription

SetRespondToAfd sets the RespondToAfd field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetScalingBehavior 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetScalingBehavior(v string) *VideoDescription

SetScalingBehavior sets the ScalingBehavior field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetSharpness 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetSharpness(v int64) *VideoDescription

SetSharpness sets the Sharpness field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetTimecodeInsertion 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetTimecodeInsertion(v string) *VideoDescription

SetTimecodeInsertion sets the TimecodeInsertion field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetVideoPreprocessors 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetVideoPreprocessors(v *VideoPreprocessor) *VideoDescription

SetVideoPreprocessors sets the VideoPreprocessors field's value.

func (*VideoDescription) SetWidth 

func (s *VideoDescription) SetWidth(v int64) *VideoDescription

SetWidth sets the Width field's value.

func (VideoDescription) String 

func (s VideoDescription) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*VideoDescription) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *VideoDescription) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type VideoDetail 

type VideoDetail struct {

	// Height in pixels for the output
	HeightInPx *int64 `locationName:"heightInPx" type:"integer"`

	// Width in pixels for the output
	WidthInPx *int64 `locationName:"widthInPx" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Contains details about the output's video stream

func (VideoDetail) GoString 

func (s VideoDetail) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*VideoDetail) SetHeightInPx 

func (s *VideoDetail) SetHeightInPx(v int64) *VideoDetail

SetHeightInPx sets the HeightInPx field's value.

func (*VideoDetail) SetWidthInPx 

func (s *VideoDetail) SetWidthInPx(v int64) *VideoDetail

SetWidthInPx sets the WidthInPx field's value.

func (VideoDetail) String 

func (s VideoDetail) String() string

String returns the string representation

type VideoPreprocessor 

type VideoPreprocessor struct {

	// Enable the Color corrector (ColorCorrector) feature if necessary. Enable
	// or disable this feature for each output individually. This setting is disabled
	// by default.
	ColorCorrector *ColorCorrector `locationName:"colorCorrector" type:"structure"`

	// Use Deinterlacer (Deinterlacer) to produce smoother motion and a clearer
	// picture.
	Deinterlacer *Deinterlacer `locationName:"deinterlacer" type:"structure"`

	// Enable the Image inserter (ImageInserter) feature to include a graphic overlay
	// on your video. Enable or disable this feature for each output individually.
	// This setting is disabled by default.
	ImageInserter *ImageInserter `locationName:"imageInserter" type:"structure"`

	// Enable the Noise reducer (NoiseReducer) feature to remove noise from your
	// video output if necessary. Enable or disable this feature for each output
	// individually. This setting is disabled by default.
	NoiseReducer *NoiseReducer `locationName:"noiseReducer" type:"structure"`

	// Timecode burn-in (TimecodeBurnIn)--Burns the output timecode and specified
	// prefix into the output.
	TimecodeBurnin *TimecodeBurnin `locationName:"timecodeBurnin" type:"structure"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Find additional transcoding features under Preprocessors (VideoPreprocessors). Enable the features at each output individually. These features are disabled by default.

func (VideoPreprocessor) GoString 

func (s VideoPreprocessor) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*VideoPreprocessor) SetColorCorrector 

func (s *VideoPreprocessor) SetColorCorrector(v *ColorCorrector) *VideoPreprocessor

SetColorCorrector sets the ColorCorrector field's value.

func (*VideoPreprocessor) SetDeinterlacer 

func (s *VideoPreprocessor) SetDeinterlacer(v *Deinterlacer) *VideoPreprocessor

SetDeinterlacer sets the Deinterlacer field's value.

func (*VideoPreprocessor) SetImageInserter 

func (s *VideoPreprocessor) SetImageInserter(v *ImageInserter) *VideoPreprocessor

SetImageInserter sets the ImageInserter field's value.

func (*VideoPreprocessor) SetNoiseReducer 

func (s *VideoPreprocessor) SetNoiseReducer(v *NoiseReducer) *VideoPreprocessor

SetNoiseReducer sets the NoiseReducer field's value.

func (*VideoPreprocessor) SetTimecodeBurnin 

func (s *VideoPreprocessor) SetTimecodeBurnin(v *TimecodeBurnin) *VideoPreprocessor

SetTimecodeBurnin sets the TimecodeBurnin field's value.

func (VideoPreprocessor) String 

func (s VideoPreprocessor) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*VideoPreprocessor) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *VideoPreprocessor) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type VideoSelector 

type VideoSelector struct {

	// If your input video has accurate color space metadata, or if you don't know
	// about color space, leave this set to the default value FOLLOW. The service
	// will automatically detect your input color space. If your input video has
	// metadata indicating the wrong color space, or if your input video is missing
	// color space metadata that should be there, specify the accurate color space
	// here. If you choose HDR10, you can also correct inaccurate color space coefficients,
	// using the HDR master display information controls. You must also set Color
	// space usage (ColorSpaceUsage) to FORCE for the service to use these values.
	ColorSpace *string `locationName:"colorSpace" type:"string" enum:"ColorSpace"`

	// There are two sources for color metadata, the input file and the job configuration
	// (in the Color space and HDR master display informaiton settings). The Color
	// space usage setting controls which takes precedence. FORCE: The system will
	// use color metadata supplied by user, if any. If the user does not supply
	// color metadata, the system will use data from the source. FALLBACK: The system
	// will use color metadata from the source. If source has no color metadata,
	// the system will use user-supplied color metadata values if available.
	ColorSpaceUsage *string `locationName:"colorSpaceUsage" type:"string" enum:"ColorSpaceUsage"`

	// Use the "HDR master display information" (Hdr10Metadata) settings to correct
	// HDR metadata or to provide missing metadata. These values vary depending
	// on the input video and must be provided by a color grader. Range is 0 to
	// 50,000; each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note
	// that these settings are not color correction. Note that if you are creating
	// HDR outputs inside of an HLS CMAF package, to comply with the Apple specification,
	// you must use the following settings. Set "MP4 packaging type" (writeMp4PackagingType)
	// to HVC1 (HVC1). Set "Profile" (H265Settings > codecProfile) to Main10/High
	// (MAIN10_HIGH). Set "Level" (H265Settings > codecLevel) to 5 (LEVEL_5).
	Hdr10Metadata *Hdr10Metadata `locationName:"hdr10Metadata" type:"structure"`

	// Use PID (Pid) to select specific video data from an input file. Specify this
	// value as an integer; the system automatically converts it to the hexidecimal
	// value. For example, 257 selects PID 0x101. A PID, or packet identifier, is
	// an identifier for a set of data in an MPEG-2 transport stream container.
	Pid *int64 `locationName:"pid" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Selects a specific program from within a multi-program transport stream.
	// Note that Quad 4K is not currently supported.
	ProgramNumber *int64 `locationName:"programNumber" type:"integer"`

	// Use Rotate (InputRotate) to specify how the service rotates your video. You
	// can choose automatic rotation or specify a rotation. You can specify a clockwise
	// rotation of 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees. If your input video container is
	// .mov or .mp4 and your input has rotation metadata, you can choose Automatic
	// to have the service rotate your video according to the rotation specified
	// in the metadata. The rotation must be within one degree of 90, 180, or 270
	// degrees. If the rotation metadata specifies any other rotation, the service
	// will default to no rotation. By default, the service does no rotation, even
	// if your input video has rotation metadata. The service doesn't pass through
	// rotation metadata.
	Rotate *string `locationName:"rotate" type:"string" enum:"InputRotate"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Selector for video.

func (VideoSelector) GoString 

func (s VideoSelector) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*VideoSelector) SetColorSpace 

func (s *VideoSelector) SetColorSpace(v string) *VideoSelector

SetColorSpace sets the ColorSpace field's value.

func (*VideoSelector) SetColorSpaceUsage 

func (s *VideoSelector) SetColorSpaceUsage(v string) *VideoSelector

SetColorSpaceUsage sets the ColorSpaceUsage field's value.

func (*VideoSelector) SetHdr10Metadata 

func (s *VideoSelector) SetHdr10Metadata(v *Hdr10Metadata) *VideoSelector

SetHdr10Metadata sets the Hdr10Metadata field's value.

func (*VideoSelector) SetPid 

func (s *VideoSelector) SetPid(v int64) *VideoSelector

SetPid sets the Pid field's value.

func (*VideoSelector) SetProgramNumber 

func (s *VideoSelector) SetProgramNumber(v int64) *VideoSelector

SetProgramNumber sets the ProgramNumber field's value.

func (*VideoSelector) SetRotate added in v1.99.0 

func (s *VideoSelector) SetRotate(v string) *VideoSelector

SetRotate sets the Rotate field's value.

func (VideoSelector) String 

func (s VideoSelector) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*VideoSelector) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *VideoSelector) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

type WavSettings 

type WavSettings struct {

	// Specify Bit depth (BitDepth), in bits per sample, to choose the encoding
	// quality for this audio track.
	BitDepth *int64 `locationName:"bitDepth" min:"16" type:"integer"`

	// Set Channels to specify the number of channels in this output audio track.
	// With WAV, valid values 1, 2, 4, and 8. In the console, these values are Mono,
	// Stereo, 4-Channel, and 8-Channel, respectively.
	Channels *int64 `locationName:"channels" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// The service defaults to using RIFF for WAV outputs. If your output audio
	// is likely to exceed 4 GB in file size, or if you otherwise need the extended
	// support of the RF64 format, set your output WAV file format to RF64.
	Format *string `locationName:"format" type:"string" enum:"WavFormat"`

	// Sample rate in Hz.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"8000" type:"integer"`
	// contains filtered or unexported fields
}

Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to the value WAV.

func (WavSettings) GoString 

func (s WavSettings) GoString() string

GoString returns the string representation

func (*WavSettings) SetBitDepth 

func (s *WavSettings) SetBitDepth(v int64) *WavSettings

SetBitDepth sets the BitDepth field's value.

func (*WavSettings) SetChannels 

func (s *WavSettings) SetChannels(v int64) *WavSettings

SetChannels sets the Channels field's value.

func (*WavSettings) SetFormat added in v1.14.0 

func (s *WavSettings) SetFormat(v string) *WavSettings

SetFormat sets the Format field's value.

func (*WavSettings) SetSampleRate 

func (s *WavSettings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *WavSettings

SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.

func (WavSettings) String 

func (s WavSettings) String() string

String returns the string representation

func (*WavSettings) Validate added in v1.14.0 

func (s *WavSettings) Validate() error

Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.

Source Files

View all Source files

Directories

Path Synopsis
Package mediaconvertiface provides an interface to enable mocking the AWS Elemental MediaConvert service client for testing your code.
 Package mediaconvertiface provides an interface to enable mocking the AWS Elemental MediaConvert service client for testing your code.

Jump to

Keyboard shortcuts

? : This menu
/ : Search site
f or F : Jump to
y or Y : Canonical URL
go.dev uses cookies from Google to deliver and enhance the quality of its services and to analyze traffic. Learn more.